Inventor Tutorials[1]

8/10/2019 Inventor Tutorials[1]

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/inventor-tutorials1 1/1261

Contents

Chapter 1 Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1What are Projects? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3What Else Do Projects Control? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Understand Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Examine a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Understand Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Select a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Use the Projects Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Test Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Manage Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Use Paths in Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Refine your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Use Your Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Control Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15File Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Use Other Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Collaborate with Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 2 Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

i



The ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Overview: SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Switch Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23The Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24More about Orbit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Click and Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Pan and Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Orbit and Pivot Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Up and Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Walk and Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Mini Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Drag Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Drag Geometry (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Drag All the Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Rotate a Sketched Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Constrain to the Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Apply a Horizontal Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Apply a Perpendicular Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Apply a Parallel Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Apply a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Apply an Angular Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Examine Constraint Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Delete a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Open the Sketch Profile file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Revolve the Sketch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Interpreting the In-Canvas Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Create a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ii | Contents



Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Draw the Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Mirror the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Create a Third Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Extrude the Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Create an Edge Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Create a Tapped Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Rotate a Face Using the Triad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Chapter 5 Parts 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . 97Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Create and Pattern a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Create a Revolved Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Use Save As to Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Create a Concentric Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Edit the Tapped Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Mirror a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Chapter 6 Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Create the Mounting Base Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Sketch on a Part Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Create a Tangent Work Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Add the Base Mounting Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 7 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Create the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Create a Contact Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Insert and Constrain a Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Edit a Part in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Constrain Cylindrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Add the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Contents | iii



Chapter 8 Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Create a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209View Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Add a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Place Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Place Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Place Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Radial and Reference Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Add a Hole Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Open an Assembly Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Place a Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Add Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Adjust the Leader Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Place Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Set the project and open the Tutorial File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Object Defaults and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Override Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Custom Hatch Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Chapter 10 iLogic Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Prepare to Add Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Create a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Create a Text Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Create a True-False Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Set Parameter Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Create Feature Suppression Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Create Feature Activation Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Create Dimension Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Test for Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Chapter 11 The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

iv | Contents



Interface Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Set the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Create a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Create a Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Finish the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Switch to an Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 7Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 8Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Place Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Use File Tabs and Edit the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Increase Screen Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Create Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Create Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Create Parts List and Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Customize Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Create Your Own Tab Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Export Tab Settings to XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Using Access Points through the Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 12 Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Review Content Center Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Place from Content Center Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Browse in Content Center Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335Place Content Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Create iMates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Place Content Manually Using iMates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Use AutoDrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Resize Standard Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Replace Standard Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Create Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Edit Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Format Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Contents | v



Chapter 14 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Work with Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Create the External Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Finish the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Review Parameter Assignment Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Open a Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Work with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Link Your External Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Prepare to Assign Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Modify Your Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Modify the Two Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Modify the Chamfer Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Modify the Hole Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Control Your Part with Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Update Your Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389Introduction to the Sample Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Open a Part Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Create Port Size Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392Create Block and Component Type Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Test the Block Shape Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Manage Part Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Test the Port Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Create Block Size Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Set the Component Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Reorder Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Change Driving Rule Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Update iProperties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Test the iProperties Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Start a New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Customize Components Before Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Add Control Parameters for Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435Create Rules in the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

vi | Contents



Calculate Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Test Your Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459Rule Text Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Chapter 17 Derived Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477Create a Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Create a Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479Understand Derived Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480Add Features to the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481Modify the Parent Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482Update the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484Protect the Derived Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484Restore and close the parent file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Chapter 18 iFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489Create an iFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491Insert an iFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492Place an iFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494Modify the iFeature File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Place iFeatures from a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501Configure Standard and User Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502Enable Edit of a Part Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503Edit the Family Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504Verify the Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505Use Save Copy As to Create a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Edit Family Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Verify Your Edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508Publish to Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511Verify the Published Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Contents | vii







Create the Third Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645Play the Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

Edit the Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649Open the Sample Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650Create an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654Create a Frame Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658Create a Frame Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659Create a Diagonal Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663Add a Second Horizontal Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665Derived Surface from Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667Complete the Frame Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671Assembly Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676Open Target Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680Constrain iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685Copy and Reuse iCopy Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688iCopy: File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Chapter 29 Use iCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691Open the Template Layout Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692Create the iCopy Template Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694Constrain the Template Layout Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696iCopy Author - Layout tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696iCopy Author - Geometry tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697iCopy Author - Parameter tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701Create a Frame Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710Complete the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713Constrain the Frame Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717Place the Support Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726Test the iCopy Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

x | Contents



Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739Create Spline Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741Create a Spline Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745Create a Lofted Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face . . . . . . . . . . . 749Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752Create Another Split Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765Isolate the Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766Create an Offset Surface and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767Create an Embossed Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772Create a Vented Opening Using Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

Chapter 31 Bolted Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784Place the Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787Place the Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789Add the Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790Use Existing Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795Edit Bolted Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Modify Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805Change Bolted Connection Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809Change Configuration of Bolted Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Chapter 32 Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820Create an Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821Start the Shaft Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8212D and 3D Dynamic Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822Add Shaft Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823Specify Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825Specify Shaft Element Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827Change Dimensions of Cone Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830Change Dimensions of the Next Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832Insert Cylindrical Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Contents | xi



Add Shaft to Templates Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835The Calculation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

Specify Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836Specify Loads and Perform Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839Insert the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840Edit the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845Open Sample File and Start Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846Spur Gears Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847Select Gear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851Place the Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853Place the Second Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856Enter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859Perform the Calculation and Set File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864Select the Belt Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865Select Belt Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867Select First Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868Set First Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868Select Second Pulley Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870Set Second Pulley Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871

Change Pulley Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872Specify the Second Pulley Final Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876

Chapter 35 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . 879Select Type of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882Set Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882Update the Bearing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883Select Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

xii | Contents



Insert First Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value . . . . . . . . . . 885

Select Bearing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887Place and Insert Second Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 36 Disc Cams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893Specify Disc Cam Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894Specify Disc Cam Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895Set Segment Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896Adding Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897Create Your Own Motion File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899File Name Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Chapter 37 Compression Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905Start the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . 908Measure the Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912Perform the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 915Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

Chapter 38 Weldments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919Welding Steps Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920Weldment Feature Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922Open an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924Weld Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927Complete the Cosmetic Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928Weld Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930Complete the Weld Extent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930Create a 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931Complete the 3D Fillet Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932Change Weld Symbol Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934Add a Machining Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Contents | xiii



Add an Extrude Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936Complete the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Extrude the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937Feature Rollback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939Create a Weldment Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940Place Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940Complete Orthographic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941As-machined Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942Projected Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943Retrieve Weld Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944Add a Caterpillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945Add a Caterpillar (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948

Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952Open the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954Prepare Your Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956Create the Open Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958Create a Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960Complete the Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963Place a Flange Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968Sketch Punch Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971Punch Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973Punch Holes (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975Mirror the Punched Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976Create the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

Place a Punch Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989Lofted Flange - Create the Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993Rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994Rip (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003Bend Order Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005Directed Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007Sequential Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

xiv | Contents



Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

Create a Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022Create a Second Contour Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023Add another Contour Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026Flatten the Rolled Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028Unfold and Refold Feature Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030Continue Unfold Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032Partially Unfold the Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036Complete the Unfold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040Add a Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044Pattern the Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046Add Two Refold Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050

Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054Edit the Project and Open the Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056Add a New Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057Change the Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material . . . . . 1058Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief . . . 1060Save Styles to Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062Create Sample Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063Use Sheet Metal Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069Update Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073

Chapter 42 Frame Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077Skeletal Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077Insert Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079Profile Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081Create Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086Place the Upper C-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087Orient the Upper C-channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090Place the Lower C-channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091Place the Horizontal tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094Place the Angle Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100Create Miter Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102

Contents | xv



Change Miter Joint Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103Remove End Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Re-create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108Trim Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109Cut Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117Change Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118Load Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119Modify the Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119Hybrid Skeleton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122Insert Profile - Select Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members . . . . . . . . . 1129Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130

Create Miter Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132Insert Profile - Place Other Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135Insert Profile - Add Support Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138Cut Profile - Trim Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141Lengthen Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142Notch Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145Insert Profile - Point To Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147Cut Profile - Trim Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Chapter 43 DWG Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160Open a New Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161Import DWG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162

Extrude Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163Orient the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165Change the Part Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166Save the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168

Chapter 44 DWG Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170Open Part and Access DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171Import DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172Extrude Sketch Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173Create a Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176Create a Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186

xvi | Contents



Chapter 45 DWG Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189Create New Assembly File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191Create In-place Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192Insert DWG Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193Extrude Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194Create Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196Create Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199Create Cut Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208Show Origin Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209Add Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210Unconstrained Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212Grounded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213Constrain the Panel Part - Display Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221View the Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224

Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

About this tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227Translate the Alias Wire File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229Update the Inventor Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Contents | xvii



xviii



Projects

About this tutorial

Create a project to manage files.

New UsersCategory

20 minutesTime Required

1

1



Start a new project fileTutorial File

Used

This exercise explains the purpose and function of the Autodesk Inventor

project file (*.ipj file). You do not need to complete this tutorial to complete

any of the other tutorial exercises.

If you are working for a company that already uses Autodesk Inventor, the

chances are good the company already has one or more existing project files.

If so, consult the CAD Manager or a co-worker to determine the company

policy regarding project files. You may be able to set the proper project file

and move on to the other exercises.

This tutorial is intended to provide a "best practices" example in which a single

project file controls all the searchable directories. The single master project

file technique provides stability and simplicity. It also makes the data moreaccessible to document control systems such as Vault or Productstream.

NOTE A master project file supports the use of other project files. You can create

multiple project files if they are needed for prototyping or other development

work. If multiple project files are required, they should be located in subfolders

beneath the master project folder for stability and simplicity.

Objectives

■ Learn about Project file options.

■ Create a simple project file to introduce the concepts Inventor uses to

manage files.

Prerequisites■ Inventor is installed.

■ Inventor is open in a blank document state.

■ Desire to learn how to create Project files.

Navigation Tips

■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or

return to the previous one.

Next (page 3)

2 | Chapter 1 Projects



What are Projects?

Relationships exist between the various files you create with Autodesk Inventor.

Projects files are text files saved in an xml format that specify the valid file

locations for Autodesk Inventor data. For example, a part is usually linked to

both an assembly and a drawing document. To avoid broken links or browsing

for files that were not found, an understanding of Project files is essential.

If you plan on using a data management solution such as Autodesk Vault or

Productstream, a clean file folder structure and a single master project file can

ease the transition.

A single master project file provides:

■ Simplicity

■ Reduced file resolution failures

■ Increased design re-use

Autodesk Inventor actively supports two types of projects:

■ Single-user project

What are Projects? | 3



■ Vault project (If Autodesk Vault is installed)

We recommend using Autodesk Vault for users whose sharing requirementsextend beyond a single-user project. Vault provides a file check-out and

check-in process which prevents files from being accidentally overwritten.

Autodesk Vault also contains other powerful file management tools such as

easily copying an entire design.

For more information on Autodesk Vault and the Autodesk Data Management

Server, please refer to the Implementation Guide. This guide is delivered in

.pdf format with Vault.

Previous (page 1) | Next (page 4)

What Else Do Projects Control?

The following list summarizes a few of the purposes and features of projects.

■ The Styles Library folder identifies where the program stores

project-specific styles definitions.

■ The Templates folder identifies where the program stores file templates.

■ The Content Center Files folder identifies the root folder for the Content

Library files of the project.

■ The Libraries folders store standard components.

■ The Frequently Used Subfolders create shortcuts to folders deeply

nested within project locations.

You create, modify, and manage your projects using the Projects editor.

You can access the Projects editor dialog box from Autodesk Inventor, or

externally from the Microsoft Windows Start menu.


Understand Projects

All projects contain the following parameters:

■ Workspace location (or a workgroup location)

■ Styles folder, Templates folder, and a location for Content Center

Components■ Project options




Projects can also contain any of the following parameters:

■ Included project file

■ Library search paths

■ Frequently used subfolders

A simple project typically contains a workspace parameter, and perhaps some

subfolders and library search paths.


Examine a Project

When you install Autodesk Inventor, it creates a Default project, an iLogic

Samples project, and a tutorial_files project automatically.

Examine a simple project:

1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files.

2 Click ➤

Manage

➤

Projects.

Examine a Project | 5



3 Click tutorial_files in the upper pane of the Projects editor dialog box.

The contents of the file display in the lower pane of the Projects editor.





Understand Workspaces

In addition to the default Folder Options and Options parameters, the

tutorial_files project contains only one other parameter, a workspace

location. It is the simplest type of project.

The workspace points to the folder where your tutorial exercise files are

installed.

When this project is active, the Open, Save, and Place Component dialog

boxes default to this location.

Only one workspace can be defined in a single-user project.


Select a Project

To select a project and make it the active project.

1 In the top pane of the Projects editor, locate the name of the project; in

this case, locate the tutorial_files project.

2 Double-click tutorial_files.

Understand Workspaces | 7



A check mark appears next to the project name, indicating that it is the

active project file.

In the lower pane, the workspace path is absolute and defined as "Location =

(wherever you installed Autodesk Inventor)\Inventor {version}\Tutorial Files\."


Use the Projects Editor

In the upper section of the Projects editor you can create, rename, and delete

projects (excluding the Default and tutorial_files projects). You can also

browse for existing projects.

In the lower section, you can modify the parameters of the current project.Right-click to access context menus with available options, or use the

commands at the bottom and side of the editor.





Test Project Settings

Next, test the project settings.

1 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

2 Click ➤

Open.

The Tutorial Files folder opens, and its files and subfolders are listed.

If you hover over the Workspace entry in the Open dialog box, the tooltip

indicates that the Tutorial Files folder is defined as your workspace.

In addition, any libraries and subfolders that you define are also accessible

here.

Test Project Settings | 9







Manage Projects

You use the Projects editor to manage your designs.

You can create new projects as you need them, and modify existing projects

when paths change or new paths are required.

Place common search paths (such as library search paths) in a separate project

file. You can then specify this file as the included project file in your other

project files. All search paths in the included project file are added to the

current project file.


Use Paths in Projects

If you are working alone, your single-user project might only contain a

workspace and perhaps one or more library paths for files such as standard

fasteners.

NOTE If you are working as part of a team, consider using Autodesk Vault, and

discuss project and file-sharing strategies with team members.

Manage Projects | 11



Use the Projects editor from Autodesk Inventor or from the Microsoft Windows

Start menu to maintain and manage your projects.


Create a Project

Next, we create a project.

1 Create a folder on your local hard drive in the My Documents area.

Name the new folder InventorMasterProject.

2 Locate the Tutorial Files folder in the Autodesk Inventor install

directory.

3 Copy the Arbor Press folder to the InventorMasterProject folder.

Notice that the Arbor Press folder contains two subfolders to further

organize the data files.

4 Start Autodesk Inventor in a blank document state.




5 If the Projects dialog box is not currently open, close any open files, and

then click ➤

Manage ➤

Projects.

6 Click New at the bottom of the dialog box.

7 Click New Single User Project, and then select Next on the Autodesk

Inventor project wizard dialog box that appears.

8 In the Name field, enter: InventorMasterProject

9 In the Project (Workspace) Folder, select Browse to navigate to the

InventorMasterProject folder.

10 Select InventorMasterProject from the folder list and click OK to

close the Browse For Folder dialog box.

11 Click Finish in the Inventor project wizard dialog box to create the

project.

Autodesk Inventor adds the new project to the list of your other projects

and makes the new project the currently active project.


Refine your Project

Now we will refine the project with additional settings.

1 In the lower panel of the Projects editor, select Use Style library.

2 Right-click, and choose Read-Write in the context menu.

Setting the Style Library option to Read-Write enables read/writecapabilities for the xml files that control styles such as dimensioning,

materials, and appearances.

3 Select Libraries, and right click to access the context menu.

4 Choose Add Path in the context menu.

Inventor creates a folder named Library under the InventorMasterProject

folder.

NOTE Library folders are used to hold standard components that do not

change. You can store library files on a shared, read-only network folder to

provide access for all users.

Files placed in a project libraries folder cannot be edited in the context

of the project file. To edit a file that resides in a defined project file library

Refine your Project | 13



location, create a project file that does not list this directory as a project

library folder.

If you edit a file saved in an active library location, the following message

displays: Cannot modify the library file C:\My

Documents\InventorMasterProject\Library\<filename>.

TIP To create a separate folder for library files without limiting the edit

abilities, do not use the project to define the Library. Instead, create a library

folder with the required name nested under the project file folder.

5 Select Frequently Used Subfolders, and right-click to access the

context menu.

■ Use Add Path to add one directory folder at a time. You can provide

a unique shortcut name for each folder added.

■ Use Add Paths from File to specify another project file to add

paths.

■ Use Add Paths from Directory to add all subfolders beneath the

selected folder to the subfolder list.

6 Select Add Paths from Directory, and select the Arbor Press folder.

7 Click OK to close the Browse For Folder dialog box.

Notice that the subfolders located beneath the Arbor Press folder appear

in the Projects dialog box.

8 Click Save, and then click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

NOTE In the future, press Esc to exit any Add Path operation without

adding a path.


Use Your Project

1 Click ➤

Open.

Notice the Workspace is the InventorMasterProject folder. The Open

dialog box shows all the subfolders contained in the root of the

workspace.

2 In the upper-left panel of the Open dialog box, choose the Components

folder under Frequently Used Subfolders.




3 The Components folder containing the arbor press part files opens.

4 To navigate back to the root of the workspace, click Workspace in the

upper-left panel.

Notice the Content Center Files folder is listed as an available Library

in the left panel.

5 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box.


Control Projects

In the Projects Editor dialog box, use the right-click context menus in the

upper pane to:

■ Rename existing projects.

■ Browse for existing projects.

■ Create new projects.

■ Delete existing projects.

You can directly edit the various parameters in the current project using

context menus to add, change, and delete paths.

You can also change optional settings for a project, including the number of

file versions to store.


File Versions

Each time you save an Autodesk Inventor file, the previous version of the file

is stored in an OldVersions folder under the folder containing the file.

You can specify how many versions of each file are stored in the OldVersions

folder.

1 Expand Options.

2 Select Old Versions To Keep On Save.

3 Click the Edit selected item button (on the right-hand portion of the

dialog box).

4 Enter the number of versions to keep.

Control Projects | 15



Once the specified number of saved versions is reached, subsequent saves

eliminate the oldest version.

Old versions are formatted as follows:

■ First save of existing file = file name.0001.extension.

■ Second save of existing file = file name.0002.extension.

■ Subsequent saves are named in a similar manner.

You can open an older version of a file as a read-only file. Alternatively, you

can restore an old version as the current version of the file. Before the

restoration of an old version, the file is saved as the most recent version in

the OldVersions folder.

NOTE Assembly files always use the current version of parts included in the

assembly. Old versions of assembly files do not retain information on the part and

subassembly versions that were in effect when you saved the assembly.


Use Other Paths

In addition to a workspace, you can also define library and subfolder search

paths.

Search paths are examined in a specific order when opening a file (for example,

an assembly) that references other files.

The Using Unique File Names option determines how Autodesk Inventor

behaves when searching for missing file references.

■ When this option is Yes, Autodesk Inventor searches the entire project

workspace and workgroups (including subfolders) for a file with that name.

If a file with that name is found, Autodesk Inventor uses it. If more than

one is found, then Autodesk Inventor displays a dialog box listing all the

files with that name. If the missing file name is not found, Autodesk

Inventor activates the Resolve Link dialog box, where you can provide

input as needed.

■ When set to No, Autodesk Inventor uses its normal search process.





Collaborate with Others

The primary collaborative environment for Autodesk Inventor is Autodesk

Vault.

Autodesk Vault is an engineering data management system that offers filesecurity, version control, and multi-user support. By using Autodesk Vault,

you have a copy of the necessary project data in your workspace. All previous

versions are maintained in a vault repository, which can be either on your

own computer or on a shared server. Autodesk Vault manages a collaborative

work environment by tracking file versions. Other users can get the latest

version of data, modify it, and check the changes back into the vault.

NOTE Autodesk Inventor also continues to support two other legacy project

environments: shared and semi-isolated. Discuss these project types with your

system administrator or CAD Manager if your site is currently using either.

Collaborate with Others | 17




Summary

This tutorial introduced you to single-user project fundamentals including:

■ Understanding projects

■ Working with projects

■ Creating a simple project

■ Testing a new project file

If you are working with an existing collaborative team of Autodesk Inventor

users, discuss their use of the legacy project types: shared and semi-isolated.

We recommend that you use Autodesk Vault for team collaboration.

Previous (page 17)




Navigation Tools

About this tutorial

SteeringWheel

ViewCube

Navigate in 3D space.

New UsersCategory


Tutorial File Used

2

19



NOTE Click and read the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions atht-

tp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial

data sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the

datasets as instructed.

Objectives

■ Demonstrate the View Cube and SteeringWheels commands using a

combination of text, images, and animations.

■ Understand view tools to help navigate 3D model space efficiently.

Prerequisites

■ Know how to open files.

■ See the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or


NOTE The ViewCube and SteeringWheels appear in several Autodesk

products. Some of the features and functions of these tools might not be

appropriate for a particular workflow.

Next (page 20)

The ViewCube

20 | Chapter 2 Navigation Tools

http://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets






The ViewCube is an on-screen device, like Common View.

In R2009 and later, the ViewCube replaces Common View.

Like Common View, you click the cube corners to snap the model to

isometric views, and click the faces for orthographic views. The ViewCube

provides the following additional features:

■ Persists onscreen in a corner of the graphics window (you can specify which

corner).

■ Can be dragged to orbit the model.

■ Provides labeled faces to indicate current view angle relative to the model

world.

■ Provides clickable edges (along with the clickable corners and faces).

■ Provides a Home button to return to a user-defined base view.

■ Provides the ability to set the Front and Top views to user-defined views,

thereby also redefining the other orthographic views, along with the

isometric views. The redefined views are recognized by other environments

or applications such as drawings or DWF.

■ In orthographic views, provides rotation arrows so you can rotate the

camera in 90-degree increments, normal to the screen.

■ Provides options so that you can adjust the cube characteristics according

to your preferences.


The ViewCube | 21



Overview: SteeringWheels

SteeringWheels is a convenient onscreen pallet of familiar navigation

controls, as well as controls that may be new to you.

SteeringWheels provides:

■ Zoom Change the camera distance from the model. Zoom direction can

be reversed relative to mouse motion.

■ Orbit Change the camera position around a pivot point.

■ Pan Translate the camera across the screen.

■ Center Redefine the orbit center point.

In addition, SteeringWheels adds some controls that are either new to

Autodesk Inventor or noticeably different and improved in their behavior:

■ Walk In Perspective mode, the ability to navigate through a model,much as you might walk through passages in a building.

■ Look InPerspective mode, the ability to change your view angle without

changing camera position, like pivoting a camera in any direction around

a fixed point, or like moving your head from side to side or up and down.

■ Up/Down The ability to translate the camera upwards or downwards,

the direction defined as normal to the Top face of the ViewCube.

■ Rewind The ability to quickly, graphically select any previous view or

perspective through a series of thumbnails.

SteeringWheels follows the cursor. You can access this pallet of tools

instantly, without having to move the cursor to an icon on the ribbon. Like

the ViewCube, you can turn SteeringWheels on and off through thedrop-down menu in the Navigate panel of the View tab. Also, like the




ViewCube, SteeringWheels has options for tailoring the tool to your

preferences.


Hands-on Demo: ViewCube

The remainder of the tutorial highlights certain characteristics and behaviors

that may not be familiar or readily apparent. The tutorial is not intended to

cover every aspect of the tools. See Help for further detailed information. Any

references to default settings are based on the templates that ship with

Autodesk Inventor.

The ViewCube is on by default (select View ➤

Windows ➤

User Interface

to turn the ViewCube on and off). The default location for the ViewCube is

in the upper-right corner of the screen. The ViewCube is partially transparent

when inactive.


Switch Views

1 Click an edge to switch to an edge-on view.

2 Click a face to switch to an orthographic view.

3 In an orthographic view, the Z-rotation arrows are available and provide

a rotation axis normal to the screen. The axis passes through the

geometric center of the model. Click an arrow to rotate the model 90degrees.

Also in orthographic view, the program shows arrows to select faces

adjacent to the displayed face.


The Shadow

Notice that a shadow is adjacent to the bottom face. It always moves with the

bottom face to provide a constant, almost subliminal, indication of the Up

direction of the model.

Hands-on Demo: ViewCube | 23



For most models, the sense of “up” is inherent in the model, or is not

important. However, for some models and modeling situations, such as running

a gravity-influenced motion simulation, a clear and constant sense of up anddown may be useful or important. The shadow does not display when the

Bottom face is visible.


Orbit

You can also use the ViewCube to orbit the model. Click and drag the cube

to adjust your view.

Unless you are an AutoCAD user, the term “Orbit” may be new to you. Prior

to Inventor 2009, all user interface labels and tooltips, along with Help

documentation, used the term “Rotate.” Though Rotate is descriptive of this

particular interaction with the model, it is not technically accurate. Every

view of the model is actually from the viewpoint of a mobile camera, as if you

are looking at the model through a camera. When you rotate a model, the

camera is actually orbiting the model.

Fortunately for veteran Autodesk Inventor users, the default behavior is the

same as it was in previous versions.


More about Orbit

In Inventor 2009, an additional, optional orbit behavior was added, known

as constrained orbit. Again, unless you are an AutoCAD user, this behavior

may be new to you. For the existing orbit behavior, the orbit is free about the

screen axes. For constrained orbit, the orbit is constrained about the Up

direction of the model.

To see the difference between the two types:

1 Position the model in an isometric view with the Top face of the cube

on top.

2 On the ribbon, click View tab ➤

Navigate panel ➤

Constrained

Orbit (grouped with the Orbit command).




3 Position the cursor outside the reticle, adjacent to one of the horizontal

markers. Click and drag the cursor across the screen. The orbit is

constrained to the Up axis of the model.

4 Click the Free Orbit icon , and drag the cursor as before.

Notice that the orbit axis is parallel to the screen.

If you are an AutoCAD user and new to Autodesk Inventor, you may

find Constrained Orbit familiar and comfortable.


Home View

The Home button appears when you pause the cursor over the ViewCube.

1 Click the Home button. The viewpoint returns to a predefined location.

NOTE In R2009 and later, the context menu option Isometric View (F6) has

been changed to Home View.

You can set any viewpoint—not just an isometric view—as the Home

view.

2 Orbit the model to some arbitrary viewpoint.

3 Right-click the ViewCube, and then select Set Current View as

Home ➤

Fixed Distance.

The Home view is now the specified view.


Front View

You can also set any viewpoint as the Front view.

1 Select any face on the ViewCube, other than the face currently labeled

as Front.

2 Right-click the ViewCube, and select Set Current View as Front.

This function also reorients all the other orthographic and isometric modelviews, For example, the Back view must always be opposite the Front view.

Home View | 25



Notice that the view does not need to be orthographic. You can specify any

viewpoint to be the Front view.

To pick up model view redefinitions in a drawing, ensure that the From

Model option is selected in the Style and Standard Editor. To access to this

option:

1 Start a new drawing.

2 On the ribbon, select Manage tab ➤

Styles and Standards panel

➤

Styles Editor.

3 In the Style and Standard Editor browser, select the relevant standard

under the Standard node.

4 Select the View Preferences tab.

5 Ensure From Model is selected on the Front View Plane drop-down

menu.

As suggested in the introduction, drawing views created after a model view

redefinition honor the redefined model view.

On the other hand, model view redefinition is not backward-associative.

Drawing views created before a model view is redefined do not update to

match the redefinition.

Close the Style and Standard editor.


Hands-on Demo: SteeringWheels

Unlike the ViewCube, SteeringWheels is not on by default. On the ribbon,

click View tab ➤

Navigate panel ➤

Full Navigation Wheel.

SteeringWheels follows your cursor, also by default.

This feature makes the tool convenient in terms of access. If you find this

behavior distracting and a little disorienting, hopefully, with a little use, you

will grow accustomed and appreciate the convenience and immediacy. If you

find that you really would like to use SteeringWheels, but the

cursor-following behavior continues to be a distraction, you can use one of

the mini wheels. More information on that option is provided later in this

tutorial.





Click and Hold

Probably the most important behavior to note about SteeringWheels is that

to use one of the controls, you must click and hold the mouse button. The

control is only active while you hold the mouse button. Click and hold Pan

, then drag the cursor across the screen. Release the button and the control

automatically ends.

The advantage with this behavior is that you do not need any extra motions

(like pressing Esc, bringing up a context menu, or pressing the command

again) to end the command.


Pan and Screen Size

Another interesting and convenient behavior that affects some of the controls

is that cursor movement is not limited by screen size. This is easiest to

demonstrate with the Pan control. To see this:

1 Click and hold Zoom, and then draw the mouse towards you to zoom

in close on the model.

2 Click and hold Pan, and then drag the cursor across the screen.

Notice that the cursor leaves the screen, and then instantly appears on

the opposite side.

You can pan more with one hand motion before you have to reposition your

hand on the mouse pad. The limiting factor is the mouse pad and cursor speed

or acceleration, not the screen size. While this may seem insignificant, it all

adds up. This feature may take a little getting used to when you are used to

the Pan cursor stopping against the edge of the screen.


Click and Hold | 27



Orbit and Pivot Point

As mentioned earlier, the actual behavior of the Orbit control is the same as

earlier releases, as long as you selected Free Orbit on the ribbon.

1 Click and hold Orbit, and then drag the cursor. If Constrained Orbit

is selected, then the Orbit control honors that setting.

Notice that a Pivot indicator appears on screen as you orbit. The indicator

provides positive feedback as to the orbit center point location. You can

modify the pivot point and snap to model edges and vertices.

2 Press and hold Center, select a vertex, and then release the mouse

button. The orbit center point is now that vertex.


Up and Down

Just as it sounds, you can use the Up/Down control to translate the camera

up and down. Up/Down translates the camera along the top/bottom axis.


Rewind

If you have ever wanted to save and quickly access views in a part document,

try using the Rewind control.

1 Press and hold the Rewind control. A set of thumbnails appear, almost

like a film strip, showing you a selectable history of model views.

2 Drag the cursor to the left across the thumbnails. The model view

seamlessly animates back through the preceding views.

3 Release the mouse button to select a view.

Notice that the selected view can be any ‘intermediate’ view, not just

the views shown in the thumbnails. Previous views are stored only for

that session.





Walk and Look

The Walk and Look controls work especially well when used in conjunction

with each other. The controls only function when in Perspective mode. If

you are in Orthographic mode, when you click either control, the camera

automatically switches to Perspective mode.

Before proceeding with the following steps, right-click the wheel and select

Options. Clear the checkmark next to Walk Tool - Constrain movement

to ground plane. Click OK.

1 Orient the model as shown. Press and hold Walk. Move the mouse

forward, and the camera moves through the model. Move the mouse to

the side, and the camera moves laterally. Release the mouse button.

The walk speed is proportional to the cursor distance from walk origin

indicator.

2 Press and hold Look. Move the mouse, and the camera pivots around

a fixed point in that direction.

3 Now use the controls in conjunction. Press Walk to move through the

model, then press Look to turn and look down the next “walk path.”

Use the Walk control again to move down that line of sight.


Other Features

If you have multiple windows open, SteeringWheels passes seamlessly fromwindow to window.

■ As an alternative to right-clicking to bring up the SteeringWheel context

menu, you can click the context menu button to bring up the menu.

Walk and Look | 29



■

To switch the display of SteeringWheels on and off, press Ctrl + W.■ To dismiss SteeringWheels, click the x at the top right of the tool.


Mini Wheels

The full version of SteeringWheels displays by default, but you can specify

other full-size versions of SteeringWheels as well as miniature versions of

each wheel. To experiment with these versions, right-click the

SteeringWheels tool, and select a version from the menu. For example,

select Mini View Object Wheel to see a small version of the full

SteeringWheels.


Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to:

■ Use the ViewCube to switch defined views.

■ Use the ViewCube to orbit a model.

■ Use the ViewCube to redefine named views.

■ Use the ViewCube to return to a home view.

■ Use SteeringWheels to orbit a model and redefine the orbit pivot point.




■ Rewind to and select previous viewpoints.

■ Navigate model space using the Walk and Look commands.

■ Access alternative SteeringWheels.

Check Help for further detailed information.

Previous (page 30)

Summary | 31



32



Sketch Constraints

About this tutorial

Explore the impact of geometric and dimensional constraints on a simple sketch.

New UsersCategory


3

33



sk1.iptTutorial File Used





Understand sketch constraints to work effectively with Autodesk Inventor.

Objectives

■ Apply constraints.

■ Establish relationships between geometry.

■ View and delete constraints.

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view

tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and

extruding.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 34)

Get Started

1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to open the sketch for edit.

2 To orient the view, click View Face from the navigation toolbar, and

click Sketch1 in the browser so the sketch is parallel to the screen.

34 | Chapter 3 Sketch Constraints







The sketch used in this tutorial contains four straight line segments

drawn so the line endpoints are constrained to be coincident. Otherwise,

the geometry is unconstrained.

Get Started | 35




Drag Geometry

Move the endpoint of one of the lines:

1 Move your mouse cursor over the top-most endpoint.

2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then

drag the point up and toward the right.

3 Release the mouse button to select the new position.




Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position specified for

the endpoint.


Drag Geometry (continued)

Move one of the lines:

1 Move your mouse cursor over the left-most line.

2 When it highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and then

drag the line toward the left.

Drag Geometry (continued) | 37




Two line segments lengthen to adjust to the new position while the

selected segment becomes shorter.


Drag All the Geometry

Move all the lines:

1 Move your mouse cursor to the left and below the sketch geometry.

2 Click and drag a selection window to the upper-right around the

geometry. Release the mouse button to select the geometry.




3 Move your mouse cursor over one of the lines.

4 When the line highlights, click and hold the mouse button down, and

then drag up and toward the right.


Drag All the Geometry | 39



The program repositions all the selected geometry without changing the

size or angle of any of the line segments.

6 Click in your graphic window to cancel the selection of all four line

segments before proceeding to the next step.





Rotate a Sketched Line

Rotate one of the lines:

1 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤

Modify panel ➤

Rotate.

2 Select the left-most line in the sketch.

3 Right-click and select Continue.

4 Select the lower endpoint of the line segment as your center point. This

is the pivot point for the rotation.

5 Click No on the dialog box which prompts you if you want to remove

constraints. If you click Yes, the constraints on the line are deleted and

the line rotates independent of the other geometry.6 Drag the displayed handle to rotate the line segment.

NOTE You can also enter a value in the Angle field of the dialog box and

click Apply to view the change.

Notice that one end of the line remains fixed while the program

dynamically repositions the other. The attached segment also adjusts

length and angle to stay attached.

7 Click to select a new angle for your line segment and click Done to close

the Rotate dialog box.

Rotate a Sketched Line | 41




Constrain to the Origin

1 Right-click the Origin folder in the browser, and select Expand All

Children to see the browser nodes you use to select the origin geometry

when it is not displayed.

2 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab

➤

Draw panel ➤

Project

Geometry.

3 Select the browser node Center Point to include the origin point as a

point in your sketch.

4 Click Sketch tab ➤

Constrain panel ➤

Coincident Constraint.

5 Select the lower endpoint of the left-most line, and then the projected

origin point.




Notice that two line segments adjust their length and angle to allow the

endpoint to become coincident with the origin point.

NOTE Do not be concerned if the shape of your geometry does not exactly

match the illustrations.


Apply a Horizontal Constraint

The set of geometric constraints contains both a horizontal and vertical

constraint. You can apply to lines to make them horizontal or vertical relative

to the sketch X or Y orientation.

1 Select the Horizontal Constraint command.

2 Select the lower line of the sketch.

NOTE Ensure that you select the line and not the line midpoint.

Notice that the lower segment becomes horizontal while remainingcoincident to the origin.

Apply a Horizontal Constraint | 43




Apply a Perpendicular Constraint

The set of geometric constraints contains a perpendicular constraint which

makes one line perpendicular to another.

1 Select the Perpendicular Constraint command.

2 Select the right-most line of the sketch.

3 Select the (now horizontal) lower line of the sketch.

The line segment becomes perpendicular to the lower segment.

NOTE If a design change later requires you to rotate your sketch, it is often

more appropriate to make one line perpendicular to another rather than

using the horizontal or vertical constraints (which prevent rotation).





Apply a Parallel Constraint

The set of geometric constraints contains a parallel constraint which makes

one line parallel to another.

1 Select the Parallel Constraint command.


3 Select the left-most line of the sketch.

Although the left line segment becomes parallel to the right line segment,

the length of the upper and lower lines changed.

Next, you apply dimensions which constrain your geometry to a specific size.


Apply a Parallel Constraint | 45



Apply a Dimension

Use the General Dimension command in the sketch environment to place

linear and angular dimensions. What you select determines what type of

dimension you obtain. If you want to dimension the length of a line, you can

select the line. If you want to place a dimension between two pieces of sketch

geometry, you can select each piece of geometry.


Constrain panel ➤

Dimension.


3 Select the left-most line of the sketch.

4 Click to place the dimension.

5 Click the dimension to change the value.

6 Enter a new value of 4 in, and click the check mark to apply the new

value.




TIP You can set an application option so you can edit dimensions during

placement. Each time you click to place a dimension, the Edit Dimension

dialog box appears automatically and you can specify the actual dimensionor equation. The option is called Edit dimension when created and

is located on the Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box.


Apply an Angular Dimension

The Dimension command is still active. Place an angle dimension between

the right-most vertical line and the top line:


2 Select the top-most line of the sketch.

3 Click between the lines to place the dimension.

4 Click the dimension to change the value.

5 Enter a new value of 60 deg , and click the check mark to apply the new

value.

Apply an Angular Dimension | 47



NOTE You can also delete dimensions. With no command active, right-click

the dimension and select Delete from the context menu. Alternatively,

select the dimension and then press the Delete key.

In the next steps, you explore which constraints you applied and ways to

delete constraints that you no longer need.


Show All Constraints

Knowing what constraints the program applies to which pieces of geometry

is critical to predictable sketch behavior.

1 Right-click in an empty area of your sketch.2 Select Done from the context menu to terminate the placement of

dimensions.

3 Right-click again in an empty area of your sketch.

4 Now select Show All Constraints from the context menu.




Notice that icons appear near each piece of geometry with indications

of the applied constraints.


Examine Constraint Relationships

The icons represent the constraints that you applied to the geometry or that

the system applied when you created the geometry.

Examine Constraint Relationships | 49



Pause your mouse over the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of

the right-most vertical line segment.

Notice that the lines which are perpendicular highlight, as does the

perpendicular constraint icon. Using this technique you can understand the

network of constraints that govern the behavior of your sketch.





Delete a Constraint

By right-clicking a displayed constraint icon, you can delete the constraint.

1 Right-click the perpendicular constraint icon near the bottom of the

right-most vertical line segment.

2 Select Delete to remove the perpendicular constraint between this line

and the horizontal lower line segment.

3 Click and drag the top-most endpoint to see how the geometry now

behaves.

Delete a Constraint | 51



Finally, right-click an empty area of your sketch, and select Hide All

Constraints to make the constraint icons invisible.


Summary

In this tutorial, you explored:

■ Various ways that under-constrained geometry behaves during dynamic

dragging.

■ The application of various geometric constraints such as: coincident,

horizontal, perpendicular, and parallel.

■ The application of dimensional constraints.

■ The effect of constraints on geometry size and position.

■ Access to a display of constraint relationships to their geometries.

■ Deleting constraints.

Previous (page 51)




Direct Manipulation

About this tutorial

New UsersCategory


Sliding-pin Hanger.iptTutorial File Used

4

53







Maximize your skill using Direct Manipulation to interact with models.

Direct Manipulation is a new user interface where you interact and modify a

model while viewing the changes in real time. The resulting interaction is

dynamic, visual, and predictable. You focus on the geometry in an in-canvas

display instead of interacting with user interface elements such as the ribbon,

browser, and a dialog box.

Objectives

■ Identify the various graphical elements of the Direct Manipulation

in-canvas display.

■ Rotate and extrude sketch profiles using manipulators.

■ Offset a work plane using a distance arrow.

■ Create a sketch using the mini-toolbar.

■ Use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to construct accurate

sketch geometry and have it automatically dimensioned.

■ Recognize the differences between Join, Cut, and Intersect graphical

previews.

■ Create an edge fillet.

■ Construct a tapped hole.

■ Rotate an existing face.

Prerequisites

■ See the Help topics "Getting Started", "Direct Manipulation", and “Dynamic

Input” for further information.

System Settings

On the ribbon Tools tab, Options panel, select Application Options and

click the Sketch tab to enable the following settings:

■ Edit dimension when created

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit

NOTE The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment

images in this tutorial.

54 | Chapter 4 Direct Manipulation







Navigation Tips



Next (page 55)

Open the Sketch Profile file

1 Click Get Started tab

➤

Launch panel

➤

Open on the

ribbon. Select Sliding-pin Hanger.ipt from the file list in the Open

dialog box.

2 Click OK.

3 The Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile appears in the isometric Home

View (isometric orientation) as shown. Press F6 to restore the Home

View if your view is different from the image.

Take a moment to study the Model browser at the left side of the graphics

window. It displays both the part origin and the sole feature in the part,

Sketch1. Click the + button to the left of the Origin folder name to expand

the item. Notice that the center point of the part (X=0, Y=0, Z=0), the origin

Open the Sketch Profile file | 55



planes, and origin axes are displayed in the browser. Each of the browser

elements highlights in the graphics window as you move your cursor over

them.

NOTE The Origin elements appear dimmed in the browser. Although their visibility

is turned off by default, they are still active. You can turn on the visibility by

right-clicking over any one of them and activating the corresponding Visibility

check box in the pop-up context menu. It is not necessary to turn them on for

this exercise, however.


Revolve the Sketch Profile

The Revolve command creates a feature by revolving one or more sketchprofiles about an axis through any angle measuring between zero and 360°.

The axis of revolution can be part of the profile or offset from it. The profile

and axis must be coplanar.

1 Click Model tab ➤

Create panel ➤

Revolve on the ribbon,

or press R to invoke the Revolve command.

After invoking the Revolve command, both the Direct Manipulation

in-canvas display and the title bar of the Revolve dialog box appear in

the graphics window. The dialog box is in a collapsed state, but can be

expanded by clicking the down arrow near the top of the dialog box.

For this tutorial, we use the Direct Manipulation in-canvas display andmini-toolbar to revolve the sketch profile rather than use the dialog box

options.

2 Observe that the sketch profile automatically highlighted when you

invoked the Revolve command because it is the only sketch in the part

file. Note also that the axis button in the mini-toolbar is highlighted

. This indicates that the revolution axis selection is not

yet satisfied.

3 Click to select the long horizontal axis of the profile.





Interpreting the In-Canvas Display

After selecting the axis of revolution, the in-canvas display appears in the

graphics window. Take a moment to examine the various elements of the

in-canvas display.

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 57



The value input box reports that a full 360° revolution will be performed

around the sketch axis you selected. It is the default condition for the Revolve

command and the graphical preview on your display screen reflects that.

However, you can enter any angular value in the value input box to create a

revolution other than a full 360°.

As an alternative to entering an explicit angular value in the value input box,

you can also click the gold rotation arrow manipulator. Then dynamically

drag the sketch profile around the axis of revolution.

1 Try it now. Click the rotation arrow manipulator and drag the profile

around the axis. First drag in one direction, and then try dragging in theopposite direction. As you drag the rotation arrow, observe the changing




angular values displaying in the value input box. Note also that the

graphical preview updates in real time to show the results of the Revolve

operation.

2 When you are finished experimenting with dynamic drag, direct your

attention to the Revolve mini-toolbar in the in-canvas display.

3 Starting at the upper-left, let us examine each of the buttons.

■ The grip button lets you easily move the mini-toolbar to a

different screen location.

■ The fly-out arrow on the Extents button offers

several termination options:

■ Angle lets you revolve the sketch profile around the axis at any

angle.■ To next face/body lets you revolve to an existing face or body

of a multi-body part.

■ To selected face/plane lets you revolve to an existing part face,

work plane, or work point.

■ Between two faces/planes lets you select beginning and

ending faces or work planes on which to terminate the revolution.

■ Full performs a full 360° of revolution around the sketch axis.

■ Click the Profile button and then select the sketch

to revolve. (Remember that the very first sketch in a new part file is

selected automatically.)

■ Click the Axis button and then select the axis about

which to revolve the profile.

■ The Solid button selects the participating solid body

in a multi-body part.

■ The Solid output button lets you revolve a profile into

a solid or a surface object.

Interpreting the In-Canvas Display | 59



■ The Join button adds the volume created by the revolved

feature to another feature or body. We will explore the Cut and

Intersect options a bit later in this tutorial.

■ The fly-out arrow on the Direction button displays

the direction options available:

■ Direction 1 revolves the sketch profile in the positive direction

(towards you).

■ Direction 2 revolves the sketch profile in the negative direction

(away from you).

■ Symmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions with

equal angular values.

■ Asymmetric revolves the sketch profile in both directions withdifferent angular values.

■ Click the Ok button to finish the Revolve command and

complete the revolution.

■ The Cancel button cancels the Revolve command. No

revolution is performed.

■ The Mini-Toolbar Options button offers two options.

You can pin the mini-toolbar so that it remains stationary in the

graphics window and/or use the Auto Fade option to enable or disablethe mini-toolbar display.

4 Now, select the Full option in the Extents button flyout and click the

green Ok button to complete the Revolve command.

5 Observe that the Revolution1 feature was added to the Model browser.

Click the + button to the left of the feature name to expand the item.

The feature has one child - the sketch from which it was created.

6 Move your cursor over both the Revolution1 feature name and

Sketch1 in the browser. The corresponding items highlight in the

graphics window as you do so.





Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane

In the next part of the tutorial, you create a work plane which is offset from

the default XY plane of the part origin. The work plane is the base for a new

sketch.

1 Click the down arrow of the Model tab

➤

Work Features

panel ➤

Plane command on the ribbon. Then select Offset from

Plane from the Plane drop-down menu .

2 Once again, direct your attention to the Model browser at the side of

the graphics window. The Origin folder should still be in an expanded

state. If not, click the + button to expand the part Origin folder.

3 As you did previously, move your cursor over the YZ Plane, the XZPlane, and the XY Plane in the browser. As each Origin plane

Create an Offset Parallel Work Plane | 61



highlights in the graphics window, make a point of identifying which

browser element corresponds to which origin plane in the graphics

window.

4 Click the XY Plane. Next, you create a work plane parallel to the default

XY plane (highlighted in blue), but at a specified distance.

5 Click the gold distance arrow manipulator and drag the parallel work

plane in a positive direction (towards you) approximately 38 mm.

Alternatively, you can directly enter 38 in the value input box. It is not

necessary to include the mm if you choose this method.

6 Click the green Ok button to create the parallel offset work plane and

end the command.

The new feature, Work Plane1, is added to the Model browser.





Create a New Sketch

We will now create a sketch on the work plane. In a later step, this sketch is

mirrored across the X axis of the part. It is used to cut away, or extrude,

portions of material from the cylindrical feature of the part.

1 Click any one of the four edges of the work plane.

2 When the mini-toolbar appears, click the second button on the right

labeled with the tooltip Create Sketch.

Create a New Sketch | 63



3 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is because

the Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketch

tab of the Application Options dialog box is active.

The new feature, Sketch2, is added to the Model browser.


Project Geometry onto the Sketch Plane

The Project Geometry command projects edges, vertices, work features,

loops, and curves from existing sketches or part geometry onto the currentsketch plane. It can also be used to project part origin planes and axes.

1 On the ribbon, click the Sketch tab

➤

Draw panel

➤

Project

Geometry button.

2 Select the top horizontal line and the arc representing the spherical

radius to project onto the sketch plane. Select the X axis from the




expanded Origin folder in the Model browser, as well.

3 After selecting the three elements, right-click in the graphics window

and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to end the Project

Geometry command. Alternatively, you can also press the Esc key on

your keyboard.


Draw the Sketch Geometry


Draw panel ➤

Line on the ribbon, or

press L to invoke the Line command. You can also right-click in the

graphics window and select Line at the top of the marking menu.

2 Left-click the point shown to begin the first point of the line. A green

dot appears to indicate that you have selected the precise endpoint of

the projected line. The Heads-Up Display (HUD) Pointer Input displays

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 65



the line starting coordinates as X = -25 mm, Y = 25 mm.

3 Move your cursor to the left (180°). End the first line segment by clicking

where the horizontal line intersects with the start of the spherical radius.

Do not be concerned with the displayed value in the value input box.

4 The first sketch line is now complete. The Line command can also be

used to draw an arc radius. For the starting point of the arc, click the

endpoint of the line you just drew. Press and hold the left mouse button




and drag your cursor to trace over a portion of the spherical radius.

5 The length of the arc segment is not important. Drag your cursor just

enough to approximate what you see in the image. Be sure to keep your

cursor on the spherical radius to ensure that the arc ending point is

coincident with the projected geometry. (A yellow dot at the end of thecursor and a coincident constraint symbol appear when you are

coincident with the sketch geometry.) Click to set the ending point of

the arc.

6 You now use the Dynamic Input Heads-Up Display (HUD) to sketch

another line with a precise distance and angle. Still in the Line

command, pick the ending point of the arc you just completed and move

your cursor to the right. Two value input boxes appear near your cursor

indicating the length (distance) and angle of the sketch line under

construction. Notice that the first value input box is highlighted and

awaits your input. Enter 60 in the box for the line length and press the

Tab key to shift the input focus to the second value input box. Enter 0

for the line angle and press the Tab key again.

7 Observe the small lock icon within each value input box. They indicatethat the values you entered are locked (constrained) for both the distance

and angle of the line. Note also the two parallelism glyphs indicating

Draw the Sketch Geometry | 67



that the two sketch lines are exactly parallel.

8 Press Enter to finish drawing the line. The dimensional values, called

persistent dimensions, are created and placed when Dynamic Input

is used to define sketch geometry.

9 Next, draw the final line segment back to the point at which you started.

When the green dot appears, click to complete the segment and close

the profile.

10 Finally, right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu, or

press the Esc key, to exit the Line command.

We will now create a vertical dimension to specify the width of theprofile.


Constrain panel ➤

Dimension on the

ribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. You can also

right-click in the graphics window and select General Dimension from

the marking menu.

12 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. (The endpoints appear

as red dots when you place your cursor over them.) Move your cursor

to the left and click to place the dimension.




13 Enter 9 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or press

Enter) to create the dimension.

14 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit theDimension command.


Mirror the Sketch

Before making a mirror image of the sketch, turn off the visibility of the work

plane. There are two ways to do it:

■ Right-click any one of the four edges of the work plane and clear the check

mark in theVisibility marking menu node.

■ Or, right-click Work Plane1 in the Model browser and clear the

Visibility check mark.

Your display screen should look like the following image.

NOTE The 60mm dimension has been moved and the angular dimension deletedin the image to provide clarity.

Mirror the Sketch | 69



You are now ready to mirror your new sketch about the X axis of the part.


Pattern panel ➤

Mirror on the ribbon.

The Mirror dialog box appears with the Select button active. Now pick

two diagonal points on the screen to enclose the sketch profile completely

within the Mirror window.

2 Move your cursor to the upper left and outside the sketch to pick the

first point. Next, move your cursor in a diagonal direction to the lower

right to pick the second point. As you move your cursor, the window

graphically previews to help you determine the required extents of the

Mirror window.

3 Click the Mirror line button in the Mirror dialog box and select the X

axis which you projected in a previous step.

4 Click the Apply button in the Mirror dialog box to preview the resultsof the mirror operation.




5 Click the Done button to mirror the sketch, close the Mirror dialog box,

and exit the Mirror command.

6 Click Sketch tab

➤

Exit panel

➤

Finish Sketch on the

ribbon to finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment. You can

also right-click in the graphics window and select Finish Sketch from

the marking menu.

7 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish

the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view.


Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles

The Extrude command creates a feature by adding depth to an open or closed

sketch profile. You specify the direction, depth, taper angle, and termination

method for the extrusion.

You now perform an extrude operation with a Cut that uses the two sketch

profiles to remove material from the cylindrical portion of the part.

1 Click Model tab

➤

Create panel

➤

Extrude on the ribbon,

or press E to invoke the Extrude command. You can also right-click in

the graphics window and select Extrude from the marking menu.

2 Select the two sketch profiles.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 71



3 After selecting the profiles, the in-canvas display appears in the graphics

window. The default option for the Extrude command is to perform a

Join operation. The graphical preview appearing on the screen displaysin green for a Join.

4 Click the flyout arrow on the Operation button and select the Cut

option .

5 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Direction button and select the

Direction 2 option , if not already active. Observe that the

graphical preview changes color from green to red to indicate a Cut

operation. Note also that the gold distance arrow manipulator has

reversed position and now points in a negative direction into the screen.

6 Take a moment now and try dragging the distance arrow backward and

forward over the object. The red graphical preview shows you the materialto be removed during a Cut operation.




NOTE As an experiment, click the flyout arrow on the Operation button

and select the Intersect option . An Intersect operation calculates

the shared volumes of two or more intersecting objects and graphically

previews in blue. After previewing the intersections, click the flyout arrow

on the Operation button and select Cut once again.

7 Next, click the flyout arrow on the Extents button to display

the termination options. Use

■ Distance to extrude a sketch profile with a numeric value which

you enter in the value input box. It is the default option.

■ To next face/body extrudes to the next part face or solid body

encountered in the direction of the extrusion.

■ To selected face/point extrudes to an existing part face, workplane, or work point.

■ Between two faces/plane selects beginning and ending faces or

work planes on which to terminate the extrusion.

■ Through All performs a Join, Cut, or Intersect operation through

the entire part.

8 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout

and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude

command.

The new feature, Extrusion1, is added to the Model browser.

Extrude the Two Sketch Profiles | 73




Create a Third Sketch

We now create a third sketch to draw and dimension a rectangle. The rectangle

is then extruded with a cut to produce a rectangular-shaped opening through

the part.

1 Click the flattened top face of the part.

2 The Direct Manipulation mini-toolbar appears and, starting from the

left, displays three buttons offering the following commands:

■ Edit Extrude

■ Edit Sketch

■ Create Sketch




3 Select the third button, Create Sketch.

4 The view automatically rotates parallel to the XY plane. This is becausethe Look at sketch plane on sketch creation option on the Sketch

tab of the Application Options dialog box is active.

5 The edges of the selected face are automatically projected. The

Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit option on the

Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is also active.

6 Click Sketch tab

➤

Draw panel

➤

Rectangle on the ribbon

and select Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu. You can

also right-click in the graphics window and select Two Point Rectangle

from the marking menu.

7 Pick the approximate point shown in the image to place the lower-rightcorner of the rectangle. Do not be concerned with the values displayed

Create a Third Sketch | 75



in the Pointer Input fields.

.

8 Move your cursor to the upper left to activate the rectangle horizontal

and vertical value input boxes. The current input focus is in the value

input field representing the horizontal dimension. Enter 50 and press

Tab. The lock icon indicates that the horizontal dimension of the

rectangle is fully constrained.

9 Input focus is now shifted to the second value input field representing

the vertical dimension. Enter 25 and press Tab.

10 Press Enter to draw and dimension the rectangle. The rectangle is fully

dimensioned because Dynamic Input with persistent dimensions was




used to input the dimensional values.

11 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu to exit the

Two Point Rectangle command.

NOTE To move a sketch dimension to a new location, select the dimension,

and press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the dimension. Release

the mouse button when the dimension is placed to your satisfaction.

The new feature, Sketch3, is added to the Model browser.

We now create a single vertical dimension to center the rectangle on the

flattened face.


Constrain panel ➤

Dimension on the

ribbon, or press D to invoke the Dimension command. Remember that

you can also select General Dimension from the marking menu.

13 Select the two line endpoints shown in the image. Move your cursor to

the left and click to place the dimension.

Create a Third Sketch | 77



14 Enter 6.71 in the Edit Dimension text box. Click the green arrow (or

press Enter) to create the dimension.

15 Right-click and select Done [Esc] from the marking menu.

16 Click Sketch tab

➤

Exit panel

➤

Finish Sketch on the

ribbon, or select Finish Sketch from the marking menu, to finish the

sketch and exit the sketch environment.

17 The model rotates automatically into the Home view when you finish

the sketch. If not, press function key F6 to rotate the view.





Extrude the Rectangle

Rather than use the Extrude command from the ribbon, keyboard, or marking

menu, Direct Manipulation provides another method to create an extrusion.

1 Select any one of the four lines comprising the sketched rectangle to

display the Sketch mini-toolbar.

2 Starting from the left, the Sketch mini-toolbar offers the following four

commands:

■ Extrude

■ Revolve

■ Hole

■

Edit Sketch

Extrude the Rectangle | 79



3 Click the Extrude button and select the rectangle as the profile to

extrude. Be sure to pick inside the rectangle.

4 When the Extrude mini-toolbar appears, click the flyout arrow on the

Operation button and select the Cut option .

5 Now, select the Through All option in the Extents button flyout

and click the green Ok button to complete the Extrude

command.

The new feature, Extrusion2, is added to the Model browser.





Create an Edge Fillet

Fillets and rounds are placed features that round off or cap interior or exterior

corners or features of a part. The Fillet command creates the following types

of fillets:

■ Edge fillets are created based on selected edges. The fillets can be of constantor variable-radius, of different sizes, and of different continuity (tangent

or smooth G2). They can all be created in a single operation. All fillets and

rounds created in a single operation become a single feature.

■ Face fillets are created between two faces or face sets. The faces need not

share an edge. Any small edges and irregular geometry are blended over

by the fillet.

■ Full round fillets are variable-radius fillets that are tangent to three adjacent

faces or face sets. The center face set is replaced by a variable-radius fillet.

Create an Edge Fillet | 81



We now create a simple edge fillet using Direct Manipulation.

1 Click the circular edge of the large diameter of the part.

2 The mini-toolbar appears offering both Fillet (first button) and Chamfer

(second button) command options.3 Click the Fillet button and the Fillet mini-toolbar appears.




NOTE While it is beyond the scope of this exercise to describe each of the

mini-toolbar components, you are encouraged to review the Fillet topic

in the Inventor Help.

4 For the purpose of this tutorial, we need only consider the following

four components of the mini-toolbar:

■ Value input box - used to enter a fillet radius in the value input

field.

■ Ok button - indicated by a green check mark, the Ok button creates

the fillet and terminates the command.

■ Apply button - indicated by a green '+', the Apply button lets you

apply one or more edge fillets without exiting the Fillet command.

■ Cancel button - indicated by a red 'X', the Cancel button cancels

the Fillet command. No fillets are created.

5 Try dragging the gold distance arrow manipulator forward and backward

over the circular edge. Observe how the fillet radius increases and

decreases in real time.

Create an Edge Fillet | 83



6 Drag the manipulator until 3.250 mm appears in the value input box,

or enter the value 3.25 from the keyboard.

7 Click the Ok button to create the fillet and exit the command.

The new feature, Fillet1 is added to the Model browser.


Create a Tapped Hole

1 Click Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Hole on the ribbon, or

press H to invoke the Hole command. You can also select the Hole




command from the marking menu. The Hole dialog box appears in its

collapsed state in the graphics window.

2 Select the top face at the rear of the part. The Hole mini-toolbar

appears in the graphics window. If the mini-toolbar obscures the pick

location on the top face of the model, select the mini-toolbar by the

grip button just to the left of the value input box, and move it to a

different location.

3 Look closely at the point you picked on the top face. The ring

manipulator around the center of the hole represents the hole diameter.

Click the ring with your mouse and it will turn gold in color. Try draggingthe gold ring manipulator to increase and decrease the diameter of the

hole.

Create a Tapped Hole | 85



NOTE You may need to zoom up your display a bit to make the manipulators

easier to select.

4 The sphere manipulator at the center of the pick point represents the

center location of the hole. Click the sphere with your mouse and it will

turn gold in color, also. Try dragging the gold sphere manipulator to

place the hole location dynamically.

For this exercise, we will use precise linear placement by selecting theappropriate edges and entering the required distances from each.

5 Click the inside edge of the rectangle.




6 Enter 5 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the horizontal

dimension.

7 Next, click the outside edge of the highlighted face.

8 Enter 19 in the value input box and press Tab to lock the vertical

dimension.

9 Using the Hole dialog box, enter the following values to create a M6x1

- 6H metric tapped hole with a thread depth of 6 mm:

6 mmThread depth

118 deg Drill Point

DistanceTermination

ThreadedHole Type

ANSI Metric M ProfileThread Type

6Size

M6x1Designation

6HClass

Right HandDirection




The Hole dialog box appears as shown in the image.







10 Click the OK button to close the dialog box, create the tapped hole, and

finish the command.

The new feature, Hole1, is added to the Model browser.


Rotate a Face Using the Triad

The Move Face command lets you move one or more faces on a part. You

can specify an explicit direction and distance to move a set of faces. You can

also freely move and rotate a set of faces or features about the X, Y, or Z axes

using the Free Move option.

In this final section of the tutorial, the Free Move triad is used to modify the

top angled face of the Sliding-pin Hanger.

1 Click Model tab

➤

Modify panel

➤

Move Face on the ribbon.

2 Select the angled face on the top of the part. The Move Face Free Move

triad appears.

You can interactively position a face or feature by dragging the triad in

a planar move, axial move, or free movement. The selected area of the

triad controls the movement. The colors help you identify triad axes:

■ Red is the X axis

■ Green is the Y axis

■ Blue is the Z axis




When you first activate the triad, its origin sphere is coincident with the

geometry you want to transform. Click a triad section or drag to indicate

the type of transform you want. As you select other parts of the triad,you can drag or enter precise coordinates corresponding to your selection.

The triad is comprised of the following elements:

■ Arrowheads move the triad along the axes.

■ Rotational manipulators rotate the triad around the axis. Click the

red rotational manipulator to rotate in the YZ plane dynamically

around the X axis. Click the green rotational manipulator to rotate

dynamically in the XZ plane around the Y axis. Click the blue

rotational manipulator to rotate dynamically in the XY plane around

the Z axis.

■ Planes move the triad in the selected plane.

■ Sphere allows unrestricted movement in the view plane.

In the next step, we rotate the angled face in the XZ plane using the

green rotational manipulator. It may be helpful to rotate the view a bit

to provide easier access to the manipulator.

3 Click the Free Orbit command in the Navigation Bar at the right

of the graphics window. The rotation symbol appears in the graphics

window with both vertical and horizontal axes. Click inside the rotation

symbol. Press and hold the left mouse button as you move your cursor

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 91



to approximate the viewing angle shown in the image.

When you are satisfied with the new view, press the Esc key to exit the

Free Orbit command.




TIP You can quickly access the Free Orbit function in the middle of another

command by pressing and holding function key F4 as you rotate the view.

When the view is rotated to your satisfaction, release the function key toresume the previous command. You can also use the ViewCube to orbit

the model. Click and drag the cube to adjust your view.

4 Click the green rotational manipulator and drag to the right to see the

effects of a negative rotation. Drag to the left to view a positive rotation.

5 Enter 2 in the value input box and click the green Ok button to rotate

the face 2° in the positive direction.

The Move Face command terminates and the new feature, Move Face1,

is added to the Model browser.

6 Press F6 to restore the Home view.

Rotate a Face Using the Triad | 93



7 Save and close the file. This concludes the Introduction to Direct

Manipulation tutorial.


Summary


■ Revolve and extrude profiles using Direct Manipulation.

■ Create a parallel work plane using a distance arrow manipulator.

■ Project a coordinate axis.

■ Sketch geometry and dimension using Dynamic Input.

■Mirror a sketch profile.

■ Create a fillet using the mini-toolbar.

■ Create a tapped hole.

■ Rotate an existing face using the Move Face Triad.

What Next? In this exercise, the Sliding-pin Hanger sketch profile was

provided for you. To learn how to create a part from scratch and gain further

experience with sketching, part modeling, and work feature commands, try

the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.

Previous (page 90)




Parts 1

About this tutorial

Create parts from sketches.

New UsersCategory


5

95



Start a new part file (metric).Tutorial File

Used

In this tutorial, you work with various commands and workflows in Inventor

to build 3D parts.

This tutorial exposes you to various feature creation commands and workflows

you can use when you create 3D parts. If the finished part is the correct size

and shape, your modeling effort is successful.

Objectives

■ Create a part from a sketch.

■ Add dimensions and constraints to sketch geometry.

■ Create and use parameters.

■ Use feature commands such as Extrude and the Hole command.

■ Use the pattern command to array features.

■ Save a copy of a part as a new file.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Sketch Constraints and Introduction to Direct

Manipulation tutorials.

■ Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab:

■ Apply driven dimension - Select

■ Grid lines – Clear

■ Minor grid lines – Clear

■ Axes - Select

■ Snap to grid – Clear

■ Edit dimension when created - Select

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select

■ Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select

Navigation Tips



Next (page 97)

96 | Chapter 5 Parts 1



Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor

In this section, we apply horizontal and vertical constraints to constrain the

shape to the X,Y, Z coordinates 0, 0, 0. We then add dimensions, create named

parameters and use equations.

Adding relationships between dimensions reduces the amount of edits,

especially in complex parts. You can also add mathematical formulas to

dimensions. A link is provided in the exercise to the operators that can be

used in equations.

1 Click the Autodesk Inventor icon to start a new part. Select

New to open the Create New File dialog box.

2 Click the metric folder to start a new metric part. Under the Part category,

double-click Standard (mm).ipt .

If your sketch settings match the recommendations listed previously,

you see an X axis, a Y axis, and a point at 0,0,0.

3 Click Sketch tab

➤

Draw panel ➤

Rectangle. Select

Rectangle Two Point from the drop-down menu, or select Two Point

Rectangle from the marking menu. Sketch a rectangle approximately

centered about 0,0.

4 Apply a Horizontal constraint between the origin and the midpoint

of a vertical line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the vertical

line to display and select the midpoint.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 97



5 Apply a Vertical constraint between the origin and the midpoint of

a horizontal line. Hover your cursor near the midpoint of the horizontalline to display and select the midpoint.

If the logic of these picks seems confusing, imagine the axis between the

two points you are picking.


➤

Constrain panel

➤

Dimension, or select General Dimension from the marking menu.

7 Place a horizontal dimension.8 In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter the equation Width=49mm

to define a new variable named Width with an initial value of 49 mm.

9 Place a vertical dimension. Highlight the value in the Edit Dimension

dialog box. Instead of entering a number, pick the horizontal dimension

value. The variable name of the first dimension (Width) appears in the

dialog box. Click the check mark to link the current dimension to the

first dimension.

The vertical dimension displays as fx:49. The display means that a

formula is in effect for the vertical dimension and the current value is

49.

10 Right-click and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu to exit the

Dimension command.

You have created another equation!




11 To see the entire equation, right click in a blank area of the graphicswindow. Choose Dimension Display from the overflow menu, and

then choose Expression. Notice the variable names and formulas appear.

Each dimension is assigned a variable based on the order of creation. d0

is the first value assigned because 0 is the first integer. In this example,

d0 was renamed Width and is a “driving” dimension. The second

dimension retains the original variable name d1 and is “driven” by the

dimension named Width.

NOTE The order of creation has no impact on which dimension can be the

controlling dimension.

Create the Part from Scratch in Autodesk Inventor | 99



NOTE The marking menu appears near the area of the screen on which you

right-click. Use this technique to control where a marking menu appears.


Viewing and Editing Parameters

You can assign names to the dimension variables or you can create your own

parameters. You can also create formulas using mathematical expressions. If

you do not create an expression at the time you create a dimension, you can

use the parameters dialog box to add or edit equations.

1 On the ribbon, click Manage tab ➤

Parameters panel ➤

Parameters

to open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Notice that d0 inside the Model Parameters column is displayed as

Width. The model parameter also shows d1 is equal to the value of

Width.

NOTE Variables names are case sensitive and no spaces are allowed in the

name.

3 Select Done when finished.

TIP You can use algebraic operators in the equation area or in the Edit

Dimension dialog box to create a mathematical formula. Incomplete or

invalid equations display in red.




4 Right-click in a blank area of the graphics window. Choose Dimension

Display from the overflow menu, and then Tolerance to display the

dimensions without the parameter names.

5 Finish the sketch using one of the following methods:

■ Select the Finish Sketch command.

■ Right-click in the graphics window, and choose Finish 2D Sketch


■ Click the Return button on the Quick Access toolbar at the

top left of the screen display.

After finishing the sketch, the view automatically rotates to the Home

(isometric) view.6 Create the extrusion.

Click the 3D Model tab

➤

Create panel

➤

Extrude, or select

Extrude from the marking menu. Click and drag the gold distance

arrow manipulator until the value 20 mm appears in the value input

box. Alternatively, you can enter 20 in the field using the keyboard.

7 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and finish the

command.

8 Save the file with the name End Cap Back.


Create and Pattern a Hole

In the next section, we will create a hole using offset sketch geometry to

determine hole placement. After we create the hole, we will use the rectangular

pattern command to create additional holes.

There are several reasons to use a hole instead of an extrusion with the cut

option:

■ Using a Hole command instead of an extrusion with a cut provides more

control over the part feature.

Create and Pattern a Hole | 101



■ The drafting environment contains a hole note command which can

associatively extract all the details of a hole.

To begin:

1 Start a sketch on the part face using one of these methods to

start a new sketch (the second option is the most direct and offers the

least amount of mouse movement).

■ On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab

➤

Sketch panel

➤

Create 2D

Sketch, and then select the part face to sketch on.

■ Select the face to sketch on. When the mini-toolbar appears, click

the third button on the right labeled with the tooltip, Create

Sketch.

■ Select the face to sketch on, then right-click and select New Sketch


The edges of the extrusion are copied to the current sketch.




TIP The icons for 2D Sketch and 3D Sketch are similar. They provide two

different sketching environments. If you start a 3D sketch, perform an Undo

and start a new 2D Sketch.


Modify panel ➤

Offset.

3 Select one of the edges, then drag it to the inside, and click to place. All

edges highlight and drag. If all the edges do not highlight, right-click

and make sure Loop Select and Constrain Offset are checked in the

overflow menu, then retry the selection.

■ Enable Loop Select to allow all planar continuous sketch geometry

to be selected as a group. Disable to select individual edges.

■ Enable Constrain Offset to apply automatic constraints which allow

one offset distance to determine the position for the entire selection.

Disable to allow each edge to be dimensioned independently.

4 Start the Dimension command. Dimension the offset geometry

5 mm away from a feature edge.

5 Place a horizontal and vertical dimension on the two edges of the

offset geometry. The horizontal and vertical dimensions appear in

parentheses as reference (driven) dimensions. These dimensions will be

used later to extract the spacing in the feature pattern.

NOTE If you receive a warning when you dimension the offset sketch

geometry, choose Accept to create a driven dimension. This message

appears if you did not choose Apply driven dimension in the

Application Options

➤

Sketch tab.

6 Finish the Sketch.

7 Click 3D Model tab ➤

Modify panel ➤

Hole, or select Hole

from the marking menu. Set the Placement option to From Sketch.

Select the lower left vertex in the offset sketch to position the hole.

Set the hole diameter to 6 mm and the termination to Through

All, then choose OK to create the hole.







The sketch is “consumed” under the hole feature in the browser.

8 To select the 39-mm sketch reference dimensions for the hole pattern

spacing, they must be visible. Locate the hole feature in the browser,

and click + to expand and show the sketch. Right-click the sketch, and

choose Visibility from the context menu.

9

10 Click 3D Model tab

➤

Pattern panel

➤

Rectangular. The

Features selection arrow is selected. Pick the Hole. If you are viewing the

hole in a plan view, it is difficult to select the hole on the part. Rotate




the view slightly in 3D before selecting the hole on the part. You can

also select the hole directly in the Model browser.

IMPORTANT Do NOT select the extruded body, or it will be patterned with

the hole.

11 Pick the Direction 1 arrow, and then choose a horizontal edge to set

the direction. The edge you choose determines the initial direction.

For example, if you choose the lower model or sketch edge, the horizontal

pattern direction is to the left. If you choose the upper model or sketch

edge, the horizontal pattern direction is to the right.

Use the Flip direction arrow to reverse the direction. Set the

count to two, and then highlight the text in the dimension spacing

field. With the text highlighted, select the horizontal sketch dimension

to use the dimension value for the spacing. Pick the Direction 2 arrow,

and then pick a vertical model or sketch edge. Set the count to two, and

then highlight the text in the dimension field. Select the vertical

reference dimension to use the dimension value.




12 Click OK to create the pattern. After you create the pattern, right-click

Sketch2 in the Model browser, and turn off the sketch Visibility.


Create a Revolved Feature

In this section, we create a revolved feature using projected model edges.

Projected edges help “anchor” the geometry to the model when no edges are

projected. Use the Revolvecommand to create cylindrical shapes quickly.

1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser, right-click on the YZ Plane,

and select New Sketch from the context menu. Turn Visibility on toview the YZ Plane in the graphics screen.

Create a Revolved Feature | 107



2 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Slice Graphics from

the overflow menu, or choose F7 to toggle Slice Graphics on and off.

Navigate to a plan view using the ViewCube (use Right, for example.).

3 Select Project Geometry to copy a parallel model edge to the

sketch in the center of the part.

4 Start the Line command and begin to sketch a shape. Start with

a vertical line from the midpoint of the projected geometry. A green dot

indicates the midpoint.




TIP An explicit horizontal line on the lower section of the sketch is not

required to create a closed shape. Inventor uses Coincident constraints to

determine closed boundaries. If the two vertical lines are attached to theprojected edge of the sketch with Coincident constraints, there is no need

to draw the line.

5 Dimension the sketch as shown in the following image. Apply

a Collinear constraint to the outer vertical edges as shown in the

following image. It enables both lines to be controlled by the same

dimension. All sketch elements change color to indicate that the sketch

is fully constrained.

TIP If the sketch is not fully constrained, one or both of the outside vertical

lines are probably not attached to the projected line. Apply coincident

constraints to attach the ends (indicated by the arrows in the following

image) to the projected line. You can also apply a coincident constraint using

a drag operation to connect elements.




6 Finish the sketch.

7 On the Model tab, select the Revolve command. The closed

boundary sketch profile you just completed should already be

highlighted. If not, select it. Next, the highlighted axis button in the

mini-toolbar prompts you to pick an axis to revolve around. Pick the

center line.




TIP

■ If you define the axis line as a centerline, Autodesk Inventor selects

the axis for you. Define the axis as a centerline to dimension the

diameter when you dimension from the centerline to an outer edge.

■ To designate the central axis as a sketch centerline, you must be in

the Sketch environment. Select the axis, and then choose the

centerline icon on the Format panel of the Sketch tab.




Finished shape -





Use Save As to Create a Part

We now turn the part into two unique parts.

There are multiple ways to create a part from the existing model. Two common

methods are:

■ Use Save As to create a part containing all the features in an editable state.

■ Create a table driven iPart, and suppress or enable unique features.

Before we create a new unique part, we create the sketch to locate the tapped

hole on both parts.

1 Start a new sketch on the top face as shown in the following image.

TIP Use the ViewCube to navigate to the Top view.

Use Save As to Create a Part | 113



2 Create and dimension a line 6 mm from the midpoint of the front edge.

Make sure it is either perpendicular to the front edge or parallel to a side

edge.


4 Save the file.

5 Click ➤

Save As

➤

Save As, and name the new part End

Cap Front




6 You are now working in the new file, and the origin file End Cap Back

has been closed.

We are now ready to add the unique features to End Cap Front.


Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole

In this section, we introduce the work axis command. We will use the work

axis and a work plane to simplify creating two intersecting holes.

1 Start the Hole command.

The Placement option From Sketch is active.

2 Select the far end of the 6-mm line for the hole center location. Set

the hole depth to 14 mm.

Use Work Planes to Terminate a Hole | 115



3 Set the hole type to tapped. Change the thread type to ANSI Metric

M Profile. Set the size to 5 and the designation to M5 x 0.8.




4 Click OK to finish the command and create the tapped hole.

5 On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab

➤

Work

Features panel ➤

Axis command to display work axis options.

Then select Through Center of Circular or Elliptical Edge from

the Axis drop-down menu. Move your cursor over the tapped hole, and

click to place the Work Axis when you see the preview image of the

axis.

6 On the ribbon, click the down arrow on the 3D Model tab ➤

Work

Features panel ➤

Plane command to display work plane options.

Select Angle to Plane around Edge from the Plane

drop-down menu. Pick the front face of the part and the work axis as




shown. Change the Angle in the value input box to 0, and then pick

the green check mark to create the work plane.

7 Start a new sketch on the front face of the revolved shape.

8 Create a vertical line on the center point. Add a 12.5-mm dimension

to the line.

9 Click Sketch tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ Point. Place a center point

at the end of the vertical line to allow the Hole command to detect and

use the Center Point as a hole location. Finish the sketch.




10 Start the Hole command. The Center Point is selected.

11 Set the hole diameter to 4mm. In the Termination drop down, select

To and then pick the work plane that passes through the tapped hole

as the termination location.




12 Click OK to finish the command and create the hole. If you edit thesketch that locates the tapped hole, the work plane and the 4-mm hole

that terminates on the plane will reposition.




TIP The cutaway image was created by starting a sketch on the YZ Origin

plane, then choosing Slice Graphics from the right-click context menu.

It is not required for this exercise.





Create a Concentric Hole

It is possible to create holes with no pre-existing sketch. In the next section,

we introduce you to alternative hole placement methods.


2 On the Placement drop down menu, select Concentric.

3 The Plane select option is enabled. Choose the front face of the

cylindrical shape to define the plane.

4 The Concentric Reference select option is enabled. Choose an edge

of the cylinder to position the hole at the center of the circular face.

5 Set the diameter to 14 mm.

6 Set the Termination option to Through All.




7 Choose OK to create the through hole.

8 On the ribbon, click View tab

➤

Visibility panel

➤

Object Visibility

and then clear the All Workfeatures check box from the drop-down

menu to change the Work Plane and Work Axis display to off .

9 Save the file.


Create a Concentric Hole | 123



Edit the Tapped Hole Location

In the next series of steps, we edit the sketch to move the tapped hole location

to demonstrate a feature edit and to show the associativity between features.

In this scenario, a change order was submitted stating that the tapped hole

on the front cylinder cap must be located in the middle of the part. To begin:

1 Locate the tapped hole in the Model browser. If you did not delete any

holes in the first part of the exercise, it should be named Hole2 in the

browser.

2 Click + next to the hole feature to expose the sketch beneath the feature.

Right-click the sketch, and choose Edit Sketch from the context menu.

TIP You can also choose Edit Sketch with a right-click on the feature

without exposing the sketch.

3 Double-click the 6-mm dimension to enable the edit box. Change the

6-mm dimension to 10 mm.

Notice that when you edit a sketch, the part history is “rolled back” to

the feature state that existed at the time the sketch was created.




4 Exit the sketch. The tapped hole, the work plane, work axis, and 4-mm

hole are updated.

5 Save the file and close it.

6 Open the file End Cap Back.


Edit the Tapped Hole Location | 125



Mirror a Feature

We now add a unique feature to the back cylinder cap. Use the Mirror

command to create an identical feature on the opposite side of the part.

Creating a feature and then mirroring it allows symmetrical features to be

controlled by the original feature. When you edit the first instance, the

mirrored feature automatically updates.


2 In the Hole dialog box, set the Placement toConcentric and the hole

type to Counterbore.




■ Set the counterbore diameter to 26 mm.

■ Set the counterbore depth to 6 mm.

■ Set the drill diameter to 10 mm.

■ Set the Termination to Through All.

Mirror a Feature | 127



3 Click the Plane selection arrow in the dialog box, and then select the

front plane of the revolved shape. The hole is previewed and the select

arrow is moved to Concentric Reference.

4 On the model in the graphics window, choose the edge of the revolved

shape to define the concentric edge.




5 Choose OK to create the hole.

6 Start the Hole command. Set the Placement toFrom Sketch,

and select the end of the 6-mm line to locate the hole.

7 In the Hole dialog box.

■ Set Hole Type to Drilled.

■ Set Termination to To.

■ Set Hole to Tapped.

■ Set Thread Type to ANSI Metric M Profile.




■ Set Size to 5.

■ Set Designation to M5 x 0.8.

8 Select the interior of the counterbored hole on the model to define the

To termination, and then click OK to create the hole.




9 Start a sketch on the side of the cylinder block shown in the following

image.

10 Place a Point, Center Point near the middle of the face, and

constrain it to be horizontal and vertical to the outside edges.





12 Start the Hole command. Set the Placement type to From

Sketch.

If there are no other sketches in the model, Autodesk Inventor selects

the point. If there are other sketches present, pick the point.

13 Set the hole type to Drilled, the hole diameter to 10 mm, and the

hole depth to 10 mm.

14 Click OK to create the hole.




15 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤

Pattern panel ➤

Mirror.

16 The feature selection arrow is active. Select the inside of the hole you

just created to add it to the mirror.

17 Change the selection type to Mirror Plane. You can do it in the dialog

box, or you can right-click and choose Continue from the pop-up

context menu.

18 In the Model browser, under the Origin folder, pick YZ plane to define

the mirror plane.

19 Click OK to mirror the feature.




20 Save and close the file.





Summary

Congratulations! You have successfully completed this tutorial. In this exercise

you:

■ Created a part from a sketch.

■ Used the dimension and constraint commands to control the size and

behavior of the sketch geometry.

■ Used parameters to name and link dimensions.

■ Used feature commands to create solid geometry.

■ Used the pattern command to array features.

■ Saved a copy of a part to create a new part file.

What Next? - This tutorial introduced you to basic part modeling commands.

To learn about additional part modeling techniques, such as the use of work

features, see the Parts 2 tutorial.

Previous (page 126)

Summary | 135



136



Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore construction techniques to create elements of your model.

New UsersCategory


Start a new part file.Tutorial File Used

6

137



In this tutorial, you build a clamp mounting base using sketch geometry and

common construction techniques.

Objectives

■ Create a work plane that bisects the part to mirror symmetrical features.

■ Create an offset work plane for a new sketch.

■ Create a tangent work plane to locate a hole on a curved face.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Sketch Constraints, Introduction to Direct

Manipulation, and Parts 1 tutorials.

■ Set these options in Application Options, Sketch tab:

■ Apply driven dimension - Select

■ Edit Dimension when created - Select

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit - Select

■ Autoproject part origin on sketch create - Select

■ Grid lines – Clear

■ Snap to grid – Clear

Navigation Tips



Next (page 138)

Create the Mounting Base Profile

In this exercise, we sketch a rectangle and constrain the lower right corner of

the first sketch to 0, 0, 0. Constraining a sketch to the origin makes the sketch

behavior predictable and eliminates two degrees of freedom by defining the

XY location.

To begin:

1 Start a new mm part. Sketch a rectangle with the lower right-hand

corner located at 0,0.




2 Start the Dimension command.

3 Create a horizontal dimension with a value of 160 mm and a vertical

dimension with a value of 86 mm. The sketch is fully constrained.

NOTE If the sketch is not fully constrained, make sure that the sketch is

constrained to the Origin.

4 Exit the sketch. Use the Finish Sketch command, the

Return command, or right-click and choose Finish Sketch from the

marking menu to exit the sketch environment.

5 Start the Extrude command. Extrude the sketch 15 mm.


Create the Mounting Base Profile | 139



Sketch on a Part Face

In the next step, there are multiple approaches to creating the feature:

■ Create an extrusion the entire width of the part, and then cut out the

middle.

■ Create an extrusion the exact depth and then mirror it:




For this exercise, we detail the second technique.

1 Use Direct Manipulation to start a new sketch on the side of the

part. Click the face indicated. When the mini-toolbar appears, select the

third button on the right, Create Sketch.

Sketch on a Part Face | 141



2 Create and dimension the sketch profile geometry as shown. You do not

have to draw the bottom horizontal line if you connect the line endpoints

to the projected geometry. As you dimension the profile, keep in mindthat the 53 mm dimension is from the bottom projected edge as shown

in the image.


4 Extrude the profile 18 mm. Use the Direction 2 button on

the mini-toolbar to extrude the profile to the interior of the part.




TIP The default direction for extrude/join is away from existing material.

The default direction for extrude/cut is towards existing material. It is good

idea to view a model in a 3D view before you extrude a profile to visualize

the direction. If you make a mistake and extrude a profile to the wrong side,

use Edit Feature and flip the direction.

5 Use Direct Manipulation to start the Fillet command. Click the

edge indicated and select Create Fillet from the mini-toolbar. Drag the

distance arrow manipulator to add an 8-mm radius to the edge,

or enter 8 in the value input box.

Sketch on a Part Face | 143



6 Click the green check mark to finish the command.


■ Set the Placement option to Concentric.

■ Select the plane and the concentric edge.

■ Set the hole diameter to 11 mm and the Termination to Through

All

Select OK to create the hole.





Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes

In the next section, we allow Autodesk Inventor to place a plane in the middle

of the part. This technique is useful because it does not require any dimensions

or edits to maintain the position. If the width of the part is edited, the plane

stays centered.

We will then create an offset work plane to use as the location of a newsketched feature.

1 Select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the

Plane drop-down menu. To create a work plane that bisects the part,

pick the face with the new feature and then the parallel face on the

opposite side of the part. A work plane is created in the middle of the

part.

Symmetrical and Offset Work Planes | 145






NOTE The initial size of a work plane is determined by the size of the existing

features. To resize a work plane, first select the corner, then drag the corner

when the resize symbol appears.

2 Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion, the fillet, and

the through hole as the features to mirror.

TIP You can select the features on the part or in the Model browser.




3 When you finish selecting the features, choose the Mirror Plane

selection arrow in the dialog box. You can also right-click and choose

Continue from the context menu to change the selection arrow. Select

the work plane in the center of the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.

Click the OK button to create the mirrored features and terminate the

Mirror command.

4 Select Offset from Plane from the Plane drop-down menu.

Steps 4-6 create a work plane that is parallel to the center plane and

offset a specific distance.




5 Select the center work plane, and drag the new work plane towards you

using the distance arrow manipulator. The Offset value input box

displays with a numeric value in it as you drag (if not, clear all selectionsand restart the command, then try again).

6 Enter 30 mm in the Offset value input box to specify the exact distance

from the center plane.

7 Click the green check mark to finish the command.

8 Start a new sketch on the offset work plane. (Select the edge of

the work plane and click Create Sketch from the contextual

mini-toolbar.)

NOTE When you select a work plane for a new sketch, no geometry is

projected to “lock” the sketch to the part. Project model edges to obtain

geometry for connecting the sketch.




9 Start the Project Geometry command. Select the front edgeas shown to project it to the sketch plane, and then sketch and dimension

the profile shown. Be sure to select the bottom edge of the part when

creating the 25 mm dimension.





11 Extrude the profile 14 mm towards the interior of the part. Use

the Direction 2 button on the mini-toolbar to change the orientation

before selecting OK.


■ Set the Placement option to Concentric.

■ Select the plane and the concentric edge.

■ Set the hole diameter to 8mm and the Termination to Through

All

13 Select OK to create the hole.




14 Start the Mirror command. Select the extrusion and the

through-hole as the features to mirror. Select the work plane in the centerof the part to satisfy the Mirror Plane pick.

We now create two chamfers on the front of the base to create a smallerfootprint for the front of the base. To determine the chamfer distance,

we use the Measure Distance command to extract the distance between

the two planes.

15 Start the Measure Distance command. You will find this

command in the marking menu, or on the Measure panel of the Tools

tab. Select the plane on the outside of the part and the plane on the

front face of the small mounting tab. The distance between the two faces

displays as 13 mm. We will use this distance to create a chamfer that

terminates at the edge of this feature and the edge of the mirrored copy.




16 Start the Chamfer command. Select the Two Distances option

from the fly-out button on the mini-toolbar.

17 In the left value input box in the mini-toolbar, enter a value of 13 mm

for Distance 1, and a value of 40 mm for Distance 2 in the right value

input box. Click the Edges button and select the vertical edge on the

outside of the part. If your preview image does not look like the preview

in the following image, reverse the values for the distance input, or use

the flip direction arrow to reverse the reference face.




18 Click the green Apply button (+) to create the chamfer and stay in theChamfer command. Select the opposite outside edge to create the




second chamfer. Reverse the input values, or use the flip direction

button to achieve the desired results.

In the next exercise, we create a tapped hole for a set screw on a curved face.

To do this, we create a work plane that is tangent to the curve and parallel to

the base.


Create a Tangent Work Plane

In this section, we create a work plane on a curved surface to provide a flat

area for a 2D sketch. We use projected geometry to assist in accurately placing

hole location geometry.

1 Right-click the XY Plane in the Origin folder, and check the Visibility

option to turn it on.

NOTE As you become a more advanced user, you might prefer to control

globally the visibility of Work Geometry, Sketches, and more by using an

Object Visibility filter in the View tab. If you switch the visibility off using these controls, right-click a work plane, other work feature, or sketch

and note that the visibility is enabled but the feature is off. To enable it,

switch the visibility to on in the Object Visibility area.

2 Select Tangent to Surface and Parallel to Plane from the

Plane drop-down menu. Select the edge of the XY Plane and the

tangent face of the curved surface to create the work plane.

Create a Tangent Work Plane | 155



3 Start a new sketch on the work plane.

4 Start the Project Geometry command. Select the two edges

of the mounting tab as shown in the following image to project them

to the sketch plane. Repeat this process for the other tab before leaving

the Project Geometry command.

5 Start the Line command, and draw a line from the midpoint of

one line to the midpoint of the other line. Repeat this process for othertab.

6 Place a Point, Center Point at the midpoint of each line to locate

the hole in the middle of the mounting tab. These points also allow the

Hole command to detect them for hole placement.





8 Start the Hole command. The Placement option defaults to

From Sketch because Autodesk Inventor detects that an unconsumed

sketch is present. Autodesk Inventor detects the hole centers and selects

them for the hole location.

TIP Autodesk Inventor automatically selects hole locations from sketch points

if no other unconsumed sketch exists.

9 Select the Tapped Hole option. Set the Thread Type toANSI Metric M Profile, the Size to 6, and the Designation to M6x1.




10 Select To in the Termination option to terminate the tapped holes on

the center holes.

11 Select an inside face of one of the existing holes to satisfy the termination

selection. Make sure the check box in the dialog box is selected as shown

here, or the operation fails. Click the OK button to create the holes and

exit the Hole command.








Add the Base Mounting Holes

We are almost done. We now create the mounting holes to secure the base.

Make sure that the work plane in the middle of the part is visible.

1 Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

2 Start the Project Geometry command. Select the work plane

in the middle of the part to project the work plane as a line to the current

sketch.

3 Place two points (Point, Center Point) vertically in-line with

each other.

4 Place a vertical constraint between the two points to align them.

5 Add a 16-mm dimension from the center of the base to the

upper center point.

6 Dimension the overall distance between the two points. Pick

the two center points. Instead of adding a number for the overall distance,clear the value in the dialog box. Then, select the 16-mm dimension to

add the dimension variable to the dialog box. Enter the multiplication

operator *, and then the number 2.

NOTE The dimension variables in your sketch may differ from the numbers

presented in the following image. If they do, it does not affect the exercise.

7 Add a 33-mm dimension from the front edge of the part to one

of the center points.





9 Start the Hole command. Place two through holes of 11 mm

each on the center points.

10 Start a new sketch on the top face of the part.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 161



11 Start the Line command. Create a line from the mid-point of the back edge of the base towards the middle of the part.

12 Add a dimension of 16 mm to the line.


In the remaining steps, we create a counterbore clearance hole for a hex

head bolt from a look up table.

14 Start the Hole command. Pick the endpoint of the line to specify

the hole location.




15 Select the counterbore hole with the clearance hole option as shown in

the following image. The system determines the proper counterbore size

for the fastener you specify.

Add the Base Mounting Holes | 163



16 Select the fastener parameters listed in the image, and then click OK to

create the hole.

17 Save the file.

You have successfully completed this exercise!


Summary

The completed part with all work features turned off.

In this tutorial, you created a:

■ Part from a sketch.

■ Symmetrical work plane in the middle of the part.

■ Planar parallel offset work plane.

■ Tangent work plane.

■ Tapped hole on a cylinder.




■ Counterbore and clearance hole from a look-up table for a specified

fastener.

You used the mirror command to duplicate symmetrical features, and projected

geometry from existing features to a sketch.

Previous (page 160)

Summary | 165



166



Assemblies

7

167



About this tutorial

168 | Chapter 7 Assemblies



Insert and position components in the Assembly environment.

New UsersCategory


Cylinder Base.ipt, Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, Clamp Sketch.ipt,

Long Shaft.ipt, Short Shaft.ipt, Lock Pin.ipt, 6mm SHCS.ipt.

Tutorial Files

Used





An assembly is a collection of components constrained to each other. Thisexercise introduces workflows you can use to insert and precisely position

components relative to each other.

Objectives

The goal of the tutorial is to introduce techniques you can use to position and

analyze the movement of components. Some of the topics covered are:

■ Assembly constraints

■ Contact sets

■ Flexible assemblies

■ Analyze interference

■ Insert components

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the active project, navigate model space with the various

view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching

and extruding.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 170)

About this tutorial | 169







Create the Assembly

To begin, create the top-level assembly.

1 Set you active project to tutorial_files.

2 Start a new Standard (mm) assembly.

3 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤

Component panel

➤

Place , or right-click and choose Place Component from the context

menu.

4 Select Cylinder Clamp ➤

Cylinder Base.ipt and choose Open. The

component is placed in the assembly.

NOTE By default, you can place multiple copies. If you click in the graphics

window, you will place place two copies. If you accidentally placed two

copies remove one before proceeding.

5 Right-click, and select Done, or press ESC to exit the command.

6 Orient the view as shown in the following image. Set the view as the

Home view. Make sure Work Plane1 in the center of the base is visible.

TIP If necessary, expand the list under Cylinder Base in the browser,

right-click Work Plane1, and turn on Visibility.




7 Save the file with the name Cyl_Clamp.iam.


Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid

In a top down workflow, create a part or subassembly in the assembly using

Create Component. At the prompt to select the sketch plane, select an

origin plane, a work plane, or part face. This pick establishes the coordinatesystem for the new component. In the Create In-Place Component dialog

box, the option Constrain sketch plane to the selected face or plane

is enabled by default. This option applies a Flush constraint between the new

component and the selected face or plane. Clear the check mark to apply no

initial constraint.

The following are some of the advantages to creating a part in the assembly:

■ Use a top-down workflow to design a component in place.

■ Project edges from other components to a part sketch.

■ Measure clearance space for the component envelope.

To create a part in the assembly, start the Create Component command,

follow the steps described previously, and use the provided clamp sketch asa guide.

Insert a 2D Part and Constrain to a Solid | 171



To save time, insert a 2D part in the assembly. Apply assembly constraints to

position the 2D sketch on the base. Then extrude the sketch into a solid.

1 Start Place Component.

2 Place one copy of Clamp Sketch.ipt, and stay in the Place

Component command.

3 While still in the the Place Component command, move the cursorover the edge of the sketch circle.

In the graphics window:

■ The entire Clamp Sketch highlights.

■ A copy of the Clamp Sketch moves with your cursor.

■ A tooltip prompts you to make a second selection.

When the axis displays, select the circle, as shown in the following image.

A mini-toolbar displays in the upper left-hand corner of the graphics

window.




4 To select an axis, move the cursor over the inside of the hole on the

base. When the axis preview displays, select inside the hole, as shown

in the following image. Do not select the edge of the hole when a green

dot appears. The dot is a point constraint, and does not result in an axis

to axis constraint.




The copy of the Clamp Sketch is attached to the Cylinder Base, and the

mini-toolbar moves to the area where you clicked.

5 Click OK to create the constraint.

Hold the left mouse button down as you select the 2D sketch, and then

push or pull on the geometry. The movement is limited to the axis you

defined.

6 In the browser, under Clamp Sketch, expand the Origin folder,

right-click the XY Plane, and turn on Visibility

7 Start the Assemble command. The mini-toolbar displays in the upper

left-hand corner of the graphics window.

8 On the clamp sketch, select the XY Plane to satisfy the first pick.

9 Select the work plane in the center of the base, as shown in the following

image.




The mate constraint displays in the preview.

10 On the mini-toolbar, click Constraint Type, and select Mate-Flush.

Click the green OK button to apply the constraint and close the

mini-toolbar.

The following image shows the correct Mate/Flush solution on the left.

The solution on the right is the result of a Mate/Mate. If you made a

mistake, you can edit the constraint and apply the correct solution. In

this case, the correct selection was specified for you. In the future, use

the preview to help you decide whether to apply a Mate/Mate or a

Mate/Flush constraint between two planes.




11 Click the Clamp Sketch, and hold the left mouse button down. Drag the

2D sketch. The part still has one degree of rotational freedom. All

ungrounded components initially have six degrees of freedom: three

translational (linear X, Y, and Z), and three rotational (rotational X,Y,

and Z).

12 Click View tab

➤

Visibility panel ➤

Degrees of Freedom. A

rotational arrow on the Clamp Sketch indicates the part still has

rotational freedom. Select the Degrees of Freedom command again

to turn it off.

13 Save the file as Cylinder_Main.iam.


Create a Contact Set

Add a contact set to an assembly and then set limits on the motion. Use a

contact set to stop movement when bodies collide, as they would in the

physical world. To avoid slow calculation time, limit the number of

components in a contact set to only the components necessary.

1 Open the file Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.iam, located in \Tutorial

Files\Cylinder Clamp.

2 Use the left mouse button to click and drag the blue shaft on the

assembly. The shaft can move in a linear and rotational direction. You

can also pull the piston and shaft completely out of the body. The linear




and rotational freedom is intentional so that the piston can move in a

higher-level assembly.

Before proceeding, use Undo to restore the piston to the position it was

in when you opened the file.

3 On the ribbon, click Inspect tab ➤

Interference panel ➤

Activate Contact Solver. The command activates, but no components

belong to the contact set yet.

4 In the browser, right-click each of the following components, or in the

graphics area right-click the components. Enable Contact Set in the

context menu.

■ Cylinder Head Cover_Front

■ Cylinder Head Cover_Back

■ Piston

5 Push and pull on the piston shaft. The piston body movement is limited

by the physical contact with the front and back cylinder heads.

NOTE Rapid mouse movement allows the piston to pass through the cylinder

cover bodies. This intentional behavior enables you to move contact set

members in or out of a closed body.

6 Pull the piston to the end of its stroke. In the Interference panel, click

Activate Contact Solver again to deactivate it.

7 Right-click the Cylinder Body and clear Enabled to make it easier to

select internal parts.

When you turn off Enabled, a component displays transparently forreference, and you cannot select it. A component that is not enabled

appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, right-click the

component in the browser, and click Enabled.

8 Start the Constraint command. In the dialog box, do not change any

settings.

9 Click the end face of the Cylinder Head Cover- Back, as shown in the

following image.

Create a Contact Set | 177



10 Rotate the assembly or use Select Other to select the back face of the

Piston, as shown in the previous image.

11 Click More, and specify the following:

Maximum: 35mm

Minimum: 0

12 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box.

Drag the piston rod. The piston stops at either end.

13 In the browser, right-click the cylinder body and select Enabled.

Experiment with Limits settings to change the range of motion. In the browser,

edit the constraint. Expand the Piston, right-click the last Mate constraint,

and select Edit. If you click Use Offset As The Resting Position, you can enter

a default value for the piston position. If you drag the piston and let go, it

snaps back to the resting position.





Insert and Constrain a Subassembly

Constrain the piston to the Base and the 2D sketch part. The next portion of

the exercise assumes Cylinder_Main.iam and Cylinder Body

Sub_Assy.iam are both open.

1 On the ribbon, click View tab

➤

Windows panel ➤

Tile.

2 Click inside the window containing Cylinder Body Sub_Assy.

3 Click and drag the assembly icon from the browser to the

Cylinder_Main window. The subassembly is inserted in the main

assembly without using the Place Component command.

4 Save and Close the subassembly file.

5 Maximize the window containing the main assembly.6 Start the Constrain command.

7 Apply a Mate axis/axis constraint between the 2D sketch and the hole

in the piston rod, as shown in the following image.

Insert and Constrain a Subassembly | 179



When the subassembly is open in a separate window, the piston is free

to move. When you insert the subassembly in the upper level assembly,

the free movement is disabled. To finish constraining the subassembly

in the main assembly, you must enable the freedom to move in the

upper-level assembly. If the piston is not free to spin, the subassembly

cannot rotate into the correct position.

8 Locate Cylinder Body Sub_Assy in the browser.

9 Right-click the subassembly, and select Flexible in the context menu.

It activates the freedom of movement that was present in the subassembly

in the upper level assembly.

The subassembly icon in the browser changes to indicate that Flexible

status is active.




On the ribbon, click Assemble tab

➤

Position panel ➤

Rotate to

move the subassembly until the tapped holes in cylinder end caps are

facing up, as shown in the following image. Right-click, and select Done.

Unlike a view rotation, this command physically rotates a component

in space. If you take the time to orient components relative to each otherbefore you apply constraints, the constraints behave more predictably

when applied.




10 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default settings.

11 In the browser, expand Cylinder Base and Cylinder Body Sub_Assy

to expose the browser tree. Expand the Origin folder in Cylinder Body

Sub_Assy.

12 Select Work Plane1 under Cylinder Base and YZ Plane in the

Origin folder under Cylinder Body Sub_Assy to apply a Mate

plane/plane constraint.




If the subassembly turns inside-out, drag it toward the back of the base

to correct the orientation as shown in the following image. The

constraints you applied limit the movement.

13 Start the Constrain command. Accept the default options.

14 Select the center of each of the holes indicated in the following image

to place a Mate axis/axis constraint.




15 Drag the 2D sketch part to check the motion of your digital prototype.





Edit a Part in an Assembly

In this section, we will finish creating the 2D hinge clamp without leaving

the assembly. The edit-in-place workflow allows you to project edges from

other components into a sketch if necessary. You can also measure the available

clearance before creating a solid.

We will then check the part for interference in the required range of motion.

To get started, drag the piston rod or the 2D sketch until the 2D sketch is

in a near vertical orientation, as shown in the following image.

1 Right-click the part Clamp Sketch in the browser and select Edit from

the pop-up context menu, or right-click the 2D sketch in the graphics

window and select Edit Component from the marking menu. You can

also double-click the sketch or the part file in the browser to start an

edit-in-place operation. Do not choose Open; if you do, the part file

opens in a separate window.The inactive assembly components appear transparent.

Edit a Part in an Assembly | 185



2 Start the Extrude command. Enter a distance of 32 mm. Use thesymmetrical in both directions option. Click OK to create the extrusion.




3 To remove material from the solid to allow clearance for the piston, start

a new 2D sketch on the front face of the clamp as shown in the

following image.




4 Project the geometry at the top of the extrusion to the sketch, as shown

in the following image.

5 Sketch a rectangle that is coincident with the projected line, as shownin the following image.

6 Create a vertical constraint between the two edges indicated.

NOTE If your geometry does not match the following image after applying

the constraint, undo and apply a horizontal constraint.

7 Add a 16-mm horizontal dimension and a 3-mm vertical dimension,

as shown in the following image.





9 Start the Extrude command. Cut the profile through the part. Use the

All option.




10 Click OK to create the extrusion.

11 Click the Return command, or right-click and select Finish

Edit to return to the assembly environment.

12 On the ribbon, enable the Inspect tab ➤

Interference panel ➤

Activate Contact Solver command.

13 Move the clamp forward until the piston touches the front-end cap.

14 Choose Analyze Interference. Select the piston rod to define

set 1. Select the clamp to define set 2. Click OK to check for interference.

A small interference is detected where the piston rod passes through the

cut in the clamp.




15 To remove the interference, double-click the clamp hinge to initiate an

edit-in-place operation. In the part browser, edit the sketch under

Extrusion4, and increase the vertical dimension from 3 mm to 6 mm.

Update the part, and return to the assembly. Check for interference

again. The interference has been resolved.

16 Save the assembly file and other components if prompted.


Constrain Cylindrical Components

It is best to limit the number of constraints you use to position components.For example, if two components have face-to-face contact, then apply a single

Mate constraint to the faces rather than using two Mate constraints on edges.

Each constraint you add contributes to file size and complexity.

TIP Consider using Grip Snaps to position components and then ground them if

you work with large assemblies and the components do not need to move.

The following section details the steps to minimally and fully constrain

cylindrical components in an assembly.

1 Start the Place Component command.

2 Place one copy of Long Shaft.ipt, and apply these constraints.

Constrain Cylindrical Components | 191



3 Right-click, then choose Repeat Place and place one copy of Short

Shaft.ipt. Right-click and select Done when finished.

4 Start the Constrain command, and use

Mate/Mate (the default) to constrain the axis of the long shaft to the

axis of the lower hole.

5 Choose Apply to place the constraint.

6 Constrain the axis of the short shaft to the axis of the upper hole, as

shown in the following image.


8 Change the constraint type to Mate/Flush.

9 Select the planar face of the base mounting tab first, and then select the

planar face at the end of the long shaft. Enter 5 mm for the offset value.

Notice that the face selection color matches the color of the selection

arrow order. The first selection is blue and the second selection is green.This can help you troubleshoot constraints as you use Autodesk Inventor.




NOTE If you pick the faces in the reverse order, enter a value of -5 mm.

10 Select Apply to place the constraint and stay in the dialog box to place

another Mate/Flush constraint.

11 Pick the planar face of the clamp, and then pick the planar face at the

end of the short shaft. Enter an offset value of 4mm, and then click OK

to finish the command.

The long and short shafts should appear symmetrically constrained as

shown in the following image. The shafts are still free to rotate, but the

constraints that fix their position relative to the other components are

in place.




In the next segment, we will place and position the two cylindrical lock pins.

We will position them in the hole so the flat surface of the pin faces the tapped

hole. In this case, we do not want the cylinder to rotate.

1 Start the Place Component command, and place two instances of

Lock Pin.ipt.




2 Select the Cylinder Base component. Right-click, and select Visibility

in the context menu to switch off the visibility .

3 Place a Mate/Mate constraint to align each of the lock pins axially to

the holes in the end of the Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. The long section

should face towards the middle on both lock pins, with the flat area

facing up as shown in the following image.

TIP Use the Rotate command to re-align the pins if they are constrained

axially, but the long section is facing out. After rotating, use Update to

recalculate the axial constraint in the new position.




4 Select the Cylinder Base in the browser. Right-click, and select

Visibility to re-enable the component visibility.

To align the center of the flat area on the lock pin with the tapped hole

in the base, we will create a work axis on the lock pin.

5 Double-click one of the lock pin instances, or right-click and choose

EditComponent from the marking menu to initiate an edit-in-place

operation.

6 On the View tab

➤

Visibility panel, select Object Visibility and

ensure that All Workfeatures is enabled to view the work geometry.

7 On the 3D Model tab

➤

Work Features panel, select Work Axis.

8 Select Work Plane1 and the XZ Plane in the Origin folder of theLock Pin to create a Work Axis in the middle of the flat cutout. A work

axis should appear in the center of the flat section, as shown in the

following image.




9 Right-click, and choose Finish Edit from the marking menu.

Alternatively, choose the Return command on the 3D Model tab tofinish the local edit and return to the assembly.

10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate constraint

between the new work axis and the axis in the center of the tapped hole.


12 Place a Mate/Mate constraint between the two axes on the remaininglock pin to position the pin in the hole.




13 Click OK to apply the constraint and exit the dialog box. The lock pins

are fully constrained in alignment with the tapped holes.

14 Save the file.

In the following image depicting the Cylinder Base, Enabled is toggled off,

while Visibility is not. If a component is not enabled, it remains visible in

a transparent state, but it is not selectable. A component that is not enabled

appears green in the browser. To re-enable a component, select the component

in the browser, and choose Enabled in the context menu.


Add the Hardware

The assembly is nearly complete. We will now finish placing the components

necessary to create an accurate Bill of Materials and Parts List.

This section of the exercise assumes that you have Content Center installedand available. If Content Center is not available, the required hardware to




finish the assembly is furnished in the tutorial directory. The steps listed in

the following section do not detail the workflow to place the circlips without

Content Center.

The Content Center allows you to place a component, adjust the size to match

the target, and constrain it in a few picks. The target edge for the circlip we

will place in the next section is the inside edge noted in the following image.

1 On the Assemble tab

➤

Component panel, choose the drop-downarrow under Place to access the Place from Content Center

command. You can also right-click in the graphics screen and select the

command from the context menu.

2 Expand the section titled Shaft Parts.

3 Expand the sub-section titled Circlips, and select External.

Add the Hardware | 199



4 Select ANSI B 27.7M in the dialog box, and then choose OK. A preview

of the component appears in the graphics window attached to the cursor.

The question mark in the preview image indicates that the clip can be

automatically resized using AutoDrop.

5 Move your cursor over the inside edge of the groove, and wait for the

component to resize automatically. Click the edge when the component

is the proper size, and then click the check mark in the AutoDrop dialogbox to place and constrain the component.




6 Repeat to place the remaining circlips. Choose Done from the context

menu when finished. There should be four instances of ANSI B 27.7N

3AMI-7 in the browser.

7 Start the Place Component command.

8 Place two copies of 6mm SHCS.ipt in the assembly.

9 Rotate the components, if necessary, to position the hex opening up as

shown in the following image.




10 Start the Constrain command, and place a Mate/Mate between the

centerline of the fastener and the centerline of the hole.

11 Choose Apply, and repeat for the other fastener. Click OK to apply the

constraint and finish the command.

12 Turn off the Visibility of the Cylinder Base.

13 Start the Constrain command. Place a Mate/Mate constraint between

the planar face at the bottom of the fastener and the planar face of the

cutout in the lock pin.




14 Choose Apply and repeat for the other side.

15 Choose OK to finish.

16 Turn on the Visibility of the Cylinder Base.

17 Save the file.





Summary

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise, you:

■ Placed components in an assembly.

■ Applied assembly constraints.

■ Edited parts from the assembly environment.

■ Created and used Contact Sets.

■ Enabled the Flexible state on a lower level subassembly.

■ Used interference detection.

■ Placed components using the Content Center library with AutoDrop.




What Next? Try the Drawings tutorial to learn how to document parts and

assemblies using the drafting and view layout commands.

Previous (page 198)

Summary | 205



206



Drawings

About this tutorial

Prepare final drawings of your models.

New UsersCategory


hinge.idw

hinge.ipt

Tutorial Files

Used

Cylinder Clamp.idw


tp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial data

sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets

as instructed.

It is likely that Archimedes created engineering drawings as early as 260 BC and

da Vinci documented his designs in the 1500s using drawings. Although the

common blueprint (in use since 1842) has faded from use, 3D digital prototypes

are still documented using drawings. Often these drawings are for those people

responsible for manufacturing. Digital drawing files today follow the standards

defined for paper drawings. The creation of a design drawing remains the

ultimate goal for a majority of engineers and designers.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Parts 2and Assemblies tutorials.

8

207







■ Understand the basics of the technical drawing process and industry

standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and so on.

■ Understand the material covered in the Help topic “Getting Started.”

■ Click Application Options on the Options panel of the Tools tab. On

the Application Options dialog box, click the Drawing tab and uncheck

the option Edit dimension when created.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 208)

Get Started1 Open hinge.idw,located in \Tutorial Files\Cylinder Clamp.

This file contains a simple, two sheet drawing that you can refer to during

the tutorial. Sheet:1 of the drawing contains four views of the part you

208 | Chapter 8 Drawings



will detail during the first part of this tutorial. Sheet:2 shows how the

drawing would look after the addition of a section view, dimensions,

and annotation.

2 To view Sheet:2, double-click the Sheet:2 node in the browser.

NOTE Although you can add sheets to any drawing you create, you do not typically

add sheets containing the same views shown on other sheets. The second sheet

in the supplied drawing is simply an easy way to reference incremental progress

for this tutorial.

You can leave this drawing open as you continue with the tutorial.

In the next several steps, you will select a template to begin a new drawing

and add front, left-side, top and isometric views to the drawing sheet.


Create a Drawing

1 Click New on the Application Menu.

2 Click the Metric tab, and then select ISO.idw.

3 Click OK.

Create a Drawing | 209



Autodesk Inventor opens an empty A3 drawing sheet with a generic

border and title block. In the remaining steps, you place four views like

the views you saw on Sheet:1 of the already open drawing.

4 On the ribbon, click Place Views tab ➤

Create panel ➤

Base

.

5 To specify a model, in the Drawing View dialog box, click Open an

existing file.

6 Select hinge.ipt, and click Open.7 Click a location on your sheet for your front view. Leave space between

the view boundaries and the drawing border to allow for additional view

and dimension placement.

NOTE Before you place the base view, you can use options on the Drawing

View dialog box to specify the base view properties. For this tutorial, you

accept the system default values.





View Projection

After you place a base view, the Place Views tab ➤

Create panel

➤

Projected command is activated by default.

To understand your view projection options, move your cursor in a circle

around the front view boundary without clicking. Notice that Autodesk

Inventor previews eight different projected views.

1 Click below your front view to place a top view. Notice that a temporary

rectangle is placed, indicating the intended location of the new view.

2 Click to the right of your front view to place a left side view. Another

temporary rectangle is placed.

3 Click below your front view and to the right of your top view. A

temporary rectangle is placed for an isometric view.

4 Right click, and select Create. The three projected views that you

positioned are now created.

NOTE The ISO drafting standard specifies first-angle projection. The ANSI drafting

standard specifies third-angle projection. Views are projected according to the

standard specified by the template used to create drawings. Autodesk Inventor

supplies templates for standards accepted world-wide. The supplied standards can

be modified to suit your requirements.

View Projection | 211



Approximate layout of current drawing sheet with one base view and three

projected views. Moving views is easy, if necessary. Just click and drag a

drawing view while the red dotted view boundary displays. Dependent views

will position relative to the parent view.

At this point, you would likely begin adding dimensions to a simple part.

However, for this part, add a section view.


Add a Section View


Create panel ➤

Section

.

The Status Bar at the bottom left of the display screen prompts you

to: Select a view or view sketch.

2 Click the left side view located to the right of the front or base view on

your drawing sheet.

You are prompted to enter the endpoints of the section line. Draw a

vertical line that starts above the view geometry, extends below the view

geometry, and passes through the middle of the part.




3 To find the middle of the part, slowly move your cursor over the top-most

line in the center portion of the part. When you reach the middle of

that line, the cursor displays a green ball. Do not click yet!

4 Move your cursor slowly above the drawing view.

Add a Section View | 213



As you move upwards, notice the dotted line extending from your cursor

to the middle of the part. This dotted line lets you know that you are

aligned with the midpoint of the line that was located under the green

ball. If you move too far to the right or the left as you move upwards,

you are no longer aligned to that point, and the dotted line disappears.

5 With the dotted vertical line visible, click to select the top-most point

of the section line.

6 Move your cursor straight down below the view. Your cursor indicates

that the line is perpendicular to the part edge.




7 While the perpendicular icon displays next to your cursor, click to selectthe end point of the section line.

8 Right-click, and select Continue. The Section View dialog box appears

offering various options for defining, identifying, and scaling the section

view. For this exercise, accept the default settings.

9 Move your cursor to the left of the front view, and click to place the

section view and close the Section View dialog box.

Add a Section View | 215



During the creation of a section view, you can use Inventor ability to

infer geometric relationships while you sketch your section line. In this

example, you used a single, straight line. In other more complex cases,

you will use a multi-segment line that passes through key points of

multiple features.

A section view is created, and a label is positioned that identifies the

view and indicates the view scale. This view label is optional and can be

repositioned and edited after placement as required.

10 Move your cursor over the view label. When the label text changes to

red, click and drag the label away from the view geometry to allow room

for dimensions.

You will now place dimensions and other annotation on your drawing.





Place Centerlines and Center Marks

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤

Symbols panel ➤

Centerline

.

2 Move your cursor over the center of the upper left hole in the section

view. When the green-filled circle appears, indicating that you are directly

over the center point, click to select the first point of your centerline.

TIP After clicking on the Centerline command, you can optionally click

to select the circle first. You can then more easily select the circle center with

a second click.

3 Move your mouse to the right until you are over the center of the

upper-right hole in the section view. When the green-filled circle appears,click to select the endpoint of your centerline.

Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 217



4 Right-click to display the context menu.

5 Select Create to complete the placement of the centerline.

6 Repeat steps 2-5 to place a similar centerline between these same twoholes in the front view.

7 Click Annotate tab

➤

Symbols panel ➤

Center Mark .

8 Move your cursor over the center of the cylindrical feature in the lower

right of the section view. When the green-filled circle appears (to indicate

that you are directly over the center point) click to place a center mark.

9 Repeat the previous step to place a center mark on the inside cylindrical

radius and on these same locations in the front view.




With centerlines and center marks in place, it is time to place dimensions.


Place Centerlines and Center Marks | 219



Place Dimensions

In this exercise, we use the general Dimension command. Autodesk Inventor

also provides some unique dimensioning commands that are not covered in

this tutorial. As you proceed, you may decide that a dimension (or other

annotation) you placed is unsatisfactory. To delete a dimension or annotation

that has already been placed, select the Undo command from the Quick Access

toolbar. You can also select the dimension and press Del, or right-click and

select Delete from the displayed context menu.




NOTE The following steps assume that you canceled the Edit dimension when

created selection on the Drawing tab of the Application Options dialog box

as instructed in the Prerequisites for this tutorial. If you did not, you will see an

Edit dialog box displayed after clicking to place each dimension. You can continue

this tutorial without changing the default settings by always clicking OK when

this dialog box displays. However, we recommend that you change the default.

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab

➤

Dimension panel

➤

Dimension .

2 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark

on the left-most hole in the section view.

3 When the two green-filled circles appear and the vertical line highlights,

click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of your dimension.

4 Move your cursor over the top-most extent of the vertical center mark

on the right-most hole in the section view.


click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the right extent of

your dimension.

Place Dimensions | 221



6 Notice that as you move your cursor, the dimension extension lines

adjust. Click to position your dimension.

Although you placed a single dimension, the Dimension command is

still active.

7 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical center mark

on the left-most hole in the section view.





click to select the vertical line of the center mark as the left extent of

your dimension.

9 Move your cursor over the lower-most extent of the vertical line

representing the cut material.

10 To select the right extent of your dimension, click when the line

highlights and the green-filled circle appears.




11 Move your cursor to select a position, and then click to place the 16-mm

dimension.




12 Continue to place horizontal and vertical dimensions on the section,

front, left, and top views. Click the Esc key to terminate the dimension

command.

13 After placing several dimensions, you may decide that you would like

to move a dimension. With no command active, move your cursor over

a dimension value that you would like to move. When the dimensionhighlights, click and drag the dimension value (up/down or left/right)

to new location. You can also click and drag any of the green-filled circle

edit handles to make other dimension edits.





Place Angular Dimensions

1 The general Dimension command is also used to place angular

dimensions. On the ribbon, click Annotate tab ➤

Dimension panel

➤

Dimension.

2 Move your cursor over the angled line in the front view. When the line

highlights, click to select the first side of the angle that you wish to

dimension. For this selection, you do not have to locate a key point on

the line. No green-filled circles must be located that infer the selection

of the line midpoint or endpoint.




3 Move your cursor over the bottom horizontal line. When the line

highlights, click to select the second side of the angle that you want todimension. Notice that the icon near the cursor indicates that your

selection will create an angle dimension.

4 To understand your dimension options, drag your cursor in a circle and

notice that you can place your angle dimension in one of four quadrants

defined by the intersection of the two lines that you selected.

Place Angular Dimensions | 227



5 Click to place your angle dimension in the quadrant shown.





Radial and Reference Dimensions

1 The general Dimension command (which should still be active) is also

used to place radial dimensions. Move your cursor over the right-most

arc in the front view. Click when the arc geometry highlights.

2 Drag your cursor to place the radial dimension.

3 Move your cursor over the left-most arc in the front view. Move your

cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears at the 270-degree

position. It indicates that you located the left-most quadrant key point.

Click to select the left-most point of what will be an overall reference

dimension.

CAUTION: The midpoint of the arc segment also displays a green-filled

circle at approximately 290 degrees. Selecting the arc segment midpoint

will not produce the appropriate dimension.

Radial and Reference Dimensions | 229



4 Move your cursor over the right-most arc in the front view. Move your

cursor along the arc until the green-filled circle appears to indicate that

you located the right-most quadrant key point. Click to select the

right-most point of what will be an overall reference dimension.

5 Drag your cursor to place the overall dimension.




TIP Dimensions, centerlines, and center marks can also be placed for holes

and other features in isometric views.


Add a Hole Note


Feature Notes panel ➤

Hole

and Thread .

2 Move your cursor near the 10 o’clock position of the left-most hole in

your front view, and click to select the arrow location of your hole call

out.

Add a Hole Note | 231



3 Drag your cursor to position the leader and dimension for your hole

callout. Click to finalize the placement.

Your drawing should now appear like Sheet:2 on the previously opened

hinge.idw. Before you continue by working within a partially complete

assembly drawing, save your drawing.

4 With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application

menu.

5 Type a name for your drawing in the File name field of the Save as

dialog box.




6 Click Save. By default, your drawing is saved in the Inventor IDW

drawing format.

If you routinely work with or send drawings to individuals using AutoCAD,

consider saving your drawing in the DWG format.

■ With the drawing you created active, click Save As on the Application

Menu.

■ Click the selection arrow on the Save as type field on the Save As dialog

box.

■ Select Inventor drawing files (*.dwg) from the drop-down list.

■ You may want to change the name of the saved drawing or the location

where you will save DWG files, but for this tutorial, simply click Save.

7 From the Application Menu, click Close All.

Open an Assembly Drawing

In the next portion of the tutorial, you add a parts list, balloons, and notes

to an assembly drawing. Assembly drawing views and dimensions are created

and placed using the same steps that you just completed. They are not repeated

in the remaining portion of the tutorial.

1 Click Open on the Application Menu.

2 Select Cylinder Clamp.idw in the Open dialog box, and click Open.

A single sheet drawing opens that has three orthographic views and one

isometric view of the cylinder clamp assembly used in the Parts 2 andAssemblies tutorials.

Open an Assembly Drawing | 233



Assembly drawings often contain numbered lists of component parts along

with corresponding balloons which identify each part. In the next set of

exercises, you place a parts list and balloons with corresponding numbers.


Place a Parts List

1 On the Annotate tab, Table panel, click Parts List.

2 The Parts List dialog box appears, and the view selection stage of the

command is active. Move your cursor over the isometric view of the

assembly. When the view highlights with a red dotted boundary, click

to select the view.




3 In the Parts List dialog box, select Parts Only from the BOM View

drop-down list control in the BOM Settings and Properties area.

4 Click OK in the Parts List dialog box.

A rectangle the size of the parts list appears attached to your cursor.

Place a Parts List | 235



You are now ready to move the parts list to a position on your drawing

sheet.

5 Move the parts list so that it aligns with the upper left of the drawing

border.

Notice that when your cursor is over the drawing border, an icon appears

indicating the connection point for the parts list.




6 Click to accept the position of the parts list on your drawing sheet.

Place a Parts List | 237



Each item in the assembly is given a sequential item number in the parts

list. You will now add balloons which use these item numbers.


Add Balloons8 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab

➤

Table panel, and then click the

drop-down menu below Balloon. .

9 On the drop-down menu, click Auto Balloon.

10 Move your cursor over the isometric view of the assembly. When the

view highlights with a red dotted boundary, click to select the view.

11 Use the Balloon command to select individual components for

ballooning. In this exercise, you select all the components in the view.

Click above and to the left of the view geometry, and drag the mouse




down and to the right. The pink rectangle should cover all the view

geometry.

12 Release the mouse button to select all the view geometry.

Add Balloons | 239



13 Select the Around option in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon

dialog box.

14 Enter a value of 5 mm in the Offset Spacing field in the Auto Balloon

dialog box.

8 Click Select Placement in the Placement area in the Auto Balloon

dialog box.

9 Move your cursor into the drawing sheet. As you move your cursor, the

balloons arrange themselves closer or farther away from the view center.

Vertical rows move based on the horizontal position of the cursor relative

to the view center. Horizontal rows move based on the vertical position

of the cursor relative to the view center. The following illustration shows

four possible balloon positions using the Around option.




10 Move your cursor to a position that most closely resembles the display

in the lower-right quadrant of the image shown above. When your

balloon spacing appears similar, click to display the balloon arrows.

11 Click OK in the Auto Balloon dialog box to accept and place the balloons

and arrows.


Add Balloons | 241



Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders

Having placed many balloons automatically, you may decide to reposition

one or more balloons or balloon leaders.

In this case, the leader for balloon 1 (which identifies the base) needlessly

crosses over the cylinder. In the following steps you move both the balloon

and the leader arrow.

1 Move your mouse over balloon 1. The balloon and leader highlight,

and a green edit handle appears in the balloon center.

2 Move your cursor over the green edit handle. When the move glyph

appears next to your cursor, drag the balloon down towards balloon

7.




3 Drag slowly over balloon 7 and then downwards.

As you drag downwards, notice the vertical dotted line appears, indicating

that your balloon position is aligned with balloon 7.

4 Release your mouse button to accept a new balloon position similar to

that shown in the following illustration.

Adjust Balloons and Balloon Leaders | 243



Next, you adjust the leader arrowhead position.





Adjust the Leader Arrowhead

Now that the balloon is in a better position, you will move the leader

arrowhead to a position closer to the balloon.

1 Move your cursor over the end-most edit handle located at the arrowhead

point of the leader from balloon 1.

2 When the move symbol appears next to the cursor, click and drag the

location of the arrowhead point to the corner of the base closest to the

balloon.

Adjust the Leader Arrowhead | 245



3 When the lines representing the bottom and side of the base highlight

and the connection point icon appears next to your cursor, release your

mouse button to select the new position for the arrowhead point.

Next, you will place a few example notes.


Place Notes

Every drawing contains text and annotation. This text may be attached to

drawing geometry with an arrow leader or contained within a specific area of

a title block or revision table. It can be a lengthy set of notes.

To place text:

1 On the ribbon, click Annotate tab

➤

Text panel ➤

Text .




2 Placing text on a drawing requires you to specify a location and an

approximate initial size of the area occupied by the block of text. Move

your cursor to the empty area above the title block. Click and drag arectangle approximately as shown in the following image:

NOTE For smaller amounts of text, your initial rectangle can be smaller. The

size of the text boundary can be adjusted at any time after placement so

getting it exactly correct is not critical.

When you release the mouse button, the Format Text dialog box displays.In addition to some text formatting options, this dialog box contains a

large text entry field located along the bottom of the dialog box. For

many general notes, you can accept the text formatting defaults (which

are specified by the active style for your drawing).

3 Enter text in the text entry field. Type NOTES:, then press Enter and

continue to type 1. This is a note. Press Enter again and continue

to type 2. This is another note.

4 Click OK to place the text you typed in the text entry field on the

drawing sheet, within the area specified by your rectangle.

Place Notes | 247



5 Select another command, or click Esc to terminate the Text command.

6 Click the placed text.




The text highlights and displays edit handles (green-filled circles). You

can drag the entire text block to a new location or move your cursor

over one of the eight edit handles to resize the text block boundaries.

7 With the text selected, right-click and select Edit Text from the context

menu. The Format Text dialog box opens with the selected text in the

entry field. You can highlight individual words and apply formatting

(bold, italic, underline) or change font or size.

8 Click Save to save the Cylinder Clamp drawing.

NOTE After clicking Save, you may be presented with the Save dialog box

prompting you with: Do you want to save changes to ‘Cylinder

Clamp.idw’ and its dependents? You can click the Yes to All button

to save all the files associated with the assembly, or click No to All if you

wish to save none. Click the OK button to save only the files changed in

this exercise and close the dialog box.

Congratulations! You have completed the Drawings tutorial. A brief summary

follows.

Summary

The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment contains a collection of

commands – most of which were not discussed in this tutorial. Knowing how

to use the fundamental methods to create basic drawings provides you with

a foundation to explore the use of these other commands. The basic procedures

covered in this tutorial include:

■ Projected and section view creation■ Basic dimensioning

■ Placing basic notes

Previous (page 246)

Summary | 249



250



Drawing Styles andStandards

About this tutorial

Open a drawing and modify the drawing styles for dimensions. Apply the styles

to dimensions and modify the display of hatch patterns.

New UsersCategory


9

251



Cylinder Body Sub-Assembly.idwTutorial File Used





A drawing communicates a design, and must do so in a way that other people

can understand. The drawings from every company follow some combination

of rules from national, industry, or internal standards.

In this tutorial, you change the style of the open drawing and load information

from the style library. The project file references the style library that contains

the data to load into the drawing.

Prerequisites■ Complete the Drawings tutorial.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 252)

Set the project and open the Tutorial File

Inventor stores styles in documents (local styles) and in the style library (librarystyles). The Use Style Library setting in the project determines whether styles

in the style library are open for edit. The Read-Only status ensures that all

style edits are kept in the local document.

1 With all Inventor files closed, click ➤

Manage ➤

Projects.

2 In the lower pane of the Projects dialog box, confirm that the Use

Style Library setting is Read-Only.

If it is set to Read-Write, right-click the setting, and select Read-Only.

Then click Save.

252 | Chapter 9 Drawing Styles and Standards







NOTE Read-Only status enables sharing styles in model or drawing

documents. When styles in the library change, CAD administrator can update

all documents to use the new library styles.

3 Click Done to close the Projects dialog box.

4 In the Tutorial Files > Cylinder Clamp folder, open Drawing Styles.idw.

Previous (page 251) | Next

Annotation StylesDrawing styles control the appearance of drawing annotations. The default

styles delivered with Inventor comply with national and international

standards such as ANSI, ISO, and GB. You can modify the styles to meet the

requirements of your company. For example, if you have a text style that uses

a large font, you can use that style to override the appearance of notes.

This drawing was created using the ISO standard. Although most of the

annotations follow the standard, some changes are required. In this exercise,

you create a dimension style that uses a period instead of a comma for the

decimal marker.

Annotation Styles | 253



1 Click the Manage tab ➤

Styles and Standards group ➤

Styles

Editor. The Style and Standard Editor dialog box displays.

Each drawing contains the style information that controls the display

of the annotations. In addition, the drawing can contain styles that are

not used. The style library can store all the styles your company uses.

To reduce file size, there are more styles in the style library than in a

drawing. For example, styles for weldments only are not included in

most drawings.

The dialog box has a style tree list on the left side. The tree list has a

node for each type of annotation. If you click a node, it expands to

display the styles. Some annotations have only one style, while others

have several.

2 Expand the Dimension node in the browser, and select Default (ISO).

3 To create a dimension style based on the Default (ISO) style, click New…

4 In the New Local Style dialog box, in Name, enter Modified (ISO).

Clear the Add to Standard setting, and click OK.

The new style is added to browser under the Dimension node.

NOTE Add to Standard controls whether to include the style in the active

standard. You do not use this style in the default standard.

5 In Decimal Marker, change the setting to . Period, as shown in the

following image.




6 Click Save.

NOTE Each style is a separate collection of settings. Save changes before

you switch to a different style.


Object Defaults and Standards

An object default style is a collection of all annotation types and their default

settings. A standard contains settings for views, text, object defaults, and

hatches. In this topic, you create an object default style and a standard, and

use them to control the appearance of the drawing.

Object Defaults and Standards | 255



1 Expand the Object Defaults node and select Object Defaults (ISO).

Click New, and in Name,enter Modified Object Defaults (ISO). Clear

Add to Standard.

NOTE The Add to Standard behavior for object default styles differs from

annotation styles. If Add to Standard is selected, the new object default

becomes active for the standard.

2 Set the filter to Dimension Objects.

3 Change the Object Style for all dimension types that use the Default

(ISO) to Modified (ISO), as shown in the following image.




4 Click Save. Expand the Standard node, select Default Standard (ISO),

and create a standard named Modified Standard (ISO).

On the Available Styles tab, select Dimension

➤

Modified (ISO)

style.

On the Object Defaults tab, set Active Object Defaults to Modified

Object Defaults (ISO). Click Save, and double-click Modified

Standard (ISO).The standard name changes to bold type to indicate it is active.

Object Defaults and Standards | 257



5 Click Done.

Newly created dimensions use the Modified Standard (ISO).

TIP To update existing dimensions, select the dimensions in the graphic window.

Then on the ribbon, select Modified Standard (ISO) from the Style list on

the Annotate tab

➤

Format panel.





Override Annotation Styles

In some cases, the appearance of certain annotations is wrong, and you do

not want all the annotations to have this appearance. In this topic, you create

a style that hides trailing zeros.

1 Right-click and select Repeat Style and Standard Editor.…

2 Expand the Dimension node, right-click Modified (ISO), and select

New Style. In Name, enter Modified- No Trailing Zeros (ISO)

NOTE Do not clear the Add to Standard selection. Modified Standard (ISO)

is active, and you want to add this style to it.

3 On the Units tab ➤

Display group, clear the selection of Trailing

Zeros. Click Save, and Done.4 Select the hole notes in the base view.

Override Annotation Styles | 259



5 On the Annotate tab ➤

Format panel ➤

Style List, click Modified-

No Trailing Zeros (ISO).


Hatch Styles

Hatch patterns are used in section views, and to fill in the profiles in sketches.

Most standards specify the use of a single hatch pattern, and the angle of the

pattern is automatically changed on individual parts in assembly section views.

Some companies use different hatch patterns for different materials to help

differentiate them. In this exercise, you learn how to map hatch patterns to

materials, import a custom hatch pattern, and override the appearance of a

hatch pattern.




1 Zoom into view A-A. Since it is a view of a single part, all profiles have

the same hatch pattern.

2 On the Manage tab, click Styles and Standards group ➤

Styles

Editor. Expand the Standard node and select Modified Standard

(ISO).

Hatch Styles | 261



3 Click the Material Hatch Pattern Defaults tab. The default hatch

pattern is set to ANSI 31, and no materials are listed. Click the From

Style Library icon to import the materials from the style library. Allmaterials are listed, and they are all mapped to the default hatch pattern.

NOTE If materials do not display, confirm that the style library setting in the

project is Read Only.

Scroll down to Steel, Mild and click the hatch pattern. The drop-down

menu lists ANSI 31, several ISO hatch patterns, and Other… .

4 Click Other... to display the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box. This dialog

box controls which hatch patterns are available in the drawing. Select

ANSI 32 and click OK.

The ANSI 32 steel hatch pattern is now available, but it is not set as the

default hatch pattern for the Steel, Mild material. Click the hatch pattern

dropdown menu again, and select ANSI 32. Click Save, and Done.Even though we set ANSI 32 as the default hatch pattern, the section

view does not update. Once you map hatch patterns to materials, new

section views automatically use those patterns. For existing views, Edit

the pattern and set the By Material option.

Right-click the pattern, and select Pattern ➤

By Material

The section view updates to use the ANSI 32 hatch pattern, as shown in

the following image.




The spacing on the hatch pattern is too close for this part cross-section.

5 Right-click on the pattern and select Edit… .

By Material is selected and Pattern is disabled.

Change the Scale to 2, and click OK.

Hatch Styles | 263



The hatch pattern updates as shown in the following image.

6





Custom Hatch Styles

Some companies use custom hatch patterns to indicate a special material,

surface finish, or to highlight an area for a manufacturing instruction. You

can import AutoCAD standard pattern files into Inventor.

1 Open the Style and Standard Editor and create a hatch style called

Modified Hatch (ISO). On the Pattern dropdown list, select Other… .

In the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box, select Load... In the Tutorial

Files ➤ Cylinder Clamp folder, select Sample.pat, and click Open.

Two hatch patterns are available in that file- Sample1 and Sample2.

Select Sample1, and click OK to close the Load Hatch Pattern dialog

box. Click OK again to close the Select Hatch Pattern dialog box

Sample1 is now the active hatch pattern for this style. The image is a

representation of the hatch pattern, but it is not a preview. The patternlines are at an angle, and Angle reads 45 degrees.

2 Change Angle to 0 degrees. The image does not update.

The Sample1 hatch pattern is defined with the crosshatch lines at 27

and 48 degree angles. The default Angle setting shifts the pattern by 45

degrees. By changing Angle to 0 degrees, the pattern appears in the

drawing the way it was created.

Click Save, and click Done.

3 Click View A-A.

On the Annotate tab, click Sketch Group ➤

Create Sketch. In the

Draw group, click Project Geometry, and then select the four lines

in the middle of the view. Click Done (ESC).

On the Sketch tab, in Draw group, click Fill/Hatch Region, and

then click in the profile defined by the projected lines.

4 In the Hatch/Color Fill dialog box, click the Hatch button to enable

the hatch controls. In the Pattern list, select Sample1.

The pattern displays in the sketch. Although you selected the sample1

pattern, the rest of the settings did not update. The previous Angle setting

does not work well with this pattern, so experiment with different angles.

In Angle, enter 90 degrees, and click OK.

The dialog box closes. Click Finish Sketch to return to the drawing.

The section view resembles the following image.

Custom Hatch Styles | 265



NOTE Note If you do not select the view before you create the sketch, the

sketch is created on the sheet instead of the view. You cannot project view

geometry into a sheet sketch.





Summary

The Autodesk Inventor drawing environment supports extensive drawing

customization. Knowing how to use the Style and Standard Editor to customize

dimension and hatch appearance provides you with a foundation to explore

annotation customization further. The basic procedures covered in this tutorial

include:

■ Creating and modifying styles, object defaults, and standards.

■ Setting style defaults.

■ Overriding styles.

Previous (page 265)

Summary | 267



268



iLogic Basics

About this tutorial

Create rules-based models.

New UsersCategory

10

269




bracket_no_rules.iptTutorial File Used





iLogic extends the computational capabilities within Autodesk Inventor to

include rules. These rules work with the parameter update mechanism of

Autodesk Inventor and allow you to include much more sophisticated design

intent into your models.

In traditional parametric modeling, dimensional parameters drive geometry.Parameter values can be input directly by the user, or they can result from

fixed equations involving other parameters or even linked spreadsheet values.

Using rules in a parametric model allows for conditionally defined equations.

Conditional equations can involve all aspects of the design. Equations or

relationships can be defined between the parameters, properties, attributes,

features, components, or any other aspect of the design. Defining the

relationships between all objects in a design makes it possible to update the

model completely, correctly, and automatically when input parameter values

are changed.

Objectives

■ Become familiar with important iLogic concepts.

■ Create rules and parameters that control the modeling of a simple part.

Prerequisites

■ Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling

functionality and concepts.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 271)

270 | Chapter 10 iLogic Basics







Prepare to Add Parameters

In addition to the familiar numeric parameters available in Autodesk Inventor,

you can create text and true/false parameters and then use them to control

your model.

In the following lessons, you create additional parameters in your model for

later use in iLogic rules.

1 With Autodesk Inventor open, set your active project to iLogic 2012

Tutorials.

2 Open the file bracket_no_rules.ipt.

3 Use the Save As command to save this document as a new file named

bracket.ipt. This open document is your working file for the tutorial.

4 On the ribbon, click Manage tab

➤

Parameters panel

➤

Parametersto display the Parameters dialog box, which serves as

the editor for all Autodesk Inventor parameters.

Prepare to Add Parameters | 271



5 Click the Filters icon at the bottom of the dialog box. Select the

All option to ensure that all parameters associated with the bracketmodel are displayed.


Create a Numeric Parameter

1 Select Add Numeric from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the

dialog box.

A new row is created at the bottom of the parameter list, and the cursor

is positioned in the Parameter Name cell for that row.

2 Enter the name mass, and then click the Unit cell to display the UnitType dialog box.

3 Expand the Mass node, and select lbmass.

NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Please be sure to follow

the case being used in the Parameters dialog box, and while creating rules.

4 Enter 100 in the Equation cell, then click in another cell in the row

and observe 100.000000 in the Nominal Value field.

5 Select the check box in the Key cell of this parameter to make it a Key

parameter.


Create a Text Parameter

With the Parameters dialog box still open:

1 Select Add Text from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the dialog

box.

2 Enter the name holes in the empty Parameter Name cell at the

bottom of the parameter list.

3 Right-click in one of the cells of the row to display the contextual menu

containing the options Make Multi-Value and Delete Parameter.

4 Select Make Multi-Value to open the Value List Editor dialog box.




5 In the Add New Items field at the top of the dialog box, enter base,

flange, and none. Make sure to press Enter after each item to place it

on its own line.

6 Click Add to transfer the new items to the Value field at the bottom

of the dialog box.

(1) Enter your items here. (2) Click Add. (3) Observe items added as values.

7 Click OK to accept these values and close the Value List Editor dialog

box.

In the Equation cell of the holes parameter, click the drop-down arrow

to see the three string values you added.

Create a Text Parameter | 273



8 Select the flange choice. Notice that as you change the value of the

hole parameter to flange, it also changes in the Equation field.

9 Select Key checkbox of this parameter to make it a Key parameter.


Create a True-False Parameter

Now we create a parameter to control use of the chamfer feature on the bracket

part.

1 Select Add True/False from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the

dialog box.

2 Enter the name chamfers in the empty Parameter Name cell at the

bottom of the parameter list.

3 Click in the Equation cell and notice that a drop-down menu appears,

with True and False as the available options.

4 Select the Key check box to make the chamfer parameter a Key

parameter.

5 Click Done to close the Parameter dialog box and complete the parameter

creation process.





Set Parameter Filters

The Parameters dialog box includes filters to control which parameters are

displayed. Filters help you focus on specific parameters.

1 Open the Parameters dialog box, and expand the dialog box window to

show all the parameters associated with the bracket.

Click the Filters icon in the bottom left corner of the dialog to

view a list of the filters you can use to restrict the parameter list.

2 Select the check box in the Key field of each of the following Model

parameters to set them as Key parameters.

■ base_hole_length_loc

■ base_hole_width_loc

■ base_hole_dia

■ flange_hole_dia

■ flange_hole_length_loc

■ flange_hole_width_loc

3 Click the various choices in the list of filters.

Notice how the list of displayed parameters changes.

■ All shows all parameters.

■ Key shows only key parameters.

■ Non-Key shows only non-key parameters.

■ Renamed shows only those parameters that the user renamed.■ Equation shows only those parameters involved in an equation.

4 Close the Parameters dialog box.

This simple bracket model has 28 parameters associated with it. It is not

unreasonable to expect that a complex part or assembly of parts may have

hundreds of parameters. By strategically designating Key parameters, it is

possible to find relevant parameters much more easily by filtering the list.


Set Parameter Filters | 275



Create Feature Suppression Rule

With the necessary parameters in place, we can now add logic to the model

using rules. Rules can be defined for various actions, including setting the

values of parameters and activating or suppressing features. Our first rule

suppresses a feature on a part.

Rule Editor


➤

iLogic panel ➤

Add

Rule.

2 Enter Modify_Feature in the Name field of the Rule Name dialog box,

and click OK to display the Edit Rule dialog box.The Edit Rule dialog box is the heart of the iLogic functionality. You use

this dialog box to create and edit iLogic rules.

3 Select the Model tab. The top left panel of this window includes a view

of the Model tree. Click the Model Parameters node in the tree. Notice

that the top right panel now lists only the Model parameters.

To see other sets of parameters, you can click the User Parameters

node in the model tree to display only the manually created parameters.

You write rules in the rule text area, which is located in the bottom panelof the Edit Rule dialog box. You can enter Rule keywords by typing them




directly into the text entry field. Or, you can select generic statements

from the toolbar above the field and then editing the statements.

This tutorial describes entering the statements manually, unless otherwise

indicated.

4 Click the User Parameters node to display the User parameters.

The bracket model includes two holes: one in the base, and one on the

flange.

(1) flange hole (2) base hole

Create Feature Suppression Rule | 277



Our new rule turns on (or off) the base hole, the flange hole, or both.

In a previous lesson, we created a multi-value parameter named holes.

We assigned three values to this parameter labeled base, flange andnone. The rule turns on the flange hole when flange value is selected.

Choosing base turns on the base hole, and a value of none turns off

both holes

Add Parameters to Rule

Now we can create the rule. We begin with the flange setting of the holes

parameter.

1 Enter If in the text box, followed by a space.

Notice that the text of the If keyword turns bold and red. The red color

indicates a recognized language element (in this case a keyword).

2 In the Model tree, click the User Parameters node, then double-click

holes to insert the holes parameter name into the editor.

3 Type = , followed by a space, and then type “flange” (be sure to include

quotation marks). Add another space, and type Then to finish this line.

Notice that the different colors are applied automatically to the different

language elements of the expression defined so far. This color coding

makes rules much easier to read, and it helps you quickly comprehend

their meaning, and identify any information entered incorrectly.

4 Press Enter to move to the next line.

We can make the flange hole active by using an iLogic function.

Insert Code Snippets

1 In the Snippets area on the left side of the editor, click the System tab.

Expand the Features node, then double-click the IsActive choice to

insert its text into the rule editor.




2 Click the Model tab at the top of the Edit Rule dialog box, and click

flange_hole in the Model tree.

3 Click the Names tab in the top right corner of the dialog box, and notice

that flange_hole now appears here.

4 Highlight featurename in the rule text, and then double-click

flange_hole in the Names tab to replace featurename with

flange_hole.




(1) Highlight generic text. (2) Double-click name to replace highlighted text.

The Feature.IsActive function sets the activity state (suppression state)

of a feature specified in quotation marks inside the parentheses.

5 To assign a value of True, first insert a space at the end of the statement.

After the space, enter =, followed by another space, and then the word

True.

Assigning a value of True indicates that the flange hole is active

(unsuppressed). When the flange option is chosen for the holesparameter, we want only the flange hole active. We must include a

command that deactivates the base hole.

6 At the end of your rule text, press Enter to move to the next line, and

then insert another Feature.IsActive(“featurename”) function.

7 Highlight the featurename string and click base_hole in the Model

tree. Then double-click base_hole in the Name tab to replace

featurename with base_hole, and assign a value of False.

These two lines turn on the flange hole and turn off the base hole. Your

rule now consists of three lines.




Copy Code Block

If holes = "flange" Then

Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = True

Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = False

For instances in which the base hole must be activated, a similar strategy

is employed. We must activate the base hole and deactivate the flange

hole.

Reuse Code Blocks

To create the next part of the rule, you copy and paste the reusable portion

of the previous statements. Then change the pasted text as required.

1 Press Enter to insert a new line, and then enter ElseIf.

2 Highlight the reusable text, which includes everything after the word

If, and press Ctrl + C to copy the text to the clipboard. Then, position

the cursor after ElseIf, and press Ctrl + V to paste it.

NOTE You can also Cut, Copy, and Paste by right-clicking selected text and

selecting the appropriate command from a context menu. It also contains

other editing commands. Or, you can use the icons in the editing toolbar above the rule text area.

3 In the newly pasted text, change flange to base, and switch the True

and False conditions.




Copy Code Block

If holes= ”flange” ThenFeature.IsActive(“flange_hole”) = True

Feature.IsActive(“base_hole") = False

ElseIf holes = “base” Then

Feature.IsActive(“flange_hole”) = False

Feature.IsActive(“base_hole”) = True

4 Add another ElseIf statement, and use the same copy and paste method

to create the third part of this rule, where no holes are required. Modify

the newly pasted text to suppress both hole features when the holes

parameter is set to none.

5 Finish the statement by typing End If (or clicking the corresponding

keyword button).

The rule is complete.

Copy Code Block

If holes = "flange" Then

Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = True


ElseIf holes = "base" Then

Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = False

Feature.IsActive("base_hole") = True

ElseIf holes = "none" Then




Feature.IsActive("flange_hole") = False


End If

6 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box.

If there are no mistakes, the dialog box closes without an error message.

An icon representing the new rule appears in the Rule Browser.

7 To verify the new rule, click Manage tab ➤

iLogic panel

➤

Rule Browser and view the tree.

The Rule Browser provides a way for you to see the rules in the current

model. We explore the Rule Browser further later in this tutorial.

Test the Feature Suppression Rule


Parameters panel

➤

Parameters to display the Parameters dialog box.

2 Click the node icon to the left of the Model Parameters area to collapse

the list of Model parameters.

3 Click in the Equation field of the holes parameter to enable the

multi-value drop-down arrow. Then click the arrow and select flange

from the drop-down menu.




4 Click any other cell and observe the bracket. The only hole shown is the

flange hole.

5 Change the multi-value selection to base, and click another cell. Only

the base hole is shown.




6 Finally, change the multi-value selection to none, and click another

cell. No holes are visible.




7 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.

Rename the Feature Suppression Rule

The rule we created requires a more descriptive name.


➤

iLogic panel ➤

Rule

Browser.

2 In the tree, click Modify_Feature once to highlight the rule, then click

it again to enable edit mode.

3 Rename the rule to Hole_Rule, and press Enter.

4 Close the Rule Browser.





Create Feature Activation Rule

Now, we create a second rule to control the activation of the chamfers on the

bracket. Previously, we created a Boolean-type parameter labeled chamfers.

The two possible values for a Boolean parameter are True and False. We will

use these values to turn chamfers on and off.


➤

iLogic panel ➤

Add

Rule.

2 Name the new rule Chamfer_Rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule

dialog box.

The first part of the rule states that if the value for the Boolean parameter

chamfers is true, then the chamfers feature is activated.

3 Enter the If statement for this rule.

Copy Code Block

If chamfers = True Then

4 From the Snippets area, insert a copy of the IsActive snippet

(Feature.IsActive) into your rule. In the inserted snippet, replace

featurename with Chamfers, and set the statement to True.

Copy Code Block


Feature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True

The second part of the rule states that when the value of the chamfers

parameter is False, the chamfers are deactivated.

5 Add an Else statement, and use the Copy and Paste commands to

create the second part of the rule. Complete the rule with an End Ifstatement.

Create Feature Activation Rule | 287



Copy Code Block


Feature.IsActive("Chamfers") = True

ElseFeature.IsActive("Chamfers") = False

End If


6 Click OK to accept the rule. If no error messages appear, the rule can be

tested.

Test the Feature Activation Rule


Parameters panel

➤

Parameters.

2 In the chamfers row, click in the Equation field to enable the

multi-value drop-down, then click the arrow and select False. Noticethat all chamfers are deactivated.




3 Now, change your Equation selection to True. The chamfers are

activated.


Create Dimension RuleThe third rule we create controls the dimensions of the bracket. Previously,

we created a user parameter labeled mass. Our new rule modifies the width

of the bracket based on the value of this parameter. In the first scenario, the

width of the bracket changes according to the following values.

Bracket WidthMass

1 in100

2 in200

3 in300

Create Dimension Rule | 289



Bracket WidthMass

4 in400

Add Values

First, we add the set of possible values for the mass parameter. Use the menus

in the Filters area to display only the Key parameters in the list. This filter

makes it easier to focus in on the mass parameter.

1 Right-click in any empty cell in the mass row, and select Make

Multi-Value from the context menu.

The Value List Editor opens.

2 In the Add New Item(s) field, add the values 200, 300, and 400 (the

value of 100 should already be in the Value list).

3 Click Add button to populate the Value list, and then click OK to accept

the list and return to the Parameters dialog box.

You can click the drop-down menu in the Multivalue field of the mass

row in the Parameter Editor to see the list of values.

4 Click Done to complete the modification of the mass parameter.

Add the Rule

Next, we create a rule to control the bracket width.


iLogic panel ➤

Add

Rule.

2 Name the new rule Width_Rule.

The first part of our rule states that if the mass is 100, the bracket width

is 1 inch.

3 In the rule text area of the Edit Rule dialog box, begin the rule with an

If statement.

4 Click the Model Parameters node in the Model tree, then locate the

parameter labeled bracket_width under the Parameters tab to the

right of the tree.




5 Double-click bracket_width to insert the parameter name into the

rule text. Although parameter names can be directly typed into the rule,

double-clicking from the list eliminates the possibility of spelling errors.

6 Set the bracket_width to 1 inch.

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Then

bracket_width = 1

NOTE You can specify units in iLogic numeric expressions (for example, “1

in”). However, the examples in this tutorial do not follow this convention. When units are omitted, the units specified in the properties of the model

document are assumed.

The second part of our rule states that if the mass is 200, the bracket

width is 2 inches.

7 Use an ElseIf statement to set the bracket_width to 2 inches when

the mass is 200.

Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Then

bracket_width = 1

ElseIf mass = 200 Then

bracket_width = 2

8 Add two more ElseIf statements to accommodate the remaining values

of 300 and 400.

9 End the rule with an End If statement.





Copy Code Block

If mass = 100 Then

bracket_width = 1


bracket_width = 2


bracket_width = 3


bracket_width = 4

End If

10 Click OK to save this new rule.

Test the Rule

1 Open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Set the value of the mass parameter to 100. Notice that bracket_width

is set to 1 inch.




3 Change the mass parameter value to 200, and notice that the bracket

width changes again.




If you change the mass to 300, the width of the bracket increases to 3

inches. A mass of 400 results in a width of 4 inches. Try it!


Test for Range of ValuesWhat if the mass is not limited to exact values, but instead can occur in several

ranges of values? Consider the following examples:

WidthMass range

1 inLess than or equal to 100

2 inGreater than 100 but less than or equal to

200


300




WidthMass range


400

6 inGreater than 400

We can change an existing rule to accommodate these ranges.

1 Open the Rules Browser, and double-click Width_Rule to open the rule

in the Edit Rule dialog box.

2 Modify the rule as shown.

Copy Code Block

If mass <= 100 Then

bracket_width = 1

ElseIf mass > 100 And mass <= 200 Then

bracket_width = 2


bracket_width = 3


bracket_width = 4Else

Test for Range of Values | 295



bracket_width = 6

End If

With these changes, we check for a range of values in each If or Else

If statement.

3 Click OK to close the Edit Rule dialog box.

Remove the Multi-Value List from the Mass Parameter

As a last step, we modify the User parameter mass, which is currently a

multi-value parameter. We can remove the multi-value characteristic associated

with this parameter by editing the multi-value list.


2 Right-click an empty cell in the mass row, and select Edit Multi-Value

List from the context menu.

3 Select all the values in the Value list, and then click Delete.

4 Click OK to accept the change. Notice that the mass parameter no

longer has a multi-value list to select from.

Test the Modified Rule

1 In the Parameters dialog box, enter a mass value of 75. The width of

the bracket is set to 1 inch.

2 Change the mass to 150. The bracket width is now 2 inches.




(1) mass=75, width=1 in (2) mass=150, width=2 in

Test for Range of Values | 297



3 Experiment further. By changing the mass to 250, the width changes

to 3 inches. When mass is 350, the width of the bracket is 4 inches.

Entering a mass value greater than 400 results in bracket width of 6inches. Verify it by setting the mass to 1500.

4 Change the mass back to 150, then click Done.

5 Save and close bracket.ipt.


Summary

In this tutorial, you learned the following:

Work with Parameters

■ Create numeric, true/false, and text parameters.

■ Create multi-value parameters.

■ Use Key parameters as search filters.

■ Modify parameters.

Work with Rules

■ Create rules.

■ Construct conditional statements.

■ Activate and deactivate features.

■ Control part dimensions using a rule.

■ Modify an existing rule.

To learn more about iLogic, we suggest that you take time to complete the

remaining iLogic tutorials.

Previous (page 294)




The Ribbon

About this tutorial

Become familiar with the ribbon interface.

New UsersCategory


Start a new part file.Tutorial File Used

Perform workflows to draw your attention to key characteristics of the ribbon

interface.

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools,and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.


As you work through a series of basic exercises to become familiar with the

ribbon interface, it is not necessary to reproduce the sample geometry accurately.

Navigation Tips

■ Use Next or Previous at the bottom-left to advance to the next page or return

to the previous one.

Next (page 300)

11

299



Interface Fundamentals

The fundamental characteristic of the new interface is that commands formerly

located on panel bars and toolbars are now located on tabs.

300 | Chapter 11 The Ribbon



Commands formerly found on the various common menus are also located

on the tabs.

Commands formerly found on the File menu are now located on the

Application menu.

Interface Fundamentals | 301



Though the change to tabs is a fundamental change to the interface, other

interface structures remain unchanged.

For example, Autodesk Inventor still uses the browser to represent file

structures.

Autodesk Inventor still uses context menus.

In addition, the actual design and behaviors of features and commands remains

unchanged: Extrude is still Extrude, Create Constraint is still Create Constraint,

and Project Views is still Project Views.


Set the

As mentioned, this tutorial uses a generalized, theoretical workflow to facilitate

your discovery of the interface. The workflow is only a vehicle for learning

and is not meant to be credible from an engineering or design point of view.

This workflow begins with a typical first task: setting the .

If Autodesk Inventor is in a zero-doc state (no files are open), you can access

the command on the tab:


Create a Part

Create a part file with a default template:

1 Click the drop-down arrow next to the New command on the Quick

Access toolbar.

2 Select the Part template (the actual template standard is not important

for this tutorial).





Create a Sketch Geometry

If your default template does not open in sketch mode:

1 Expand the Origin folder in the browser.

2 Select the XY Plane browser node.

3 On the ribbon, click .

Create a Sketch Geometry | 303



Next, draw a rectangle:

4 Click .

5 Approximate the rectangle as shown in the following image.

Notice that tabs are subdivided into panels. For example, the sketch

commands you use for drawing geometry are grouped on the Draw

panel; the panel subdivisions group functionally related commands.


Finish the SketchNotice that the Sketch tab contains a prominent command called Finish

Sketch.




This command provides the same results as the right-click marking menu

option of Finish Sketch, as well as the Return command.

The reason the command is so prominent is to help make it clear at all times

when you are in sketch mode.

For example, before you exit the sketch, select the Environments tab.

Notice that the Finish Sketch command persists on the Environments

tab, and the Sketch tab label is also highlighted.

Finish the Sketch | 305



It is possible to select other tabs at any time in your workflow, but the

persistence of Finish Sketch and the tab highlight help make it clear you

are still in sketch mode.

Click Finish Sketch.


Extrude the Sketch

1 Ensure that the Model tab is the active tab.

2 On the ribbon, click .

3 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box.

4 Click the Undo command, located on the Quick Access toolbar.




5 Press E on the keyboard. Notice that keyboard shortcuts behave the sameas always.

6 Click OK in the Extrude dialog box.


Switch to an Environment

1 Select the Environments tab.


Print

Print is located on the Application menu. Click ➤

Print.

There is no need to print the file. Cancel the Print dialog box.


Switch to an Environment | 307



Measure

1 Select the Tools tab. The Tools tab contains many of the commands

formerly found on the Tools menu.

2 Select the Distance command, located in the Measure panel.

3 Press Esc to close the command.


Save1 Click the Save command, located on the Quick Access Toolbar.




2 Use the default file name.

Leave the part open.

Create an Assembly

With many workflows and procedures within Autodesk Inventor, there is

often more than one method available to reach a given result. This

characteristic also applies to file creation. As an alternative to the New

command on the Quick Access Toolbar, you can access the file templates from

the Application menu. You can also use the Quick Launch command in theOpen dialog box.

Click to expand the Application menu, then click the arrow next

to New to expand the submenu.

Create an Assembly | 309



Select Assembly to use the default template.

Notice that if you select New directly from the Application menu, the New

File dialog box opens.




If you click the arrow next to New, the New submenu expands. Alternatively,

the New submenu expands automatically after a short delay as you pause the

cursor over the New parent menu.


Place Occurrences

1 Click the Place command, located in the Component panel of the

Assemble tab.

2 Select the part file you created.

3 Place two occurrences.

Place Occurrences | 311




Add Command to Quick Access Toolbar

In this next exercise, you create a shortcut.

1 Select the Manage tab.

2 Right-click the command, and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.




Use File Tabs and Edit the Part

1 Select the Part(#).ipt file tab, located at the bottom of the graphics

window.

2 On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the down arrow to the right of As

Material to display the drop-down Color menu. Select a new color for

the part.


Increase Screen Space

The ribbon is designed to provide more available graphic space for your models.

1 Click the Minimize button once. The panels reduce to panel buttons.

Use File Tabs and Edit the Part | 313



2 Pause the cursor over a panel to display the commands on that panel.




3 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tab and panel titles.

4 Click the Minimize button again to reduce to the tabs.

5 Click a tab title to reveal the tab.

Increase Screen Space | 315



6 Click the Minimize button again to restore the full ribbon.

As an alternative to cycling through the ribbon states, select a state from the

drop-down menu.

You can also use the Clean Screen command to maximize model space

instantly.

1 Select the View tab.




2 Click Clean Screen.

This command hides the browser and maximizes the graphics area to theapplication window. Tab panels are minimized if they were in a maximized

state. The command also maximizes the Autodesk Inventor window to your

screen.

You can also use the keyboard shortcut: press Ctrl 0 (zero) to switch from

Clean Screen display. The browser is restored and the tabs are also restored to

whatever state they were in previously.

Click the Minimize button, as needed, to restore the tabs to their full display.

Increase Screen Space | 317



Create Constraint

1 Select the Assemble tab.

2 Click the Constrain command.




You can create a constraint but is not necessary for the workflow.


Create Drawing Views

1 Click the New command.

2 Open the Standard.idw template.

3 Right-click the drawing sheet, and select Base View.

4 Click OK to place the view.

5 When you place the base view the Projected View functionality is

automatically activated. Create one or more projected views.

Create Parts List and Annotation

1 Select the Annotate tab.

2 Click the Parts List command.

Create Drawing Views | 319



3 Select the base view, and place the parts list.

4 Click Auto Balloon, located on the Balloon drop-down menu.

5 Place the balloon.

6 Click the Dimension command and place a dimension.





Customize Tabs

You can move commands you do not use, or commands you use less

frequently, to the drop-down portion of the tab panels.

1 Right-click the Bend command and select Move to Expanded Panel.

Customize Tabs | 321



2 Click the panel title to expand the panel and show the moved command.




3 You can also click the pin icon to pin the panel in the expanded state,

as needed.

Customize Tabs | 323



Create Your Own Tab Panels

You can add commands to a tab.

1 Select the Place Views tab.

2 Right-click anywhere on the tab panels, and select Customize User

Commands.




3 In the dialog box, specify Annotate Tab in the Choose commands

from drop-down menu.

4 Select the command, and then click Add.

Create Your Own Tab Panels | 325



5 Repeat for the and commands.

6 Click OK in the Customize User Commands dialog box.

A User Commands panel containing the commands you specified is added

to the tab you specified.




Right-click the tab and notice the other customize options. Experiment with

these options to tailor the tab to your preferences.


Export Tab Settings to XML

You can save your customized tab settings to an XML file. You can also save

to multiple XML files. For example, you can create one custom configuration

and export it to XML. Then set up another with a different configuration and

export it to another XML file using a different file name.

1 Right-click anywhere on the tab panels, and select Customize User

Commands.

2 Click Export, located at the bottom of the dialog box.

3 In the Save As dialog box, specify a file name, and then click Save.

The XML file is created in the default Preferences directory.

Click Close in the Customize User Commands dialog box.

To retrieve and apply settings contained in a customization XML file:

1 Click Import in the Customize User Commands dialog box.

2 Select one of the user-defined XML files.

3 Click Open.

If you click Apply or OK the customization file is applied to the ribbon.

Close the Customize User Commands dialog box.


Using Access Points through the Browser

As noted earlier, to access the various environments in Autodesk Inventor,

you use the Environments tab. You also use the Finish command to exit

environments, as well as to exit sketches.

However, access methods to some functionality are the same as found in

releases previous to the ribbon interface.

You access Construction and Base Solid edit functionality through the browser.

Export Tab Settings to XML | 327



For Construction functionality:

1 Select the part file tab at the bottom of the graphics window to switchto that document.

2 Select the Model tab.

3 Click the Thicken/Offset command.

4 Create an offset surface.

5 Right-click the surface in the browser, and select Copy to Construction.

6 Right-click the newly created Construction node in the browser and

select Edit Construction.

For Base Solid edit functionality:

1 Open a common data format file, such as IGS or STP, that contains solid

geometry.

2 Right-click the Base node in the browser and select Edit Solid.





Summary

The purpose of this tutorial was to help maximize your productivity within

the new interface, as quickly as possible. In this tutorial, you learned how to:

■ Find commands and command groupings within the tab structure.

■ Access and exit environments and sketches.

■ Access commands on the Application menu.

■ Use the Quick Access Toolbar.

■ Increase model space.

■ Customize the ribbon.

Summary | 329



In addition to this tutorial, there are a couple other ribbon-related Help items:

■ Ribbon Introduction, a video overview of the ribbon interface.

■ Command Locator, an interactive guide that compares command locations

in previous releases to their new locations in the ribbon.

You can access both items from:

■ The Get Started tab.

■ The main Help drop-down menu on the application window.

■ The Help home page.

Previous (page 327)




Content Center

About this tutorial

Access libraries of standard parts in the Content Center.

New UsersCategory


Start a new assembly file (metric)

Housing.ipt

Tutorial File Used




as instructed.

Autodesk Inventor Content Center libraries provide thousands of standard parts

(fasteners, steel shapes, shaft parts, and so on). These libraries are accessed in

Content Center. Explore the Content Center functionality to utilize standard

parts in your designs.

The examples in this tutorial use content based on two different standards. If

your Content Center configuration does not contain the corresponding standard

libraries, read along without performing the steps. Or use a similar part from a

different library. For example, if the tutorial calls for a screw from the ANSI

standard and your library contains only ISO parts, substitute a similar screw

from your ISO library.

12

331







Prerequisites

■ Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.

■ Understand the interface.

■ Understand projects in Autodesk Inventor.

■ See the Help or “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 332)

Review Content Center ConfigurationTo begin, set your active project to tutorial_files. Then verify that Content

Center libraries are configured correctly in the project.

1 Click ➤

Manage

➤

Projects.

2 On the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in

the projects list to set it as the active project.

3 Click Configure Content Center Libraries.

The Configure Libraries dialog box displays a list of Content Center

libraries in your library storage location.4 Review the list to confirm that libraries are available in the project

configuration.

NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one (non-empty) Content Center

library must be available for use. A library is available if it has the In Use

option selected and a Read-Only or Read/Write status in the Access

column.

TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. See

Help for more details, or contact your CAD Administrator.

5 Click OK in the Configure Libraries dialog box, and then click Done in

the Projects dialog box.


332 | Chapter 12 Content Center



Place from Content Center Dialog Box

1 Create a blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam template.


Component panel ➤

Place

from Content Center.

The Place from Content Center dialog box displays.

3 Switch on the following:

■ Search

■ Favorites

■ AutoDrop

■ Tree View

■ Table View

TIP Some buttons may already be selected. Click them to make sure they

are switched on.

The Place from Content Center dialog box is the main interface for a

Content Center consumer. You can find, select, and place a standard part or

feature to an assembly. The dialog box presents a merged view of content

contained in all configured libraries.

Place from Content Center Dialog Box | 333



The Place from Content Center dialog box displays several panels:

■ Category View panel on the left displays a tree structure of the current

Content Center database.

■ List View panel on the right displays all items available in a category

(folder) selected on the Category View panel.

■ Table View panel displays all members of a part (feature) family selected

on the List View panel.

■ Search panel enables you to find components in libraries.

■ Favorites panel stores your favorite parts.

■ History panel displays previously placed components.





Browse in Content Center Library

Use the Content Center browser to locate the Forged Socket Head Cap

Screw - Metric family.

1 In the Category View panel, expand the Fasteners ➤

Bolts category,

and click the Socket Head category. A list of part families included in

the Socket Head category displays in the List View panel on the right.

Families are sorted alphabetically.

2 In the List View panel, locate and click the Forged Socket Head Cap

Screw - Metric family. Members of the family are displayed in the

Table View panel.


Place Content Manually

Two methods are available for placing Content Center components: AutoDrop

and manual placement. If you select AutoDrop on the toolbar, AutoDrop is

the primary and manual placement is the alternate placement method. The

primary method is available when you double-click a family in the Place from

Content Center dialog box. Alternatively, you can select a family and click

OK. To use the alternate placement method for the family, hold down the

Alt key, and double-click a part family.

Browse in Content Center Library | 335



TIP To use manual placement as the primary method, unselect AutoDrop on

the toolbar.

To place a part manually by using the Table View:

1 In the Table View, click row 95 to select the family member (a screw

with M6 thread type, 30-mm nominal length).

2 Click OK to place the selected part in the assembly. The manual

placement method is automatically used because the family member to

place is already determined.

3 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish the

command.

4 Review the placed part in the assembly and in the browser.


Create iMatesThe components that are supplied in the Content Center libraries include

iMates to make placement easier. Find the name of the insert iMate for the

previously placed cap screw. Then open Housing.ipt and edit it to create an

iMate with the same name.

1 In the browser, right-click the previously placed cap screw, and then

select Expand All Children. Make a note of the name of the insert

iMate, Insert In1.

2 Right-click the cap screw, and click Delete to delete it from the assembly.

3 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab

➤

Component panel

➤

Place,

and place one occurrence of the part Housing.ipt in the assembly.




4 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate


5 Right-click the Housing part in the browser, and click Edit.

6 Click Manage tab ➤

Author panel ➤

iMate to activate the Create

iMate command.

7 In the Create iMate dialog box, click Insert , and then select

the circular edge, as shown on the following image.

Create iMates | 337



8 Click the More button (>>) to expand the dialog box, and then type

Insert In1 in the Name field.

9 Click OK. The iMate is created in the part.

10 Click the Return command to return to the parent assembly.


Place Content Manually Using iMates


➤

Component panel ➤

Place


2 Click History on the toolbar.

The History panel displays. It includes the previously placed Forged

Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric part family.




3 Right-click the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw - Metric family, and

select Navigate to Category. The family displays and selected in the

List View.

4 Switch off the Table View panel.

5 Hold down the Alt key, and double-click the Forged Socket Head

Cap Screw - Metric family to place a member of the family in the

assembly.

6 In the Family dialog box, select the same family member as you placed

previously: select M6 from the Thread Description list, and then

select 30 from the Nominal Length list.

7 Select Use iMate, and then click OK.

The selected cap screw previews in place (honoring the specified Insert

iMate).

8 Click anywhere in the graphics window to place the cap screw.

Place Content Manually Using iMates | 339



9 Right-click, and select Done.


Use AutoDrop

AutoDrop enhances placement techniques with functional design automation.

It automatically checks geometry for placement and sizing based on the

content family characteristics.

Place head cap screws to the remaining mounting holes of the Housing part

by using AutoDrop.


Component panel ➤

Place


2 Use Search to find available head cap screws:

■ Insert the Head Cap Screw string in the Search For box of theQuick Search panel.




■ Click Search Now.

3 On the Search Results panel, locate the DIN 6912 cylinder headcap screw. Right-click it, and select Navigate to Category. The family

displays and selected in the List View.

4 Double-click the DIN 6912 family. The graphics window with the

assembly displays.

5 Position your cursor over an empty mounting hole as shown:

6 Click to display the AutoDrop toolbar.

AutoDrop determines that multiple placements of a selected component

would be desired. Notice that the circular top edge of each of the other

mounting holes highlights to indicate where AutoDrop places additional

components.

NOTE The Insert Multiple option on the toolbar controls how multiple

components are placed.

Use AutoDrop | 341



7 Drag the red arrow on the screw preview to change the nominal length

of the screw to 30 mm.

NOTE When you drag the red arrow, a tooltip shows the entire size of the

component.

8 Select Apply on the AutoDrop toolbar to place three cylinder head cap

screws.

9 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to finish the

command.





Resize Standard Content1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click the Forged Socket Head

Cap Screw - Metric part, and then select Change Size. The family

dialog box displays.

2 Select 45 from the Nominal Length list, and click OK. The selected

cap screw resizes to the new length.

Resize Standard Content | 343




Replace Standard Content

1 In the graphics window or browser, right-click one of the occurrences

of the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw, and then select Replace

from Content Center. The Replace from Content Center dialog box

displays, and the DIN 6912 cylinder head cap screw is selected.

2 On the List View panel, select the Forged Socket Head Cap Screw

- Metric located in the same category, and click OK.

3 In the family dialog box, select M6 from the Thread Description list,

and select 45 from the Nominal Length list.

4 Select Replace All to replace all occurrences of the DIN 6912 cylinder

head cap screw.




5 Click OK on the family dialog box. Then click OK on the message box.

All occurrences of the selected screw are replaced.


Summary

Summary | 345




■ Review the library configuration in the project.

■ Work with the Place from Content Center dialog box.

■ Find a part family by using the Content Center browser, Search, and

History.

■ Select a family member (part) and place it in an assembly.

■ Use iMates to place a part from Content Center.

■ Place a Content Center part by using AutoDrop.

■ Change the size of a placed Content Center part.

■ Replace a part with another part from the Content Center library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information.

What Next? Use a procedure from this tutorial to place a bearing in theassembly. Read more about Content Center in Help. Continue with the

Content Center User Libraries tutorial.

Previous (page 344)




Sketch Blocks

About this tutorial

Define sketch blocks and use them in assemblies.

New UsersCategory


Car Seat Sketch Blocks.iptTutorial File Used

13

347







Define sketch blocks to capture geometric configurations as a fixed set, and

place instances of the set into an assembly layout.

In many assembly designs, geometric configurations are repeated. For example,

you can group 2D sketch geometry into a sketch block that represents a car

seat screw assembly. You can place instances of the block into your assembly

layout. The instances are defined in the sketch block. Any changes to the block

design are automatically reflected by the instances.

You could create nested sketch blocks to represent the car screw assembly and

place flexible instances of these blocks into your layout. These flexible instances

retain specified degrees of freedom that allow them to simulate the kinematicsof the screw assembly.

You start this tutorial in an existing part with 2D sketch geometry.

Objectives

■ Create, edit, and format sketch blocks.

■ Demonstrate kinematics with sketch blocks.

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools,

and perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and extruding.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 348)

Get Started

Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks in Autodesk Inventor.

1 Click ➤

Open.

348 | Chapter 13 Sketch Blocks







2 Open Car Seat Sketch Blocks.ipt.


Create Sketch Blocks

After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in the

Model browser. Click Sketch1 and you see all geometry in the graphics

Create Sketch Blocks | 349



window highlighted. You can use one 2D sketch to create all your geometry

then group the appropriate geometry into sketch blocks.

1 Use navigation commands, such as View Face and Zoom Window,

to position the sketch geometry in the graphics window as shown.

2 Double-click Sketch1 in the Model browser.

3 Window-select the lowermost geometry, and click Create Block

in the Layout Panel on the Sketch tab.

NOTE You can pre-select geometry and activate the Create Block command,

or you can activate the command and select geometry.

4 For Block Name, enter Worm Gear Assy. You can also define the insert

point and add a description. The insert point is where the sketch block

is attached to the cursor when block instances are placed.

5 Click OK. The sketch block is created.

6 Expand Sketch1 in the Model browser. Pause the cursor over the sketch

block instance , Worm Gear Assy:1. The associated sketch

geometry highlights in the graphics window.

Create Block creates a sketch block definition in the Blocks folder

and replaces the original 2D sketch geometry with an instance of

the block. Expand the Blocks folder to view the Worm Gear Assy

block definition node.




7 You can create multiple sketch blocks without closing the Create Block

dialog box. Click Create Block on the Sketch tab, and select the

geometry shown. Enter Connecting Rod as the Name, and click Apply.The block is created, and the dialog box awaits selection of geometry for

the next block.

8 Select the geometry shown, and create the Link Plate sketch block.

9 Select the geometry shown, and create the Pivot Plate sketch block.

Create Sketch Blocks | 351



10 Exit the sketch, and save your file.


Edit Sketch Blocks

You edit sketch block definitions either in-context or out-of-context. The

benefit of the in-context edit is the ability to add existing active sketch

geometry or blocks to the block definition. With both methods, you can add

new sketch geometry to the block. Regardless of how the sketch block

definition is edited, the changes are propagated to all instances of the block.

NOTE You cannot edit a sketch block instance independent of the block definition.

1 Open Sketch1 for edit.

2 Create a rectangle that intersects the Worm Gear Assy geometry.




3 Exit the sketch.

4 Expand the Blocks folder, and double-click the Worm Gear Assy

definition. The block definition opens for edit in the graphics window,

but the newly created rectangle geometry is absent. It is because the edit

is out-of-context of the sketch. You can make new geometry to add, but

geometry that exists outside the block definition is not available.

5 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block.


7 Double-click block instance Worm Gear Assy:1, or right-click on the

instance and select Edit Block. It opens the Worm Gear Assy block

definition for edit in the context of Sketch1. The newly created rectangle

geometry is exposed to the block definition.

8 Select the rectangle geometry you created. Hold down the Ctrl key, and

click the four lines of the rectangle. When all four lines are selected,

right-click and select Add To Block.

NOTE If you had created new geometry during the block edit, the new

geometry is automatically added to the block definition.


NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Sketch1 browser node to

finish editing the block and return to the sketch.

10 To illustrate that the block definition has changed, drag and drop the

Worm Gear Assy block definition (from the Blocks folder) into the

graphics window.

Worm Gear Assy:2, another instance of Worm Gear Assy, is created

showing the rectangle geometry you added when you edited the block

definition in-context.

Edit Sketch Blocks | 353



11 Exit Sketch1.

12 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition under Blocks. It

opens the Worm Gear Assy block definition out-of context.

13 Delete the rectangle geometry you previously added.

14 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. Both instances of Worm

Gear Assy are updated to show the geometry was removed.





Format Sketch Blocks

You can apply specific geometric properties to sketch block definitions and

instances. The geometric properties active in a sketch block definition are the

default properties for the instances. However, as with other sketch geometry,you can override the default format for the sketch block instances. Use this

functionality to differentiate between specific instances in your sketch.

1 Right-click the Worm Gear Assy block definition in the Blocks folder,

and select Properties.

2 Select Magenta for Line Color, and click OK. Both Worm Gear Assy

instances turn magenta to reflect the new default format.

Format Sketch Blocks | 355



3 Now, override the default format. Right-click the Worm Gear Assy:1

instance, and select Properties.

4 Select Blue for Line Color and click OK, then click in the graphics

window to clear the selection. The instance is now blue.




5 In a similar manner, change the color of the Worm Gear Assy:2

instance to red.

Format Sketch Blocks | 357



6 Open Sketch1.


Format panel ➤

Sketch

Properties .

8 On the Sketch Properties toolbar, click the Formatting Toggle

to switch between the default format associated with the block definition

and the user format you applied. The default format displays when the

toggle is selected.

9 Delete the Worm Gear Assy:2 instance.

10 Reset the geometric properties Line Color for the Worm Gear Assy

block definition and Worm Gear Assy:1 instance to Default.

You can also update your block properties to change the Insert Pointlocation, visibility, block name, and description. As with other block

edits, any changes are made to the block definition and reflected in all

block instances.

11 Double-click the Connecting Rod:1 instance.

12 Click in the graphics window to ensure that no geometry is selected.

13 With no geometry selected, right-click in open space in the graphics

window, and select Block Properties.

14 Click Select, and redefine the Insert Point. The Insert Point simply

defines the attachment point between the cursor and block instance,

when the instance is placed into the sketch.




15 Change the name to Rod.

16 Click OK. The block definition name changes to Rod and the instance

name changes to Rod:1.

17 Use the Block Properties to change the name back to Connecting

Rod.18 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block.



19 Exit the sketch and save your file.


Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks

When you select block instances for inclusion in a new sketch block, you

create a nested block. You use sketch constraints, within the nested blocks,

and the Flexible attribute to simulate kinematic subassemblies.


2 Select the Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 block instances.

Nested Flexible Sketch Blocks | 359



3 Click Create Block.

4 Enter Screw Rod Assy as the block name.

5 Click OK. A new block definition Screw Rod Assy is created. Expand

the block definition to view the nested structure.

6 Expand the Screw Rod Assy:1 block instance in Sketch1. The Worm

Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 instances are dependents of the

Screw Rod Assy block.

NOTE When the Screw Rod Assy nested block is defined, the original

instances Worm Gear Assy:1 and Connecting Rod:1 are deleted. New

instances Worm Gear Assy:2 and Connecting Rod:2 are created as

dependents in the nested block.

7 Drag and drop the Screw Rod Assy block definition (from the Blocks

folder) into the graphics window. The Screw Rod Assy:2 instance is

created.




8 Double-click either Screw Rod Assy instance in the Model browser.

The block definition is open for in-context edit. All other geometry is

shaded to gray.




9 Double-click the Worm Gear Assy:2 block instance, either in the Model

browser or in the graphics window.

10 Create a centerline down the axis of the Worm Gear Assy, as shown.

Ensure that the centerline endpoints are constrained to the Worm Gear

Assy geometry. This centerline will participate in a collinear constraint

with the centerline of the Connecting Rod.

NOTE Both instances of the Worm Gear Assy update to show the

centerline.




11 Right-click, and select Finish Edit Block. You are returned to the edit

of the Screw Rod Assy block.

NOTE Alternatively, you can double-click the Screw Rod Assy block

instance node to finish the edit of the Worm Gear Assy block. This returns

you to the edit of the Screw Rod Assy block.

12 Apply the collinear constraint between the Worm Gear Assy and

Connecting Rod centerlines.

13 Right-click, and select Show All Constraints. The collinear constraint

glyphs are shown for both Screw Rod Assy instances.




14 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints.

15 Click the Connecting Rod geometry in the graphics window and drag.

The sketch block instances begin to demonstrate basic kinematics due

to the collinear constraint.







Use sketch constraints between nested blocks to represent your assembly.

17 Select Screw Rod Assy:2, and use Rotate on the Sketch tab to rotate

as shown.




18 Apply the Coincident constraint to the block instances as

shown.

19 Click the corner geometry of either block instance in the graphics window

and drag.




Since the block instances are constrained at the sketch level, you can

move the block instances relative to one another. However, the geometry

within the block instances shows no relative motion. To manipulate the

block instance degrees of freedom outside of the block instances, you

toggle the block instance to Flexible.20 Right-click each Screw Rod Assy instance, and check Flexible.

21 Click different sections of the block instance geometry, and drag to see

the effect.

22 Experiment with different constraints, both within the block instances

and at the sketch level, and note how you can simulate different

kinematics. You begin to see the power behind nested and flexible sketch

blocks.

23 Exit the sketch and drag the geometry. With the block instances toggled

to Flexible, the degrees of freedom remain exposed at the part level.

24 Save your part file and exit. The tutorial is complete.


Summary

In this tutorial, you:

■ Created sketch blocks.

■ Edited sketch blocks.

■ Created nested, flexible sketch blocks, and simulated 2D kinematics.

For further use of sketch blocks, visit the Top-down Workflow tutorial.

This tutorial demonstrates the use of sketch blocks in the top-down design

workflow. Remember to check Help for further details on sketch blocks.

Summary | 367



Previous (page 359)




Parameters

About this tutorial

Create table-driven models.

Experienced UsersCategory


Start a new Excel spreadsheet

nozzle.ipt

Tutorial File Used

14

369







Create an external table of parameters. Then link it to an existing part file to

make the part a parametric table-driven model.

Objectives

■ Create a table.

■ Link a table to an existing part.

■ Assign parameters to existing dimensions.

■ Resize the part by changing one value.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the and navigate the model space with the various view

commands.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 370)

Work with TablesThe table you create in this tutorial is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing

11 parameters that control the size and shape of the part.

Ten of the parameters are equations. The radius of the nozzle base is an

absolute value. Changing the radius of the nozzle base updates all other

parameters.

370 | Chapter 14 Parameters







NOTE You must have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete this

tutorial.


Create the External Table

1 Open Microsoft Excel.

2 Enter these values and equations in the first two columns:

NOTE To enter an equation in a cell, start the entry with the = character.

B A

10base1

=B1*2.7ht2

=B1*0.6lip3

=B1*2.4 face4

Create the External Table | 371



=B1tdepth5

=B1*0.6tarc6

=B1*0.6tfix7


Finish the Table

1 Add the following values to control your part features:

B A

=B1*0.2chamfer 8

=B1*1.2extrude19

=B1*0.6extrude210




=B1*0.6holedia11


Review Parameter Assignment Process

Before you link this spreadsheet to an existing part, review the steps you taketo control the part using parameters:

1 Open an existing part file.

2 Link an external table.

3 Assign parameters to existing dimensions.

4 Modify the value of one parameter.

5 Update the part.

Review Parameter Assignment Process | 373




Open a Part

1 Switch to the Autodesk Inventor window. (If you have not started a

session yet, do so now.)

2 Click ➤

Open.

3 Open nozzle.ipt.





Work with Parameters

Nozzle.ipt is just like any other part in that it is defined by parameters.

Parameters are values assigned to elements you create. As you sketch and build

features, Autodesk Inventor automatically assigns parameters to the values

controlling the elements.


Parameters panel

➤

Parameters to open the Parameters dialog box.

2 Review the list of model parameters already assigned to the part.

Work with Parameters | 375



■ Whenever you dimension an element or define a feature, Autodesk Inventor

assigns a parameter name to that value.

■ Each parameter in your model is prefixed by the letter d. You can edit any

parameter, however, d is reserved for parameter names. To avoid conflicts,

do not use this prefix when defining parameters in an external table.




■ To edit a parameter name or equation, click in the cell you want to change.

■ Use the same method to add comments.


Link Your External Table

1 Click Link in the Parameters dialog box.

2 Select the nozzle.xls file you created.

3 Click Open.

The program imports the external table into the Parameters dialog box.

Link Your External Table | 377



4 Review your parameter names and values.

5 Click Done when you are ready.





Prepare to Assign Parameters

Now you are ready to assign the parameters to your part. First, let’s review the

steps:

1 Assign parameters to the dimensions controlling the sketch.

2 Assign parameters to the values controlling the part features.

NOTE The numbers in the following image correspond to the rows in your

spreadsheet.


Modify Your Sketch Dimensions

First, modify the sketch dimensions:

1 Double-click Sketch1 in the browser to switch to Sketch mode.

Prepare to Assign Parameters | 379



2 Right-click in the graphics window, and then select Dimension

Display ➤

Expression.

3 Double-click the 10-mm horizontal dimension at the base of the sketch.

4 Enter base in the Edit Dimension dialog box.

5 Replace the other dimensions with spreadsheet driven parameters as

shown.

NOTE Parameter names are case sensitive. Invalid parameter names are

displayed in red text.





➤

Exit panel➤

Finish Sketch.


Modify the Two Extrusions

Modify the values controlling the two extrusions.

1 In the browser, right-click Extrusion1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Two Extrusions | 381



2 In the Extrude dialog box, change 12 mm to extrude1.

3 Click OK to accept your changes.

4 Repeat these steps for Extrusion2, replacing 6 mm with extrude2.





Modify the Chamfer Feature

Next, modify the value controlling the chamfer feature.

1 Right-click Chamfer1, and then select Edit Feature.

Modify the Chamfer Feature | 383



2 In the Chamfer dialog box, change 2 mm to chamfer.


NOTE The size of the part has not changed yet because the parameters in

your spreadsheet have the same values as the original parameters.


Modify the Hole Feature

Finally, modify the value controlling the hole feature.

1 Right-click Hole1, and then select Edit Feature.




2 In the Diameter field of the Holes dialog box, change 6 mm to

holedia.


4 Click Save.


Control Your Part with Parameters

Now that all the values that define the shape and size of the part have assigned

parameters, you are ready to control the size of your part from the external

table.

1 Return to the Microsoft Excel window.

2 Change the value of base to 20.

3 Save nozzle.xls.

4 Return to the Autodesk Inventor window.

Control Your Part with Parameters | 385




Update Your Part

To view the new part version, update the part file.

1 Click Update.

Autodesk Inventor recalculates the part using the values in the external

table.

2 Save the part.


Summary

Using a simple symmetrical part, you learned how to:

■ Create an external table.

■ Edit existing dimensions.

■ Modify an external table.

■ Control part versions.




Using these techniques, you can create your own parametric, table-driven

models.

Previous (page 386)

Summary | 387



388



iLogic - Part Modeling

About this tutorial

Add rules to models.



15

389



Manifold_Block_no_rules.iptTutorial File Used





This tutorial expands upon the information presented in the iLogic Basicstutorial. iLogic helps you write rules that can drive the parameters, features,

attributes, iProperties, and other elements in an Autodesk Inventor model.

The rules are stored within the part or assembly document.

iLogic rules are written in a language that is a slightly modified version of

Visual Basic .Net (VB.Net). The language is easy to learn, including the more

advanced features that are also available.

In the following lessons, you add rules to a parametric part.

Objectives

■ Use the parameter interface

■ Add a rule

■ Write a rule

■ Run a rule

■ Edit a rule

■ Use the Rule Browser to reorder rules

■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet

■ Set feature and component activity

Prerequisites

■ Familiarity with Autodesk Inventor, and its basic part modeling

functionality and concepts.

■ Completion of the iLogic Basics tutorial.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 391)

390 | Chapter 15 iLogic - Part Modeling







Introduction to the Sample Model

The model that you work with throughout this tutorial is a simple manifold

block. The block contains a set of three available ports referenced as A, B, and

C. Each port is on a different side of the block. A port consists of a center hole

(of variable size), and a set of surrounding threaded bolt holes. The holes are

used to mount union caps in a later tutorial.

This manifold block can be either a tee style block, which has all three ports,

or an elbow style block with only two ports. Also, the block can be either a

standard block or a custom block. On a standard block, which can be ordered

off the shelf, all ports are the same size. A custom block, which must be

manufactured, can feature a different size for each port.

Finally, the part contains an embedded Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, which is

used to specify the values for various parameters as the port sizes are changed.You begin by adding additional parameters to the model to support the rules

you write later.


Open a Part Document

1 Set your active project to iLogic 2011 Tutorials. This setting provides

easier access to the necessary files, and supports the work in the next

tutorial.

2 Open manifold_block_no_rules.ipt. You add model rules to this

part throughout the tutorial.

3 Save this file as manifold_block.ipt.

You now have the manifold_block.ipt file open.

Introduction to the Sample Model | 391




Create Port Size Parameters

First, we need a set of parameters to control the size of three ports on our

manifold block.

Most of the parameters have been named in the parameter editor already. It

is good practice to name your parameters for future reference when creating

a parametric design. Parameters with meaningful names make the rules that

drive or reference them easier to read and understand.


➤

Parameters panel

➤

Parameters.

NOTE Parameter names in iLogic are case sensitive. Follow the case being

used in the Parameters dialog box, and also when creating rules.




2 Create a new numeric parameter named port_a_size. Set the Unit

value to in, and enter an initial Equation value of 0.50. Define it as a

multi-value parameter with the following values:

0.5

0.75

1.00

1.25

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

NOTE For more details on the exact steps needed to create a parameter,

please revisit the iLogic Basics tutorial. Remember that you can cut and paste

the values from the previous table to set the values for the multi-value list.

3 Make port_a_size a Key parameter.

4 Create two more parameters, named port_b_size and port_c_size,

with the same settings and multi-value list. Set both as Key parameters.


Create Block and Component Type Parameters

Now, we must create two more parameters that control the type of block being

modeled. One parameter determines whether the block is a tee or elbow design.

Create Block and Component Type Parameters | 393



The other parameter defines whether we are creating a standard or a custom

block.

1 Create a text parameter named block, and define it as a multi-value

parameter with the following values:

tee

elbow

2 In the Equation field of this new parameter, set the current value to

tee, and define it as a Key parameter.

3 Create a second text parameter named component_type, and define it

a multi-value parameter with the following values:

standard

custom

4 Set the current value to standard, and define it as a Key parameter.

5 Click Done to exit the Parameters dialog box.

6 Save your document, but do not close it.


Define a Model Rule to Control Port VisibilityIn the iLogic Basics tutorial, you learned that you can use parameter names

from a model as variables in a rule. Also, you can select from lists of available

parameters, as well as features and other model entities, for inclusion in a rule.

Now, we define a set of rules that drive the geometry of our model based on

the values of the key parameters we defined previously. In this lesson, we

construct each rule in segments. The entire text of all the rules can be found

at the end of this tutorial.




The first rule makes model changes to the Port B features, based on whether

the elbow or tee block is selected. To make this change, suppress or enable

the Port B features based on the type of block.


iLogic panel ➤

Add

Rule.

2 Name the rule block_shape_rule, and click OK to display the Edit

Rule dialog box.

3 In the text area, create the first part of your new rule, which defines what

happens if the block is a tee-style block.

Copy Code Block

If block = “tee” Then

4 Because all three ports are active in the tee-style block, add the steps to

ensure that Port B is enabled. Activate two features in the part.

Copy Code Block

Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = True

Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = True

NOTE The Feature.IsActive function is available for selection in the

Snippets area of the Edit Rule dialog box. Click the System tab, then

expand the Features node.

We have now defined the behavior of our model for a tee block.

5 To define the model behavior for an elbow block, begin with an ElseIf

statement.

Define a Model Rule to Control Port Visibility | 395



Copy Code Block

ElseIf block = "elbow" Then

6 To suppress the Port B features when creating an elbow block, use the

features we created for the tee block, but with opposite values.

Copy Code Block

Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = False

Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = False

A simple way to add these lines is to copy and paste the text for the tee

block behavior. Then change True to False in the new lines.

7 Complete the If block of your rule with an End If statement.

That’s it! All the instructions necessary to enable or disable the Port B

features based on the type of block being used are included.

8 Click OK to save the completed rule.


Test the Block Shape Rule

To verify that this rule is really in control of our model:

1 Observe the current state of the model.




2 Open Parameters dialog box.

3 In the block row, change tee to elbow using the multi-value drop-down

menu in the Equation cell. Port B has been suppressed.

4 Change the block parameter back to tee, and close the Parameters

dialog box.

Test the Block Shape Rule | 397




Manage Part Configurations

We now cover the last two topics listed in the beginning of this tutorial:

■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet.

■ Set feature and component activity.

iLogic provides built-in functions that read information from Excel

spreadsheets. These functions are available in the Snippets area, on the

System tab, by expanding the Excel Data Links node.

In this lesson, we write a rule that uses values from an embedded Excel

spreadsheet to set the values for parameters that control the port geometry,

based on a specified size. Our rule looks up the port size in the spreadsheet to

identify the row of values. Then it reads fields from that row to get the

appropriate parameter values.

A tee-style block includes three ports. Each port is listed in the Parameters

dialog box. However, changing the port size in the Parameters dialog box does




not change the port size in our model. We must add rules to drive the different

port sizes.

Our first step is to add a rule that sets the size of the ports and the dimensions

of the screw pattern around each port. The screw pattern is used in the

assembly to hold a flange onto the block.

1 In the Autodesk Inventor model browser, expand the 3rd Party node

in the tree.

2 Right-click on Embedding 1, and select Edit to access the embedded

spreadsheet.

3 Add a rule named port_size_rule, and click OK to open the Edit Rule

dialog box.

The first thing our rule must do is locate the row in the spreadsheet that

contains the values to use for Port A. We look up the value matching

the port_a_size parameter in a column labeled port_size.

4 In the Snippets area of the dialog box, on the System tab, locate the

function labeled FindRow (embedded) in the Excel Data Links

node. Double-click the function to insert it into the text area.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow(“3rd Party:Embedding 1”, “Sheet1”,

“columnName”, “<=”, 0.2)

5 Once you inserted this function template into your rule, replace the first

occurrence of columnName with port_size, the first occurrence of “<=” with “=”, and 0.2 with port_a_size.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1",

"port_size", "=", port_a_size)

This code indicates that we want to find the row in the embedded

spreadsheet that has a port_size column that equals the value of the

port_a_size parameter.

Manage Part Configurations | 399



6 Add a series of parameters based on the values of cells from this row in

the spreadsheet. These parameters control the port diameter, drill depth,

and the distance between the bolt holes. Use the function labeledCurrentRowValue in the Excel Data Links node of the Snippets

area.

Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("columnName")

Edit your copies of the snippet as shown here.

Copy Code Block

port_a_y_dist_between_screw =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")

port_a_x_dist_between_screw =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_between_screw")

port_a_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")

Port_A_Drill_Depth =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")

NOTE Remember that you can select items in the Model tab of the Edit

Rule dialog box to display various sets of Model parameters.

7 To define the thread of the tapped holes, insert the feature labeled

ThreadDesignation in the Features node of the Snippets area.

Copy Code Block

Feature.ThreadDesignation("featurename") = “3/8-16 UNC”




Modify the text as shown here.

Copy Code Block

Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_A_Threads") =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_dim")

We have indicated that we should use the tap_dim cell to get the thread

designation for the bolt holes.

8 Now that the instructions are complete for the Port A parameters, create

the instructions for Port B and Port C. Copy the rule text you have

created, and paste it twice. In the first copy you paste, change port_a

references to port_b. In the second copy you paste, change port_areferences to port_c. You should now have three blocks of code, each

related to one of the three ports.

Manage Part Configurations | 401



Copy Code Block








Port_A_Drill_Depth =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("tap_drill_depth")







"port_size", "=", port_b_size)port_b_y_dist_between_screw =


port_b_x_dist_between_screw =


port_b_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")

Port_B_Drill_Depth =


Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_B_Threads") =



"port_size", "=", port_c_size)

port_c_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")

port_c_x_dist_between_screw =


port_c_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")

Port_C_Drill_Depth =


Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_C_Threads") =


9 Click OK in the iLogic rule editor to save your port_size_rule. Your

model may or may not update depending upon how the iLogic port size

parameters were initially set.


Test the Port Size Rule

To view how the new rule updates the model when parameter values are

changed:


2 Change port_a_size to 1.50 by selecting that value from the multi-value

list.

Notice how the model changes when the value equals 1.50.

Test the Port Size Rule | 403



Clearly, we have some more work to do to force other aspects of the

model (its size) to update according to the selected port size.


Create Block Size RuleNow that we can change the size of each port, we must determine which face

has the largest port, so that the block can be sized appropriately. It requires

another rule.

1 Add a new rule named block_size_rule.

To determine the largest port, we examine the values of the three port

size parameters, and retain the largest value. As with block_shape_rule,

the behavior for tee-style blocks must be different than for elbow-style

blocks.

For tee-style blocks, all three ports are used, so we check the sizes for all

them. For elbow-style blocks, we do not check Port B, which is

suppressed. We use the MaxOfMany function to get the largest valuefrom a set of input values.




2 Begin block_size_rule as shown, by typing it directly into the text area

or by inserting from the available generic statements on the toolbar. To

insert the MaxOfMany function, expand the Math node in the Snippetsarea, and double-click MaxOfMany.

Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Then

port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_b_size,port_c_size)


port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_c_size)

End If

A new local variable named port holds the size of the largest available

port. Now we have to tell the model what to do with this information.

The model obtains its information from an embedded Excel spreadsheet,

so we look at the spreadsheet to update the overall sizes of the model.

3 Press Enter twice to add some whitespace in the rule.

4 As with the rule you created previously, insert a copy of the FindRow

(embedded) function. Modify it to get the values for other parametersfrom the embedded spreadsheet by locating the appropriate row of

information.

Copy Code Block


"port_size", "=", port)

We are using the port_size column for the lookup, and the value of the

assigned variable as the value to look for.

Create Block Size Rule | 405



5 Set model parameters with information from the embedded Excel

spreadsheet, using the found row for the largest port size.

Copy Code Block

block_depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_depth")

port_c_depth_from_front =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_c_depth_from_front")

block_width = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_width")

port_a_hor_offset =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")

port_b_hor_offset =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")

port_c_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue

"hor_offset")

We have now determined which port is the largest, and we are sizing

the top of the block accordingly. Now, we determine the height of the

block by examining the tee and elbow to determine which port size isbigger on the Port A / Port B face.

6 Create another statement that uses another local variable porta to hold

onto this value. Because Port B is not used for elbow-style blocks, the

statement includes different steps depending on this setting.




Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Thenporta = MaxOfMany(port_a_size, port_b_size)

ElseIf block = "elbow"

porta = port_a_size

End If

The MaxOfMany function, is not used for elbow-style blocks, since

only one value must be considered. We can set the variable from that

value.

7 Create another FindRow (embedded) statement to get the height

values of the block from the Excel spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block


"port_size", "=", porta)

8 Use the CurrentRowValue function to set the height of the block.

Copy Code Block

port_a_vert_offset =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")

port_b_vert_offset =


9 Finally, set the value for two additional parameters. The first parameter

sets the block height. The second parameter sets the vertical offset of

Port C.

For this value, we add special logic to insert extra space beyond the

vertical offset used for the other ports. This information is obtained from

another spreadsheet cell. We only do it for elbow-style blocks.

Create Block Size Rule | 407



Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" Then

port_c_vert_offset =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset") +(GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")/4)

Else

port_c_vert_offset =


End If

block_height = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_height")

The block_size rule is complete.

10 Click OK in the Edit Rule dialog box.

11 Change any of the port sizes in the Parameters dialog box, and watch

the model update.


Set the Component Type

Create a rule to ensure that all port sizes are the same. Then, you use this rule

in the next section to demonstrate how rules can be reordered.

1 Create a rule named component_type_rule.

2 Set the sizes for Port B and Port C to be the same as Port A.




Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Then

port_b_size = port_a_size

port_c_size = port_a_size

End If

3 Click OK when you are done to save this rule.


Reorder Rules

Rules can be reordered after they are created. The order of rule execution

sometimes affects the results of these rules. You can alter the order of execution

from the Rule Browser.


iLogic panel ➤

Rule

Browser. The Rules dialog box displays.2 Using the left mouse button, drag and drop the component_type rule

that we created above the block_shape_rule.

3 If the Autodesk InventorUpdate icon is active, click it to update the

model.


Reorder Rules | 409



Change Driving Rule Values


Note the Driving Rule value for the port_b_size and port_c_size

parameters. These values indicate that a driving rule

(component_type_rule) has been defined for these two parameters.

When component_type equals standard, the rule sets these two port

sizes equal to port_a_size, and the values cannot be changed. If you

change component_type to custom, you can then choose independent

values for port_b_size and port_c_size.

2 Change component type from standard to custom.

3 Change port_b_size to 3 inches and port_c_size to 0.75 inch. Notice

that independent port sizes can be specified.

4 Now, change your component type back to standard. All ports areupdated to match port_a_size.


Update iProperties

We now add one more rule. This rule updates some of the iProperties for the

manifold block.

1 Add a new rule named part_number_rule. This rule set the Inventor

Part Number iProperty value.

For standard components, we can look up the Part Number in theembedded spreadsheet. Then, we use the value in the model_code cell

to set the Part Number property for the part. You use the

iProperties.Value function, which is available in the iProperties node

of the Snippets area.

2 Using the iProperties.Value function, create the first part of the rule.

This part locates the row in the embedded spreadsheet from which to

read values. Locate the row using port_a_size.




Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Theni = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1",


iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("model_code")

3 For custom components, specify a fixed string for the part number. A

fixed string eliminates the need to use any information from the

spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

Else


"HomeMade"

End If


4 Click OK to close this rule.


Test the iProperties Rule

Verify that the new rule is working.

1 Click , and then click iProperties.

2 On the iProperties dialog box, click the Project tab. Text is entered next

to the Part Number.

3 Click Close to remove this dialog box.

Test the iProperties Rule | 411



4 Go to the Parameters dialog box, and change the value of

component_type from standard to custom.

5 Click Done, and reopen the Inventor iProperties dialog box. The Part

Number is now HomeMade.

Save your work. We will be using this model in the next tutorial to build an

assembly and add logic at the assembly level.


Summary

By completing this tutorial, you now understand some of the basic iLogic

methods for turning a parametric single model into an intelligent super model!


■ Used the Inventor parameter interface.

■ Added a rule.

■ Wrote a rule.

■ Caused a rule to run.

■ Edited a rule.

■ Used the Rule Browser to manipulate rules.

■ Read data from an embedded spreadsheet.

■ Set feature and component activity.

■ Set iProperty values from a rule.

In the next tutorial, you learn how to add rules at an assembly level to affect

Autodesk Inventor parts and iParts. During the tutorial, you are provided with

3D parametric models to which rules are added.


Rule Text Reference

The following is a complete text reference of all the rules presented in this

tutorial. These rules are also available in completed form in the

manifold_block_complete.ipt file, which is included in the tutorials directory.

Block_Shape_Rule




Copy Code Block


Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = TrueFeature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = True


Feature.IsActive("Port_B") = False

Feature.IsActive("Port_B_Threads") = False

End If

Port_Size_Rule

Rule Text Reference | 413



Copy Code Block

i = GoExcel.FindRow("3rd

Party:Embedding 1", "Sheet1", "port_size", "=", port_a_size)






Port_A_Drill_Depth =








"port_size", "=", port_b_size)port_b_y_dist_between_screw =


port_b_x_dist_between_screw =


port_b_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")

Port_B_Drill_Depth =


Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_B_Threads") =



"port_size", "=", port_c_size)

port_c_y_dist_between_screw =GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_between_screw")

port_c_x_dist_between_screw =


port_c_port_dia = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")

Port_C_Drill_Depth =


Feature.ThreadDesignation("Port_C_Threads") =


Block_Size_Rule







Copy Code Block

If block = "tee" Thenport = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_b_size,port_c_size)


port = MaxOfMany(port_a_size,port_c_size)

End If


"port_size", "=", port)

block_depth = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_depth")

port_c_depth_from_front =

GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_c_depth_from_front")

block_width = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_width")

port_a_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")

port_b_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")port_c_hor_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("hor_offset")


porta = MaxOfMany(port_a_size, port_b_size)

ElseIf block = "elbow"

porta = port_a_size

End If


"port_size", "=", porta)

port_a_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")

port_b_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")


port_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")

+ (GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("port_dia")/4)

Else

port_c_vert_offset = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("vert_offset")

End If

block_height = GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("block_height")

Component_Type_Rule




Copy Code Block




End If

Part_Number_Rule

Copy Code Block





GoExcel.CurrentRowValue("model_code")

Else

iProperties.Value("Project", "Part Number") = "HomeMade"

End If

Previous (page 412)




iLogic - Assemblies

16

419



About this tutorial

Build an assembly using the functionality of iLogic.



Manifold_Block.iptTutorial File Used

420 | Chapter 16 iLogic - Assemblies







The steps for creating an assembly include the following:

■ Determine how to use the design in the present application, and how it

can be used in future applications.

■ Write the rules for your assembly in ordinary “speaking” language. These

simply written rules serve as a guide when you create the formal rules in

your design using iLogic Rule language.

■ After you have written the rules in plain language, place the components

into the assembly.

■ Constrain the components, and examine the remaining degrees of freedom.

■ Add more constraints as necessary to constrain all parts fully.

In this tutorial, the assembly you build is a simple manifold block with flange

fittings that are attached using socket head cap screws.

Objectives

■ Pass information from an assembly to its components

■ Drive iPart configurations

■ Change component pattern dimensions

■ Suppress/unsuppress components

■ Suppress/unsuppress constraints

■ Write data to an Excel spreadsheet■ Update iProperties

Prerequisites

■ Knowledge of basic Autodesk Inventor assembly modeling techniques,

such as constraint creation.

■ Completion of the Manifold Block Part tutorial.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 422)








Start a New Assembly File

The block is the first part placed into the assembly.

1 Close any open Autodesk Inventor files, and make sure that iLogic 2012

Tutorials is set as the active project.

2 Create a new assembly using the Standard.iam template.

3 On the ribbon, click Assembly tab ➤

Component panel

➤

Place.

4 In the Open dialog box, double-click manifold_block.ipt. It is the

part file you created in the Manifold Block Part tutorial.

A grounded occurrence of the component is placed in the assembly, and

the part origin is aligned with the assembly origin.

5 To cancel placement of further copies of the component, right-click the

graphics window and select Done.6 Use Orbit to orient the manifold block as shown.




In addition to the block, this assembly includes three union caps and

three sets of screws to attach the caps.

7 Select the Place command again, and double-click union_cap.ipt.

A copy of the component becomes attached to the mouse pointer. and

the Place Standard iPart dialog box is displayed.

8 Click the Table tab, and select iPart member Union-01 (Part Number

U-050).

9 Click in the graphics window to place a copy of the union cap near the

manifold block. Click two more times to add a total of three union caps,

then click Dismiss to close the dialog box.

Start a New Assembly File | 423



Now you can add the screw components.

10 Select the Place command again, and double-click Screw.ipt.

11 In the Place Standard iPart dialog box, select iPart member Screw-01.

Place four Screws in the graphics window, and then click Dismiss to

close the dialog box.




12 Save your assembly as my_manifold_block.iam.

You are ready to begin assembling the components and establishing

their relationships.


Customize Components Before Assembly

Before assembling the components, we can make a few changes to identify

them with this project.

Customize Components Before Assembly | 425



Change Assembly Component Appearance

First, we change the appearance of our union cap components to make themmore visible.

1 click the first union cap component.

2 From the Quick Access toolbar, expand the Appearance drop-down

menu, and select Blue.

3 Repeat the appearance selection for the other two union cap components.

Rename Assembly Components

Thus far, the components added to the assembly are listed in the modelbrowser. The components are named the same as the file names they reference.




We must change the names of the components in our assembly to reflect their

purpose. We also want to remove the iPart member identification.

Renaming our components ensures that future name changes to iPart members

do not cause our component names to become out of date in the rule. If the

names are out of date, the rule can fail to execute properly.

1 Navigate to the Model browser.

2 For each component listed here, double-click slowly on the name and

change it as indicated.

■ Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:1 with port_a_union.

■ Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:2 with port_b_union.

■ Replace union_cap [Model Code = 050]:3 with port_c_union.

■ Replace Screw-01:1 with port_a_union_screw.

■ Replace Screw-01:2 with port_b_union_screw.

■ Replace Screw-01:3 with port_c_union_screw.


Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly

1 Double click manifold_block:1.

2 Open the Parameters dialog box, and verify that the following

parameter values are set as indicated.

ValueParameter

Teeblock

Standardcomponent_type

0.50port_a_size

3 Save the assembly file.

Edit iLogic Parts from Within an Assembly | 427



Add Assembly Constraints

Assembly constraints restrict the movement of components relative to eachother. Apply all constraints necessary to constrain each part fully and leave

no degrees of freedom.

1 Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_center between Port A and

the manifold block. Use these selections:

■ The axis running through the center of Port A of the manifold block.

■ The axis through the center hole of port_a_union.

NOTE If the union cap is hidden within the block after creating the constraint,

click and drag the union cap away from the block.

2 Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_hole using these selections:

■ The axis running through the center of the Port A top left screw

hole on the manifold block.

■ The axis along the center of the top left screw hole of port_a_union.




3 Create Mate constraint port_a_cap_face using these selections:

■ The Port A face of the manifold block.

■ The back face of port_a_union.




4 Create Insert constraint port_a_cap_screw using these selections:

■ The port_a_union_screw

■ The top left screw hole in port_a_union




5 Follow the previous steps for Port B and Port C. Use similar names for

the constraints.

Create Screw Patterns

Each port on the manifold block requires a pattern of four screws to attach

the union cap to the block. Use the screw we inserted into the assembly asthe patterned component.

First, create the screw pattern for Port A.


➤

Component panel

➤

Pattern.

2 click port_a_union_screw.

3 Click the Rectangular tab.

4 click the direction arrow in the Column area.

5 click the bottom horizontal edge of the Port A face.

6 Enter 1.50 for the horizontal distance.




7 click the direction arrow in the Row area.

8 click the left vertical side of the Port A face.

9 Enter .69 for the vertical distance.

10 Click OK.

11 Rename Component_Pattern_1 in the Model browser to be

port_a_screw_pattern.

Assign Descriptive Names to Pattern Parameters

When you create the screw component pattern, new model parameters are

also created. Rename the parameters for future use in this tutorial.


2 click the name of the parameter containing 0.69 in the Equation cell.




3 Change the parameter name to port_a_y_dist_between_screws.

4 click the name of the parameter containing 1.50 in the Equation cell.

5 Change the parameter name to port_a_x_dist_between_screws.

6 Repeat the previous steps for port_b_union_screw and

port_c_union_screw. Remember to rename the patterns when you

are done. Your model should look as shown in these front and back

views.




7 Save your assembly file.





Add Control Parameters for Assembly

Since we have created an assembly document, we must add some other user

parameters.

Create Parameters to Control Port Sizes


2 Create the numeric parameter port_a_size.

3 Set Unit to in.

4 Create a multi-value list with these values..

0.50

0.75

1.00

1.25

1.50

2.00

2.50

3.00

5 Select 0.50 from the new multi-value list.

6 Define port_a_size as a Key parameter.

7 Leave the dialog box open, and repeat the previous steps to create two

additional parameters named port_b_size and port_c_size.

Add Control Parameters for Assembly | 435



Create Parameters to Control Component Type and Block Style

For component type:

1 Create the text parameter component_type.

2 Create a multi-value list with the values standard and custom.

3 Set the value to standard.

4 Define component_type as a Key parameter.

For block style:

1 Create the text parameter block.

2 Create a multi-value list with the values tee and elbow.

3 Set the Multivalue list to tee.

4 Define block as a Key parameter.

Create Parameters to Control Component Part Numbers

Create the following additional text parameters:

■ port_a_union_part_number

■ port_b_union_part_number

■ port_c_union_part_number

■ port_a_screw_part_number

■ port_b_screw_part_number

■ port_c_screw_part_number

For each parameter, set the Equation value to 1.

Save the File

When you have defined all the parameters, Save the assembly file.


Create Rules in the Assembly

In the next several lessons, you create a series of rules to manage the contents

of the assembly.




Pass Parameters from the Assembly to the Parts

This model includes a part named manifold_block:1, which has iLogic rulesin it. We must pass the assembly level parameter to the part.

1 Create a rule named assembly_to_parts_rule.

This rule sets parameters in the part based on the corresponding values

of the control parameters in the assembly. Our Parameter function

specifies the component name as well as the parameter name.

Copy Code Block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block") = block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "component_type") =

component_type

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "port_a_size") =

port_a_size

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "port_b_size") =

port_b_size

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "port_c_size") =

port_c_size

2 Click OK when you have completed this rule.

Edit Part-level Rules in an Assembly

In the Manifold Block Part tutorial, we added a rule to the manifold block part

that controls the tee and elbow styles. We must also add it at the assembly

level. Rather than rewrite the existing rule, we copy the original.

1 Double-click manifold_block:1 from the Model browser. The other

components become transparent.

Create Rules in the Assembly | 437




➤

iLogic panel ➤

RuleBrowser.

3 Double-click component_type_rule.

4 Copy the rule text to the clipboard.

5 Click Cancel on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it.

6 Double click my_manifold_block.iam in the Model browser.

7 Add a new rule named component_type_rule.

8 Paste the copied rule text from component_type_rule into the rule

text area of the Edit Rule dialog box.

Copy Code Block




End If

9 Click OK to save this assembly-level rule.

Add port_a_rule

When we change the port size of Port A, we must perform several tasks:

■ Change the port size.

■ Update the iPart number.

■ If required, change the screw size, screw location, and screw kit part

number.

We add a rule to do it:

1 Make sure your manifold block assembly is active.




2 Create a rule named port_a_rule.

The first part of this rule adjusts the screw pattern spacing, based on

information stored iPart table of the union part.

3 Add a code block that looks up the row being used based on the

port_a_size parameter. Then assigns values to two different assembly

parameters from two other columns.

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_a_union", "port_size", "=",

port_a_size)

port_a_y_dist_between_screws =

iPart.CurrentRowValue("y_dist_betwn_screw")

port_a_x_dist_between_screws =

iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")

NOTE The iPart-related statements used here can be found in the Snippets

area under the iParts node of the System tab.

The next part of the rule selects the appropriate iPart row inside the

screw part based on the selected port size.4 Use a series of If statements to set the appropriate iPart member

according to the current value of the port_a_size parameter.




Copy Code Block

If port_a_size = .50 Then

iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-01")

ElseIf port_a_size = 0.75 Then
















iPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

5 For the last part of this rule, add a statement that gets the part number

for the flare flange and stores it in an assembly parameter, which is used

in another rule later in this tutorial.

Copy Code Block

port_a_union_part_number =

iProperties.Value("port_a_union", "Project", "Part

Number")

6 Click OK to save the rule, and save the assembly file.

Add port_b_rule

Port B is different from Port A and Port C, because it does not exist in an

elbow manifold block. If the manifold block is an elbow style block, we must

suppress the union cap and the union screws used for this port. We must also

suppress the mate constraints associated with the union cap.

Because we are suppressing components, we set a level of detail before we

write the rule. Rules affecting items related to the level of detail in an assembly

require that a custom level of detail be defined and saved before writing the

rules. If the custom level of detail is not defined, iLogic generates an error

message.

Set a Level of Detail

1 In the Model browser, expand the Representations node and then

the Level of Detail node.

2 Right-click the Level of Detail node, and select New Level of Detail.

A new level of detail is added.

3 Slowly double-click LevelofDetail1, then and rename it to iLogic.

Write the Rule




Now, we can write the rule.

1 Create a rule named port_b_rule.

2 For the first part of the rule, determine if we are making a tee-style block,

and store that in a separate variable isTee. The isTee variable holds a

value of True or False.

Copy Code Block


isTee = False

ElseisTee = True

End If

We use this variable later to set other parameters.

3 Add lines to the rule to turn off the constraints that locate the union

and union screw when the manifold block is an elbow style. Turn on

the constraints when the manifold block is a tee style.

Copy Code Block

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_center") = isTee

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_hole") = isTee

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_face") = isTeeConstraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_screw") = isTee




Note that we can use the isTee variable to turn these constraints on or

off according to the value of the block parameter.

NOTE The naming convention used for these constraints has made it easier

to refer to them in this rule. Remember that you can also use the Model tree

information in the Edit Rule dialog box to help complete the names of the

constraints.

4 Add two lines that conditionally include the port_b_union part and

corresponding screw pattern:

Copy Code Block

Component.IsActive("port_b_union") = isTee

Component.IsActive("port_b_screw_pattern") = isTee

These lines use the isTee variable. When the screw pattern is suppressed,

the screw component is also suppressed.

5 For instances in which we are using Port B, add a section that sets the

port size, screw pattern parameter values, and port_b_union part

number.

Copy Code Block

if isTee Then

i = iPart.FindRow("port_b_union", "port_size", "=",

port_b_size)

port_b_y_dist_between_screws =





port_b_x_dist_between_screws =


port_b_union_part_number =iProperties.Value("port_b_union", "Project", "Part

Number")

End If

We enclosed this entire block in an If isTee statement, so that these

lines are only processed for a tee-style manifold block. The statement

If isTee Then is equivalent to If isTee = True Then, but it provides

a more concise expression format.

We first choose the appropriate row in the s iPart table of the union part,

corresponding to the value of the port_b_size parameter, and then

extract the values to use for the x and y pattern offsets. Then, we extract

the Part Number from the union part, and store its value in another

parameter for later reference.6 For the last part of this rule, we choose the member within the s iPart

table of the screw part to use for Port B. It is based on the value of the

port_b_size parameter. Use a series of If/Then/Else statements to

control it.




Copy Code Block

If port_b_size = .50 then

iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-01")

elseif port_b_size = .75 then


elseif port_b_size = 1.00 then







iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-04")elseif port_b_size = 2.50 then






iPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-06")End If

7 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the rule.


Add port_c_rule

The rule for Port C is almost the same as for Port A, except that everything

referencing Port A must reference Port C instead.

1 Open the Rule Browser.2 Double click port_a_rule.

3 Use the mouse to highlight the entire rule.

4 Press Ctrl+C to copy the rule text.

5 Click OK on the Edit Rule dialog box to close it.

6 Add a new rule named port_c_rule.

7 In the Edit Rule dialog box, click in the rule text area, and press Ctrl+V

to paste the rule.

8 Click the Search and Replace tab at the top of the dialog box.

9 Enter port_a in Find what.

10 Enter port_c in Replace with.

11 Place a check mark in Match Case.

12 Click Replace All in This Rule.




Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_c_union", "port_size", "=",

port_c_size)

port_c_y_dist_between_screws =


port_c_x_dist_between_screws =





If port_c_size = .50 then

iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-01")elseif port_c_size = .75 then

iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-02")

elseif port_c_size = 1.00 then







iPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw" "Screw-04")



elseif port_c_size = 3.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-06")

End If

port_c_union_part_number =

iProperties.Value("port_c_union", "Project", "Part

Number")

13 Click OK to close the dialog box.



Calculate Part NumbersWe must determine the part numbers to use for the union screws and elbows.

To do this, we create additional rules in our assembly.

The first part of this rule calculates a part number to use for the Port A screw,

based on the value of the port_a_size parameter. In this rule, we use a new

statement Select Case to execute one of a group of statements. The statements

executed depend on the value of an expression.

1 Add a new rule named screw_part_number_rule.




2 Create the first section of the rule. This section computes a variable

portion of the part number, based on the port_a_size parameter value.

The value is held in a temporary variable named Screw_num1. Oncethe value is determined, the rule constructs the entire part number string.

Use the Keywords drop-down menu on the toolbar above the text area

to help you fill in this rule.

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_a_sizeCase .50

Calculate Part Numbers | 449



Screw_num1 = 050

Case .75

Screw_num1 = 075Case 1.00

Screw_num1 = 100

Case 1.25

Screw_num1 = 125

Case 1.50

Screw_num1 = 150

Case 2.00

Screw_num1 = 200

Case 2.50

Screw_num1 = 250

Case 3.00

Screw_num1 = 300

End Select

port_a_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &

"-SCREW"

In the rule we have created, if port_a_size = 0.50, the part number is

created as -

UNBRAKO-050-SCREW

We save this value in a parameter for later reference.

3 Copy and paste the rule text you created, and then replace port_a_size

with port_b_size. Set the parameter to port_b_screw_part_number.




Copy Code Block

Select Case port_b_size

Case .50

Screw_num1 = 050

Case .75

Screw_num1 = 075

Case 1.00

Screw_num1 = 100

Case 1.25




Screw_num1 = 125

Case 1.50


Screw_num1 = 200

Case 2.50

Screw_num1 = 250

Case 3.00

Screw_num1 = 300

End Select

port_b_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &

"-SCREW"

4 Create another copy of the rule text, and then replace port_a_size with

port_c_size. Set the parameter to port_c_screw_part_number.




Copy Code Block

Select Case port_c_size

Case .50

Screw_num1 = 050

Case .75

Screw_num1 = 075

Case 1.00

Screw_num1 = 100

Case 1.25




Screw_num1 = 125

Case 1.50


Screw_num1 = 200

Case 2.50

Screw_num1 = 250

Case 3.00

Screw_num1 = 300

End Select

port_c_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &

"-SCREW"

5 Click OK to save the rule and close the dialog box.



Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet

We have now set all the parameter values necessary to construct the model

compute the part numbers. The last rule we write passes the part numbers

and other parameter values associated with this file to an Excel spreadsheet.

Some of these part numbers are in iParts, and this rule generated the screw

part number.

The update_excel_spreadsheet_rule utilizes a set of functions that are

available from the Excel Data Links category, in the Snippets area of the EditRule dialog box.

1 Add a new rule named update_excel_spreadsheet_rule.

This rule fills in the necessary cells depending upon the state of the

model. In the spreadsheet, all the cells to which data is being passed

have been named to correspond to the information being written.

2 Create the first portion of the rule, which opens the spreadsheet and

writes the first three cell values.




Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CellValue("part_number.xls", "Sheet1",

"Block_Type") = component_type

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Style") = block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Part_Number") =

iProperties.Value("manifold_block:1", "Project", "Part

Number")

In this section, we reference the part_number.xls spreadsheet file includedwith this tutorial project. We then set the values for the cells

Block_Type, Block_Style, and Block_Part_Number. The first two

values are set from assembly parameters, and the last value is set from

the block’s Part Number iProperty.

3 Create the next portion of the rule, which writes the values of the three

port sizes to the spreadsheet.

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_size") = port_a_size


GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = port_b_size

Else

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = "N/A"

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet | 455



End If

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_c_size

Note how we use a placeholder value of N/A for an elbow-style manifold.

4 Add another section to the rule which assigns cell values from parameters

contained in the manifold block component.

Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_depth") =

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_depth")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_width") =

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_width")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_height") =

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_height")

Note the reference to the manifold_block:1 component in this section.

5 Add a section to the rule which assigns cell values from the part numbers

of the union component and the screw parts, as computed by

screw_part_number_rule.




Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap") =

port_a_union_part_number

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit") =

port_a_screw_part_number


GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") =

port_b_union_part_number

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") =

port_b_screw_part_number

Else

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") = "N/A"

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") = "N/A"

End If

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap") =

port_c_union_part_number

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit") =

port_c_screw_part_number

As with port_b_size in a previous section of the rule, note the

conditional handling of the values related to Port B.

6 To end this rule, save the changes to the spreadsheet. Use the

GoExcel.Save function, which is available from the Excel Data Linksnode in the Snippets area

Write Information to an Excel Spreadsheet | 457



Copy Code Block

GoExcel.Save

7 Click OK to save and close the rule. The spreadsheet updates as the rule

executes upon closing. The rule automatically closes the spreadsheet

after executing.

8 Open the part_number.xls spreadsheet with Excel, and verify that it

is updated. Close the spreadsheet document before the rule executes

again, because the rule cannot update the spreadsheet if it is already

open from Excel.


Test Your Rules

Now that you’ve completed all the rules in your assembly, test them to verify

that they are all working properly and producing the desired results. Test your

rules by changing the current parameter values using the Parameters dialog

box, and then examine the model.


2 Select Key from the Filters drop-down list to view only the Key

parameters defined earlier in this tutorial.

3 Change the block parameter value from tee to elbow. Then click in

some other cell or press Tab to apply the change, and note how the

model changes according to the rules.




4 Next, change port_a_size to some other value. Since component_type

is set to standard, the other two port sizes also change, and the entire

manifold size changes.

5 As these changes are made, the part_number.xls spreadsheet is also

updated. View the spreadsheet in Excel, and validate that the cell values

reflect the current state of the model.

Congratulations! You have completed this tutorial.


Summary

In this final iLogic tutorial, you used iLogic to:

■ Edit iLogic parts from within an assembly

■ Add parameters to control an assembly

■ Create rules in an assembly

■ Calculate part numbers

■ Write information to an Excel Spreadsheet

Summary | 459




Rule Text Reference

The following is a complete text reference of all the rules presented in this

tutorial. These rules are also available in completed form in the

manifold_block_complete.iam file, which is included in the tutorials directory.

Assembly_To_Parts_Rule

Copy Code Block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block") = block

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "component_type") =

component_type

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "port_a_size") = port_a_size

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "port_b_size") = port_b_size

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "port_c_size") = port_c_size

Component_Type_Rule

Copy Code Block

If component_type = "standard" Thenport_b_size = port_a_size





End If

Port_A_Rule

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_a_union", "port_size", "=",port_a_size)




port_a_y_dist_between_screws =


port_a_x_dist_between_screws =iPart.CurrentRowValue("x_dist_betwn_screw")

If port_a_size = .50 then


elseif port_a_size = .75 then


elseif port_a_size = 1.00 then






elseif port_a_size = 2.00 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_a_union_screw", "Screw-04")





End If

port_a_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_a_union",

"Project", "Part Number")




Port_B_Rule




Copy Code Block

If block = "elbow" ThenisTee = False

Else

isTee = True

End If

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_center") = isTee

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_hole") = isTee

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_face") = isTee

Constraint.IsActive("port_b_cap_screw") = isTee

Component.IsActive("port_b_union") = isTee

Component.IsActive("port_b_screw_pattern") = isTee

If port_b_size = .50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_b_union_screw", "Screw-01")

elseif port_b_size = .75 then














end If




Port_C_Rule

Copy Code Block

i = iPart.FindRow("port_c_union", "port_size", "=",

port_c_size)

port_c_y_dist_between_screws =





port_c_x_dist_between_screws =


If port_c_size = .50 then


elseif port_c_size = .75 then










elseif port_c_size = 2.50 theniPart.ChangeRow("port_c_union_screw", "Screw-05")



End If

port_c_union_part_number = iProperties.Value("port_c_union",

"Project", "Part Number")




Screw_Part_Number_Rule

Copy Code Block

Select Case port_a_size

Case .50

Screw_num1 = 050

Case .75

Screw_num1 = 075

Case 1.00




Screw_num1 = 100

Case 1.25


Screw_num1 = 150

Case 2.00

Screw_num1 = 200

Case 2.50

Screw_num1 = 250

Case 3.00

Screw_num1 = 300

End Select

port_a_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &

"-SCREW"




Copy Code Block

Select Case port_b_size

Case .50

Screw_num1 = 050

Case .75

Screw_num1 = 075

Case 1.00

Screw_num1 = 100

Case 1.25




Screw_num1 = 125

Case 1.50


Screw_num1 = 200

Case 2.50

Screw_num1 = 250

Case 3.00

Screw_num1 = 300

End Select

port_b_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &

"-SCREW"




Copy Code Block

Select Case port_c_size

Case .50

Screw_num1 = 050

Case .75

Screw_num1 = 075

Case 1.00

Screw_num1 = 100

Case 1.25





Screw_num1 = 150

Case 2.00


Screw_num1 = 250

Case 3.00

Screw_num1 = 300

End Select

port_c_screw_part_number = "UNBRAKO-" & Screw_num1 &

"-SCREW"




Update_Excel_Spreadsheet_Rule




Copy Code Block

GoExcel.CellValue("part_number.xls", "Sheet1", "Block_Type")= component_type

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Style") = block

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("Block_Part_Number") =

iProperties.Value("manifold_block:1", "Project", "Part

Number")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_size") = port_a_size


GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = port_b_size

Else

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_size") = "N/A"

End If

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_size") = port_c_size

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_depth") =

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_depth")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_width") =

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_width")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("block_height") =

Parameter("manifold_block:1", "block_height")

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_union_cap") =

port_a_union_part_number

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_a_screw_kit") =

port_a_screw_part_number


GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") =

port_b_union_part_number

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") =

port_b_screw_part_number

Else

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_union_cap") = "N/A"

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_b_screw_kit") = "N/A"

End If

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_union_cap") =

port_c_union_part_number

GoExcel.CurrentCellValue("port_c_screw_kit") =

port_c_screw_part_number

GoExcel.Save




Previous (page 459)




476



Derived Parts

About this tutorial

Create parts from derived geometry.



17

477



Start a new part file.

der_001.ipt

Tutorial File Used





Derive the geometry of an existing part and use it to create a part model.

Derived parts offer several distinct advantages:

■ Derived part functionality can increase your efficiency by providing

foundational base geometry upon which to build unique design features.

■ The derived part is linked to the source file: any changes to the source file

can be instantly applied to the derived part.

■ The derived part can selectively include various part geometries and

characteristics, such as bodies, sketches, work features, and parameters.

■ Derived parts can use less memory.

Objectives

■ Use a derived part as the base feature of a new part.

■ Add features to a derived part.

■ Modify a base part and update the derived part.

■ Break the link between a derived part and its base part.

Prerequisites■ Know how to set the , navigate model space with the various view tools,



Navigation Tips



Next (page 479)

478 | Chapter 17 Derived Parts







Create a Part File

1 Start a new part file.

■ Click the New command on the Quick Access Toolbar. Ensure

that you click the icon, instead of the drop-down arrow next to the

icon.

■ In the New File dialog box, click the Metric tab, and then

double-click Standard (mm).ipt.

2 In the graphics window, right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from

the marking menu. You add the derived part to the empty part file.


Create a Derived Part

Select the source file and create the derived part:


Insert panel ➤

Derive

.

2 Double-click der_001.ipt in the Open dialog box.

3 In the Derived Part dialog box, expand the Sketches node.

4 Ensure that the icon appears next to Sketch3 to allow the program

to include this sketch in the derived part. If necessary, click the icon to

switch the include status.

5 Click OK on the Derived Part dialog box to create the derived part and


The external part is now the base feature of your new part.

6 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate


Create a Part File | 479




Understand Derived Parts

The Model browser now contains the base feature node der_001.ipt. The

application takes the name from the file name of the source file.

The derived body and the included sketch appear nested under the base feature.

All model features in the source file—the three extrusions, the hole, the

chamfer, and the consumed sketches—are derived into a single body. These

features are not available for edit in the derived part. The unconsumed sketch

you included is available and editable in the derived part.





Add Features to the Derived Part

One of the benefits of a derived part is that you can use the derived part to

provide base geometry quickly. Then add new features to that base geometry.

In effect, you use the source file geometry as a foundational starting point for

your design work. At the same time, you preserve the design state of the source

file. There is a one-way associative link between the source file and the derived

part. Any changes made to the source file can be applied to the derived part.

However, changes made to the derived part do not modify the source file.In this portion of the exercise, you add holes to the derived part.


Modify panel ➤

Hole

, or right-click and select Hole from the marking menu.

The sketch points in the included sketch are selected by default for the

hole locations.

Add Features to the Derived Part | 481



2 Change the hole diameter to 20 mm.

3 Select Through All in the Termination field.

4 Click OK.

5 Save the file. Use the file name derive_test.


Modify the Parent Part

Next, you modify the source file, and then apply those changes to the derived

part.

1 In the Model browser, right-click der_001.ipt, and then select Open

Base Component.This command opens the source file for the derived part.




2 On the ribbon, click the Manage tab

➤

Parameters panel

➤

Parameters.

3 For the parameter d2, change the equation from d1 * 5 to d1 * 7.

4 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.

5 Observe that the length of the part has increased.


Modify the Parent Part | 483



Update the Derived Part

1 Switch to derive_test.ipt by clicking the derive_test.ipt tab at the

bottom of the graphics window.

Notice that an Update icon appears next to der_001.ipt in the

Model browser. This icon indicates that the source file (the parent part)

was modified, and that you can apply the changes to the derived part.

The changes are not applied automatically. You decide whether to apply

the changes.

2 Click Local Update on the Quick Access Toolbar to apply the

changes to the derived part.


Protect the Derived Part

If useful for your design workflow, you can ensure that changes to the source

file are not accidentally applied to the derived part.




■ To sever the link between the derived part and the base part permanently,

right-click the derived part in the Model browser, and then select Break

Link with Base Component.

The program breaks the associative link. You cannot restore the link.

Protect the Derived Part | 485



■ To suppress the association to the source file, right-click the derived part,

and then select Suppress Link With Base Component.

■ To restore a suppressed link, right-click the derived part, and then select

Unsuppress Link With Base Component.


Restore and close the parent file

1 Switch to the der_001.ipt window.

2 Click the Parameters command.

3 Change the equation for d2 back to d1 * 5.

4 Click Done to close the Parameters dialog box.5 The part resumes its original length.

6 Save and close the part file.

7 Also close derive_test.ipt.


Summary

In an empty part, you learned how to:

■ Use an existing part as the base feature of a new derived part.

■ Add features to a derived part.

■ Modify the parent part and update the derived part.

■ Break the link between a derived part and its parent part.

You can explore design alternatives with derived parts and build up libraries

of parts for use across your designs. Remember to check Help for further

information.




Previous (page 486)

Summary | 487



488



iFeatures

About this tutorial

Create and reuse iFeatures in part files.



18

489



TSlot-begin.ipt

TSlot-table.ipt

Tutorial File Used





Save an existing feature to a catalog and make it a reusable, table-driven

iFeature, and then reuse it in a part file.

iFeatures minimize mistakes and rework. You capture the correct information

once and then reuse the known, correct feature set.

To start, you extract and save a T-slot feature to an iFeature catalog. You create

an iFeature to utilize a table of parameters, which define sizes. Then, you opena table model file and add a T-slot of a specific size using the iFeature. The

T-slot and table serve as a mounting for the cylinder clamp data set.

Objectives

■ Extract an existing feature and save it to an iFeature catalog.

■ Create an iFeature to utilize a table of parameters.

■ Add an iFeature to a part.

■ Save resources through reuse with iFeatures.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Parts 1 and Parts 2 tutorials.

■ Understand the material covered in the Getting Started PDF and the Helptopic “Getting Started.”

■ Ensure that Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit on the

Sketch tab of the Application Options dialog box is not checked.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 491)

490 | Chapter 18 iFeatures







Create an iFeature

1 OpeniFeatures ➤

TSlot-begin.ipt.

2 Click the + to the left of Extrusion2 in the Model browser to access

Sketch2.

3 Double-click Sketch2 (the sketch that created Extrusion2). Use the

View Cube or View Face to look at the front of the part, so that the

sketch appears as shown:

This sketch contains a fully constrained profile with six dimensions and

two collinear constraints. One dimension and one collinear constraintposition the T Slot geometry on the face of Extrusion1 and are of no

Create an iFeature | 491



further interest. Two of the dimensions use an equation to position the

T Slot width one half of the distance from a vertical construction line.

These two equations ensure that any values added will produce asymmetrical slot.

4 On the ribbon, click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch.


Author panel ➤

Extract iFeature.

6 In the Model browser, click Extrusion2.

7 In the Selected Features browser of the Extract iFeature dialog box,

click over d2 [12 mm].

8 Now, click .

Notice that the d2 parameter is now listed in the Size Parameters

portion of the Extract iFeatures dialog box.

9 Repeat the previous steps for parameters d4 [19 mm], d6 [13 mm],

and d7 [7 mm].

10 Click Save in the Extract iFeatures dialog box.

11 In the Save As dialog box, double-click the Slots folder.

12 In the File name field, double-click the name iFeature1, and name

your first iFeature tutorial_TSlot.

13 Click Save in the Save As dialog box.


Insert an iFeature1 Open the supplied file TSlot-table.ipt, which contains a shop table

top.





Insert panel ➤

Insert

iFeature.

3 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click the Browse button.

4 In the Open dialog box, double-click the Slots folder.

5 Click the tutorial_TSlot.ide iFeature file that you created.

6 Click Open.

7 In the graphics window, click the face shown:

8 In the Insert iFeature dialog box, click Next.

9 Although in this panel of the dialog box you can alter the parameters

previously supplied, click Next again for this procedure. We will cover

the creation of a family of related features later in this tutorial.

10 Select Activate Sketch Edit Immediately.

11 Click Finish.


Insert an iFeature | 493



Place an iFeature


Navigate panel ➤

View Face,

and select Sketch2 in the Model browser.

13 Adjust your view zoom to see the T Slot sketch and the left edge of the

table.

NOTE Sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you

recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you will have

undisplayed the sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial

does not require the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the

grid displayed or undisplayed.

NOTE Your sketch may be positioned in a location that differs from the

illustration.

14 Place a 40-mm dimension between the left vertical edge of the table

and the vertical construction line in the center of your T Slot sketch.

15 Place a Collinear constraint between the top-most line in your T Slot

sketch and the top edge of the table. Your sketch should now match the

following illustration:




16 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbbon to exit the sketch and create the

T Slot iFeature.

The red arrow indicates the location of the placed T Slot iFeature.


Place an iFeature | 495



Modify the iFeature File

In the next portion of the tutorial, you convert the iFeature that you justcreated to a table-driven iFeature. It will place T Slots of different sizes. You

will edit the table definition to contain the various size parameters. You will

also add a key to use to select a slot of a certain size during placement.

1 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide.

iFeatures are stored in files with an *.IDE file extension. They contain

geometry representing the features they will add (or subtract). The

tutorial_TSlot file contains black surfaces representing the cut extrude.

You do not make any edits to model features using the iFeature Author

Table.




The ribbon tab containing the iFeature panel displays.

2 On the ribbon, click iFeature tab ➤

iFeature panel ➤

iFeature

Author Table.

3 Right-click the 1 in the cell to the left of the 12-mm parameter in the

lower portion of the iFeature Author dialog box. Select Insert Row from

the context menu.

4 Set the values of the new row to d2 = 14 mm, d4 = 22 mm, d6 = 16

mm, and d7 = 9 mm.

Modify the iFeature File | 497



5 Add two additional rows. Set the values for the first row to d2 = 18 mm,

d4 = 29 mm, d6 = 19 mm, and d7 = 11 mm. Set the values for the

second row to d2 = 22 mm, d4 = 35 mm, d6 = 25 mm, d7 = 14 mm.

The parameter table portion of your dialog box should appear as shown.

6 Click the Other tab in the iFeature Author dialog box, and then click

on the text Click here to add value.

7 In the Name column, click on New Item0 and change the text to Size.

8 In the Prompt column, click on Enter New Item0 and change the

text to Select size.

9 Click the gray key-shaped icon to the left of Size. Notice that the icon

changes to blue, and a blue key icon displays in the Size column heading

which is now included in the parameter table portion of the dialog box.

10 Edit the Size key value for each of the rows in your parameter table as

follows:

M10x1.5 Value for row 1:




NOTE Metric T Nuts are designated by both the slot dimensions and the

thread size of the tapped hole. The Size value entered previously is the

thread designation for one T Slot size. Not all slot sizes are covered by the

values in this tutorial.

11 Click OK to save the added rows and key column to your iFeature

definition.

12 Save and close tutorial_TSlot.ide.





Place iFeatures from a Family

In this final portion of the tutorial, you place iFeatures that are driven by the

key values that you added to your iFeature definition in the previous steps.

1 In the file TSlot-table.ipt (that should still be open) follow the steps

described in the beginning steps of the tutorial panel “Insert an iFeature.”

2 In the Value column, click M10x1.5 and notice that you can select any

of the four sizes that you specified in your iFeature definition.

3 Select any size, and continue the placement as discussed in the final

steps of the tutorial panel “Insert an iFeature.” Use a value other than

40 mm to place your new slots over a solid portion of the table top.4 Repeat the previous cycle, and place T Slots using each of the other

three defined sizes.

NOTE By carefully naming key values of iFeatures defined in a table, you are

able to simplify their future use. Remember that you may not be the only

designer who will benefit from the efforts made to create a table-driven

family of iFeatures!

Next, you will quickly explore the association between an iFeature that

has already been placed, and the IDE file which defines the iFeature.

5 Open the file tutorial_TSlot.ide again.

6 Following the steps you learned previously, change the d2 value of 12mm in the M10x1.5 row to 2 mm.

7 Click OK to close the iFeature Author dialog box.

8 Save and close the tutorial_TSlot.ide.

9 Inspect the T Slots that have been placed in TSlot-table.ipt (that should

still be open).

NOTE No slots have changed size! Once you place an iFeature into a part model,

the resulting feature is not associative to the original iFeature definition. Any

changes made to the iFeature definition will not change any part models that were

created using an earlier version of the iFeature definition.

Congratulations! You have completed the iFeatures tutorial.


Place iFeatures from a Family | 499



Summary

iFeatures save both time and money! By capturing commonly used features

or groups of features once you are able to minimize the effort required to reuse

these features in other design situations. By accurately capturing these features

one time, you can ensure they can be reused repeatedly and correctly.


■ Extract existing features and save them as an iFeature.

■ Place an iFeature precisely in an active design.

■ Create a table to drive a family of iFeatures.

■ Place iFeatures from a family using a key value.

■ That once placed, iFeatures are no longer associated to the IDE file that

defines the iFeature.

Previous (page 499)




Content Center User Lib-raries

About this tutorialCreate your own library of customized content from standard libraries.



Start a new assembly file.

Brace.ipt

Tutorial File Used


tp://www.autodesk.com/inventor-tutorial-data-sets . Then download the tutorial datasets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasets

as instructed.

This tutorial is created for a single user environment with libraries stored in a

Desktop Content location. If you are a member of a workgroup that shares

libraries on a server, you must be a library administrator and have editor

permissions to perform library editing tasks. Also, the method for creating user

libraries on the server is different than presented in this tutorial.

The examples in this tutorial use content based on several different standards.

If your Content Center configuration does not contain the same library, read

along without performing the steps, or use a similar part from a different library.

For example, if the tutorial calls for a machine screw from the JIS standard and

19

501







your library contains only ANSI parts, substitute a similar screw from your

ANSI library.

Objectives

■ Create user libraries to customize content from standard libraries.

■ Add standard parts to Content Center.

Prerequisites

■ Know Autodesk Inventor assembly and part fundamentals.

■ Understand the Autodesk Inventor user interface and how it works.

■ Know the fundamentals of Inventor Content Center.

■ Microsoft Excel available on the computer (needed for creating an iPart).


Navigation Tips



Next (page 502)

Configure Standard and User Libraries

A standard Content Center library and a user read/write library must be

available to perform this exercise. Review your current Content Center

configuration and create a user library.

1 Click ➤

Manage ➤

Projects.

2 On the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in

the projects list to set it the active project.

3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure

Content Center Libraries.

The Configure Libraries dialog box displays a list of Content Center

libraries in your library storage location.

4 Review the list to confirm that libraries are available in the project

configuration.

502 | Chapter 19 Content Center User Libraries



NOTE To perform the tutorial steps, at least one standard Content Center

library must be available for use. A standard library can be identified as

available if the In Use option is selected and the status in the Access columnis Read Only.

TIP If no libraries are available, set up Content Center libraries first. See

Help for more details or contact your CAD Administrator.

5 If you work in the Desktop Content environment, click the Create

Library command on the Configure Libraries dialog box.

NOTE If your Content Center libraries are stored on a server, verify that a

user read/write library is available and you can use it for this exercise.

Alternatively, you can create a library by using the server console and then

add it to the library configuration in the project. See the Help for more details.

6 Enter Tutorial Library in the Display Name field. The File Name

uses the same string automatically.

7 Click OK. The Tutorial Library is created in the Desktop Content folder.

8 A newly created library is automatically added to the Content Center

configuration. Verify that the In Use box is selected for the Tutorial

Library, and the library status is Read/Write.

9 Click OK to close the Configure Libraries dialog box.

10 Click Save in the Projects dialog box, and then click Done.


Enable Edit of a Part Family

Use the Copy To command to enable editing of a family from a read-only

library. Copy To copies a single family, set of families, or a category. The

copying process creates a complete category structure in the destination

read/write library. After a “Copy To” family is created, the family is editable

in the Merged View or in the view of the user library.

Enable Edit of a Part Family | 503



Locate a part family and copy it to the Tutorial Library:

1 On the ribbon, click Tools tab ➤

Content Center panel ➤

Editor.

2 On the Category View panel, expand the Shaft Parts

➤

Circlips

category, and select the External category.

3 On the List View panel, locate the R-Ring family.

4 Right-click the R-Ring family, click Copy To, and then click Tutorial

Library on the menu. The copying process starts.

5 After copying is finished, information in the dialog box is automatically

refreshed.

The R-Ring family is enabled, and an icon identifies that a read/write

copy of the R-Ring family now exists in a user library. The original

read-only family is still available in the standard library, but it is replaced

with the read/write copy in the presented merged view of available

libraries.

6 Right click the R-Ring family and select Family Properties. Open the

Link tab and review the information about creation method and parentfamily. Then, close the Family Properties dialog box.


Edit the Family Table

1 In the List View panel, right-click the thumbnail image for the R-Ring

family, and then select Family Table.

2 In the Family Table dialog box, select Property Columns Only from

the filter drop-down menu.

3 Scroll to the far right side of the dialog box to display the Materialcolumn.




4 Click the Material cell in the first row and change Steel, Mild to

Titanium by selecting Titanium from the drop-down list of available

materials.

5 Click the Material cell in the second row and change Steel, Mild to

Galvanized Steel.

6 Click Apply to save the changes in the library. Then click OK to close

the message box.

7 Click OK to close the Family Table dialog box.


Verify the Changes

The Content Center Editor displays Merged View by default. In the MergedView, content from all libraries is merged in the List View panel. If a family

from a standard library was copied to a user library and then edited, the edited

copy of the family displays in the Merged View.

1 If needed, select Family Preview in the Content Center Editor dialog

box to display the Family Preview panel.

The Family Preview panel shows the family table of the selected family.

Select the R-Ring family, if necessary.

2 Scroll to the far right side of the dialog box to display the Material

column. Verify that the family table in the Merged View includes your

edits.

3 Select Tutorial Library from the Library View list (located near the

top of the dialog box). The view is filtered to show only content

contained in the Tutorial Library. The Tutorial Library contains the

R-Ring circlip family. On the Family Preview panel, verify that the family

table includes your edits.

4 Select the ANSI Library from the Library View list. The view is filtered

to show only content contained in the ANSI library.

Verify that the family table of the R-Ring circlip family did not change

in the ANSI standard library.

5 Select Merged View from the Library View list.


Verify the Changes | 505



Use Save Copy As to Create a Family

Use the Save Copy As command to create a copy of an existing family and

save it as a new family in a read/write library. The family created by Save

Copy As appears separate from the parent family in a merged view of the

content.

You decide if the newly created family maintains a link to the parent family

or is an independent family without any link. A link between parent and

copied families enables you to synchronize copied families with their parents.

Families without link are treated the same as families published by using the

Publishing Guide.

1 Open the Fasteners

➤

Nuts

➤

Other category.

2 On the List View panel, locate the JIS B 1169 - Metric family.

3 Right-click the JIS B 1169 - Metric family, and select Save Copy As

from the menu.

4 In the Save Copy As dialog box:

■ Select Tutorial Library as the location to which the copied family

is to be saved.

■ Select Independent Family.

■ Leave the Family Name, Family Description, and Family Folder

Name unchanged.

5 Click the Review command to display the Review dialog box. The first

row in the table on the Review dialog box displays expressions for File

Name, Part Number, and key family table columns of the newly

created family. The following rows display the first three rows of thefamily table.

Click OK to close the Review dialog box.

NOTE You can edit expressions in the Review dialog box to customize the

family table for the family copy.

6 Click OK in the Save Copy As dialog box to start the copying process.

After the process ends, the merged view displays the original JIS B 1169 -

Metric family and the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family. The Copy of

JIS B 1169 - Metric family is enabled for editing.





Edit Family Properties

Family properties, for example the family name, description, mapping, and

thumbnail image are displayed and edited in the Family Properties dialog box.

1 Right-click the Copy of JIS B 1169 - Metric family, and select Family

Properties.

2 On the Link tab, notice that the creation method is Primary and

information about a family parent or link is not available. It indicates

the family is independent and treated as a user-published family.

3 On the General tab of the Family Properties dialog box:

■ Replace the current Family Name with My JIS B 1169 Nut.

■ Replace the current Family Description with Copy of JIS B 1169

- Metric.

■ Replace the current Family Folder Name with My Parts.

4 Click OK to close the Family Properties dialog box.


Verify Your Edits

Place a member of the family in an assembly, and review properties of the

placed standard part.

1 Create an assembly file by using the standard mm assembly template.


➤

Component panel ➤

Place


3 On the List View panel of the Place from Content Center dialog box,

double-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut family.

Edit Family Properties | 507



4 On the My JIS B 1169 Nut family dialog box, click OK to place the first

family member.

5 One occurrence of the nut is placed in the assembly. Right-click in the

graphics window, and click Done to finish the placement.

6 Review the name of your part in the assembly browser.

7 Right-click the My JIS B 1169 Nut part, and click iProperties. Then:

■ On the General tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Location

field, notice that the part is saved in the My Parts folder.

■ On the Project tab of the iProperties dialog box, in the Description

field, notice that your description string is used.

8 To compare properties of your part and the original part from the

standard library, place a member of the JIS B 1169 - Metric family.

Then, open the Properties for the JIS B 1169 - Metric part.


Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center

In the following exercise, prepare and publish an iPart to a Content Center

user library. The published iPart is saved as a part family to a selected category.

NOTE Some of the applications (such as Design Accelerator, Frame Generator,

Tube and Pipe) require a special authoring and publish procedure. Please refer to

the application help and tutorial for details. Authoring is not discussed in the

following exercise.

1 Open Brace.ipt,located in \Tutorial Files\Weldments.

2 Use Save As to create a copy named Brace_copy.ipt .




3 Before you publish, you will create an iPart factory based on this part.

The rows in the factory correspond to the Content Center family

members (size variations) in the published family.

On the ribbon, click Manage tab

➤

Parameters panel

➤

Parameters and take note of d0 (part width), d1 (height), and d2

(length).

Prepare a Part to Publish to Content Center | 509



4 For clarity, rename the parameters. In the Parameter Name column,

click d0 and enter a more descriptive name such as channel_width.

5 Rename d1 to channel_height and d2 to channel_length.

6 Click Done to accept the name changes and close the Parameters dialog

box.


Author panel ➤

Create iPart.

8 In the lower portion of the dialog box, right-click the existing row 1,

and then select Insert Row from the context menu.

9 In the new row 2, change the channel_length value to 200 mm, and

click OK.

10 Save the part.





Publish to Content Center


Content Center panel ➤

Publish Part.

2 The first page of the Publish Guide displays the list of read/write libraries

to which you can publish. Ensure that Tutorial Library is selected.

3 Select a language (as required), and click Next.

The list of available categories displays.

4 Select Channels (located under Structural Shapes) from the

Category list, and then click Next.

The category parameters display.

5 Map the part parameters (length, width, and height) to corresponding

category parameters that exist in the Structural Shapes Channel category.

In the Base Length row, click the down arrow in the Please Select

cell, and select the channel_length part parameter. This maps the part

parameter channel_length to the required Content Center category

parameter Base Length.

6 To map the channel height and width, scroll down the Category

Parameters list. In the Shape Height row, click the down arrow in the

Please Select cell and select the channel_height. In the Shape

Width row, click the down arrow in the Please Select cell, and select

channel_width.

7 Click Next.

The Define Family Key Columns panel displays.

8 Set the channel_length to be a key column for the family. To do this,

select channel_length in the Table Columns list, and click the right

arrow to move the column to the Key Columns list.

Click Next.

9 Set properties for the published part family.

■ In the Family Name field, change the name to Sheet Metal

Channel.

■ In the Family Description field, enter My Published Channel.

■ In the Family Folder Name field, enter My Parts.

■ You can leave the other properties blank in this example.

Click Next.

10 Review the default thumbnail image. You can use it in this example.

Publish to Content Center | 511



11 Click Publish to publish the part to Tutorial Library.

12 Click OK to dismiss the message box.

13 Close the file Brace_copy.ipt .


Verify the Published Part

1 Create an assembly file by using the standard mm assembly template.


➤

Component panel ➤

Place


3 In the Category View panel, expand the Structural Shapes category,

and select the Channels category. Locate the Sheet Metal Channel

family.

4 Double-click the Sheet Metal Channel family.

5 Select the 125-mm member in the channel_length field, and click

Apply. An occurrence of the part is placed in the assembly.




6 Right-click in the graphics window and select Done to finish the

placement of the first family member. The family dialog box displays

again.

7 Select the 200-mm length member, and click OK.

8 Click in the graphics window to place the longer part.

9 Right-click, and select Done.


Verify the Published Part | 513



Summary


■ Create a Desktop Content user library.

■ Edit the family table for a family from a standard Content Center library.

■ Create a family in a user library by using Save Copy As.

■ Edit family properties of a read/write family.

■ Publish an iPart in a user library.

Remember to check Help for further detailed information.

What Next? Add new rows to the family table of the Sheet Metal Channel

to create new family members. Then place the new family members to the

assembly. Read more about Content Center Editor or Publishing in the Help.

Go through Content Center skill builders on the Autodesk Inventor Services

& Support web page.

Previous (page 512)




Top-down Workflow

About this tutorial

Create assemblies and components using top-down design.



Seat Adjust Layout.iptTutorial File Used

20

515







In this tutorial, you explore aspects of top-down design for a power car seat.

You use a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components. You also change the

layout to demonstrate associativity.

A layout is a 2D sketch within a part file. The 2D sketch uses sketch geometry

to represent your design components and configurations. The layout is the

root document of your design, and allows you to control your design

associatively from the top down.

Once your layout has matured, you use the Make Components and Make

Part commands to derive selected sketch blocks into new part and assembly

files. Associativity is maintained between your layout and the new files sothat your 3D models are updated with changes to their respective sketch

blocks. For Make Components, changes you make to the arrangement of

components do not require updates to your 3D models. This powerful feature

eliminates unnecessary revisions to your design documents.

This tutorial opens an existing layout part with 2D sketch geometry.

Objectives

■ Place and constrain sketch block instances.

■ Derive sketch blocks to new part and assembly files (Make Components).

■ Offset components from the layout plane.

■ Change the layout to demonstrate associativity.

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the active project, navigate the model space with the

various view tools, and perform common modeling functions, such as

sketching and extruding.

■ Knowledge of sketch blocks is beneficial.

■ See the Sketch Blocks tutorial and Help topics.


Navigation Tips



516 | Chapter 20 Top-down Workflow







Next (page 517)

Get Started

In this tutorial, the intent is to demonstrate some of the functionality available

to support your top-down design workflow. As such, the tutorial has you

continue the layout of a motorized car seat near the end of the layout process.

The part file already contains the sketch blocks needed so that you can quickly

complete your layout and move on to the component creation phase. In a

more typical design effort, you would have started by creating the layout part

and sketch blocks already present in this file.

1 Click➤

Open.2 Set the Project File to Tutorial_Files.ipj.

3 Open Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.

NOTE In this tutorial, you save the changes you make to the source tutorial files.

If you need to replace the modified files with the original source files, re-install the

source files from your installation software. Alternatively, back-up the source

Tutorial Files directory to another location and access the back-up files as

needed.


Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance

After you open the part file, note the presence of one sketch, Sketch1, in the

model browser. Expand Sketch1 to view the sketch block instances. Pausethe cursor over the different sketch block instances to view the associated

Get Started | 517



geometry. You must add a flexible instance of the Screw Rod Assy_Front

block to complete the layout.

1 In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to open it for edit.

2 Expand Sketch1.

3 Expand the Blocks folder near the top of the browser. This folder

contains all sketch block definitions.

4 Drag the Screw Rod Assy_Front block from the Blocks folder into

the graphics window. It adds an instance of the block to your layout.

5 Right-click the Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 instance, and select Flexible.

It exposes the sketch block degrees of freedom such that kinematics can

be demonstrated. Screw Rod Assy_Rear:1 is already set to Flexible.

6 Place coincident constraints, in the order shown, to position Screw

Rod Assy_Front:1 in your layout.




Place and Constrain a Sketch Block Instance | 519



7 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Done to exit theCoincident Constraint command.




8 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Show All Constraints

to view the constraints between sketch block instances.

9 Right-click, and select Hide All Constraints.

The sketch block instances are constrained in the layout. Select and drag

different geometry. Note how the layout moves and demonstrates

assembly kinematics. Use the Undo command to return the layout to

the default position.

10 Exit the sketch and save your file.


Make Components

Once your layout and sketch blocks have matured, you derive the sketch blockinstances to part and assembly files. The shape of each component is associated

to the corresponding sketch block. The combination of the layout constraint

and layout part controls the position of each component within an assembly.

1 In the browser, ensure that Sketch1 is expanded.


➤

Layout panel ➤

Make

Components.

In the Make Components: Selection dialog box, you select the sketch

block instances to derive, and choose whether to place the new

components in a target assembly.

3 Select Screw Rod Assy_Front:1. In the dialog box, refer to the selection

browser to ensure that Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 is selected. You should

see a hierarchy that shows the Screw Rod Assy_Front block definition

as the parent and Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 as the child.

4 Ensure that Insert components in target assembly is checked, and

leave Target assembly name as the default. It creates an assembly

(Seat Adjust Layout.iam), into which the new components are placed.

Make Components | 521



5 Click Browse next to the Template control. On the Open Template

dialog box, click the Metric tab. Select the Standard (mm).iam

template, and click OK.

6 Accept the defaults for the other dialog box settings, and click Next.

The Make Components: Blocks dialog box displays. Since Screw Rod

Assy_Front is a nested block, it derives to an assembly and the child

blocks derive to parts. Note that block definitions, not instances, are

shown in the Selected Blocks column. When you select block instances

to derive, you create a component file from the block definition. This

component file is then instanced into the target assembly to correspond

to your selected block instances.

7 To create the component files in metric units, you select the appropriate

metric template. Click Screw Rod Assy_Front under Selected Blocks

to highlight the row. With the row highlighted, click Browse at the top

of the Template column. On the Open Template dialog box, click the Metric tab, and select Standard (mm).iam.

8 Click OK to accept the metric template selection.

9 Change to the Standard (mm).ipt template for the Connecting Rod

and Worm Gear Assy_Front blocks.

NOTE Rather than changing the templates for each block in the Make

Components dialog box, you can change the default templates. Under the

Tools tab, Options panel, click Document Settings. Under the

Modeling tab, click Options in the Make Component Dialog area.

In this dialog box, choose the default part and assembly templates for the

Make Components command. Since these options reside under

Document Settings, they only apply to the current layout part file.

10 For the component position options, ensure that both options are

checked.

The Create equivalent assembly constraints option translates

sketch constraints between blocks into assembly constraints between

components. The Constrain to layout plane option controls location

of the components along the Z axis of the layout part. You can toggle

this setting off and on in your assembly file to achieve the appropriate

position of the components relative to the layout plane.

11 Click OK to execute Make Components and close the dialog box.

The target assembly Seat Adjust Layout.iam is created and opened

in a window. The Screw Rod Assy_Front component is created and

instanced in the target assembly as Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.




12 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save the file

Seat Adjust Layout.iam and associated components.

NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirm

that you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK.

13 The layout part to which your components are constrained, Seat Adjust

Layout:1, has visibility turned off. It avoids unnecessary geometry inthe graphics window. Expand the layout part, and pause over Sketch1

to view the layout sketch from which you derived the new components.

14 Expand the layout constraint Layout:1. Pause the cursor over XYFlush:1. This constraint is active because the component position option

for Make Components was set to Constrain to layout plane. It

constrains Screw Rod Assy:1 to the layout plane.

15 Expand Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 and the associated Layout:1

constraint.

16 Right-click on Screw Rod Assy_Front:1, and select Layout

Constraint. Turn off Constrain to Layout Plane. Under the

Layout:1 constraint, XY Flush:1 changes to suppressed and Z

Angle:1 to enabled. The component is no longer constrained to the

layout plane and can be dragged along the Z axis.

17 Turn on Constrain to layout plane for Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.

Observe how the constraints change once again to lock the component

in its current position, offset from the layout plane.

Make Components | 523



NOTE You can change the offset value by selecting the Layout constraint

browser entry and typing a new value in the browser edit field. You

demonstrate this behavior in the next exercise.

18 Pause the cursor over various objects under Screw Rod Assy_Front:1.

A layout part Screw Rod Assy_Front_Layout:1 and layout constraints

were also created in the subassembly. For each assembly that is created,

a layout part and layout constraints are required to position the assembly

components as described by the layout.

19 Expand the subassembly parts Worm Gear Assy_Front:1 and

Connecting Rod:1. Pause the cursor over the Flush:1 constraint. This

constraint was created by the translation of the collinear sketch constraint

into the equivalent assembly constraint.

20 Click one of the components in the graphics window and drag. The

kinematics of the components were preserved by creation of the Flush:1

constraint.

21 Undo the position changes to return the components to their default

positions.

22 Save your file.


Offset Components from the Layout Plane

You can derive additional components from your layout into the same target

assembly and you can position components at different Z axis locations.

1 Go to Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.

2 Edit Sketch1.

You will utilize Make Components from multiple blocks in the next

steps. To use metric templates for each component, set the default

templates on the Make Components Options dialog box.




3 On the ribbon, click Tools tab

➤

Options panel ➤

Document

Settings.

4 Under the Modeling tab, click Options in the Make Components

Dialog area. In this dialog box, set the default part template to

Standard (mm).ipt and the default assembly template to Standard

(mm).iam. Use Browse to locate the metric templates.

5 Click OK to exit the Make Components Options dialog box.

6 Click OK to exit the Document Settings dialog box.

7 Click Sketch tab

➤

Layout panel ➤

Make Components.

8 In the model browser, select Link Plate:1, Link Plate:2; Seat Pan:1,

and Front Pivot Weldment:1.

9 In the Make Components:Selection dialog box, ensure that the target

assembly remains Seat Adjust Layout.iam, and click Next.

10 Click OK. The graphics window changes to Seat Adjust Layout.iam.

Note the addition of the new components in the browser. Pause the

cursor over the new components. Link Plate:1 and Link Plate:2

appear to be the same geometry because of their XY position. In

subsequent steps, you differentiate the two components with an offset

along the Z axis.

11 The new files are not automatically saved after creation. Save Seat

Adjust Layout.iam and associated components.

Offset Components from the Layout Plane | 525



NOTE If your layout sketch is in edit mode, you are prompted to confirm

that you want to exit edit mode and continue to save your files. Click OK.

12 Click Seat Pan:1 and drag. Again, note that the seat kinematics are

demonstrated.

13 Undo the position changes to return the components to their default

locations.

14 Currently, all components are constrained to the layout plane. Assume

that the layout plane is the mid-plane of the seat. You can turn off

Constrain to layout plane, move the components along the Z axis,

then turn on Constrain to layout plane. The flush constraints will

be re-enabled so that the components can only move parallel to the

layout plane. However, now the constraints have an offset value that

corresponds to their separation distance from the layout plane.

In the browser, expand Link Plate:1, and expand the Layout:2

constraint.

15 Right-click Link Plate:1, and select Layout Constraint. Turn off

Constrain to layout plane. The XY Flush:2 constraint is suppressed

and Z Angle:2 is enabled.

16 Rotate your sketch to view the geometry off-plane.

17 Click Link Plate:1, in the graphics window, and drag in the positive

Z direction. It offsets the components from the layout plane.




18 Turn Constrain to layout plane back on for Link Plate:1. XY

Flush:2 is re-enabled and now shows an offset value.

19 Click XY Flush:2.

20 Enter a value of 120 mm in the entry box below the browser, and click

Enter. The component is repositioned 120 mm from the layout plane,

or mid-plane, of the seat.

21 Perform the operations required to offset Link Plate:2 from the layout

plane by 116.5 mm in the negative Z direction.

22 The pivot plate components in the Front Pivot Weldment:1

subassembly also must be offset from the layout plane. To access the

components and constraints, first activate the assembly for edit.In the browser, double-click Front Pivot Weldment:1.

23 Offset Pivot Plate:1 from the layout plane by 116.5 mm in the positive

Z direction. This component is offset from Link Plate:1 by 3.5 mm to

account for the link plate thickness.

NOTE The pivot plates may appear to float freely in the Y axis direction when

they should be constrained by assembly constraints. It is because the assembly

constraints are between Front Pivot Weldment:1 and other components.

When you finish the edit of the Front Pivot Weldment:1, the pivot plate

positions update according to the associated constraints.

24 Offset Pivot Plate:3 from the layout plane by 113 mm in the negative

Z direction.

Offset Components from the Layout Plane | 527



25 Offset Pivot Plate:2 from the layout plane by 84.25 mm in the positive

Z direction.

26 Finish the edit of Front Pivot Weldment:1.

27 Offset Screw Rod Assy_Front:1 from the layout plane by 82.5 mm

in the positive Z direction.

28 Save your files.





Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity

The component instances you have derived establish the base geometry for

your 3D components. After you have derived your components, your next

step is to add features and further develop the component models. Here, you

get started with a basic workflow.

1 Double-click Link Plate:1 in the browser.

2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Extrude.

3 Select the Link Plate:1 sketch geometry as shown.

4 Enter 3.5 mm for the extrude distance, and use the flip direction arrows

to extrude in the negative Z direction.

5 Click OK. Link Plate:2 is also updated to reflect the added feature.

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity | 529



6 Finish your edit of Link Plate:1.

7 Double-click Pivot Plate:1, and repeat the steps necessary to extrude

the pivot plates to a thickness of 3.5 mm.

8 Finish your edit of Pivot Plate:1, and save your file.

9 As an exercise, add features to your other component instances to develop

your assembly further.




10 After you create your component instances using Make Components,

they remain associated to your layout. Changes to the shape of block

instances are reflected in the corresponding components.

Activate Seat Adjust Layout.ipt.


12 Double-click Link Plate:1 in the browser. It opens the Link Plate

sketch block for in-context edits.

13 Change the dimension shown to 13 mm.

Add Features and Demonstrate Associativity | 531



14 Exit the block edit, and exit the sketch.

15 Activate Seat Adjust Layout.iam.

16 Click Update at the top of the window. Both Link Plate:1 and

Link Plate:2 are updated to reflect the shape change in the Link Plate

block definition.




17 Practice with other changes to your layout to demonstrate the power of

associativity.

18 Save your files.


Summary


■ Add a block instance and sketch constraints to your layout.

■ Use Make Components to derive sketch blocks to component files.

■ Move components off the layout plane in your target assembly.

■ Add features to new components.

■ Demonstrate the benefits of associativity between your layout and

components.

Use of a layout, sketch blocks, and Make Components is effective in the

top-down design of your components. Other features in Autodesk Inventor,

such as Make Part and multi-body parts, also assist in top-down design

workflows. Check out these features in the “New Features Workshop,” tutorials,

and Help.

Previous (page 529)

Summary | 533



534



Substitute Level of DetailRepresentations 21

535



About this tutorial

536 | Chapter 21 Substitute Level of Detail Representations



Create substitute level of detail representations in an assembly.



WormGear.iamTutorial File Used





A substitute representation is a type of level of detail representation that

provides another way to improve assembly performance through reducedmemory use. Memory savings occur anywhere you use the substitute

representation, such as in drawings or presentations.

There are two different methods you can use to create a substitute level of

detail representation:

■ Substitute an assembly with a derived part created from that assembly.

The derived part is based on a reduced-part level of detail representation

created in that assembly.

■ Substitute an assembly with any part. This substitution can be a simplified

part that you create manually or any other part file on disk.

For both methods, you substitute an assembly with a part. Both methods can

provide significant memory savings.

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the active project and navigate the model space with the

various view tools.

■ Refer to the Help topic “Getting Started” for further information.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 538)








Open sample file

Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open

WormGear ➤

WormGear.iam.

Assume for this exercise that the only critical functional geometries in this

assembly are the two shaft ends and the mounting holes on the gear box part.

For clear visual reference, the general shape and appearance of the assemblyare also important. Other internal parts are not needed with respect to how

this assembly might relate to other components in a hosting assembly.


Workflow Overview

Before you begin, look at the creation steps for the two methods from a “big

picture” point-of-view.




Derive in-place part method:

1 In the owning assembly, create a reduced-part level of detailrepresentation.

2 In the owning assembly use the New Substitute ➤

Derive Assembly

command to create a derived part, without leaving the owning assembly,

based on the reduced-part representation.

When the command finishes, the part derived from the assembly is the active

representation. The substitute level of detail representation is identified in the

browser with the icon.

Part-on-disk method:

1 Create or open a part to use as a substitute.

2 Designate the part as a substitute.

3 In the owning assembly, use the New Substitute ➤

Select Part File

command to specify the substitute part for the representation.

Workflow Overview | 539



From an authoring point of view, the derive in-place part method is quicker

most of the time. However, from a memory savings point of view, the

simplified part provides more benefit since you have thorough and explicit

control of geometric complexity.


Derived In-place Part Method

The following pages list the detailed steps for the derive in-place part method.

To begin, you need a reduced-part level of detail representation in the owningassembly. The assembly already contains a reduced-part representation named

All Internals Off .

1 Set the graphics display to Wireframe to see the changes to internal

geometry. For the following image, other adjustments were made to

refine the display characteristics using the Application Options dialog

box. It is not necessary to match those adjustments.




2 Expand Representations ➤

Level of Detail, then double-click All

Internals Off to make it the active level of detail representation.

Derived In-place Part Method | 541



3 Right-click the Level of Detail node, then select New

Substitute ➤

Derive Assembly.


Create the Derived Part

Next, you create the derived part in-place.

1 In the New Derived Substitute Part dialog box, enter Derived

Substitute in the New Component Name field.

2 Use the default part template.

3 Use the default file location, which is the project workspace.

4 Click OK to open the Derived Assembly dialog box.

By default, the derived assembly uses the active level of detail

representation to determine the included components and features.

Select the Representations tab and notice that All Internals Off is specified

in the Level of Detail menu. In your regular workflow, you could also

make further adjustments in the Derived Assembly dialog box, as needed.




5 Click OK.

The derived part is created, and the new substitute level of detail

representation is automatically set as Active.


The Substitute Representation

1 Change the name of the substitute representation to Derived

Substitute.

The assembly browser shows only the derived part while the substitute

representation is active. In addition, the name of the subassembly with

the active substitute level of detail representation is listed next to the

owning assembly browser node.

2 Save and close the assembly.


The Substitute Representation | 543



Use the Substitute Representation

Use the new substitute level of detail representation in an assembly.

1 Create an assembly document.


Component panel ➤

Place.

3 Select (but do not open yet) WormGear.iam.

4 Click Options.

5 Ensure that Derived Substitute is selected in the Level of Detail

Representation menu.

6 Click OK.

7 Click Open, and place one occurrence of WormGear.iam in the

assembly. The substitute level of detail representation is active in the

WormGear subassembly.

8 Use the View Cube or Orbit to adjust the viewpoint to approximate the

following image. Set the graphics to Wireframe Display.

9 Save the assembly using the default file name.




When you save, the program prompts you to save a user-named level of

detail representation for the top-level assembly (the consuming assembly).

10 Use the default name for the representation.

The consuming assembly is Assembly(#).iam. A consuming assembly is an

assembly that contains a subassembly that owns an active substitute level of

detail representation.

The owning assembly is WormGear:1. The owning assembly is the assembly

where the substitute level of detail representation is defined and active. Notice

that the active level of detail representation is listed next to the browser node.


Compare Memory Usage

This sample assembly is small. If it was larger, you would notice a time savings

placing the component with a substitute level of detail representation active,

compared to a representation with all components active, or even a level of

detail representation with some components suppressed. Notice the Capacity

Meter lists only three documents open: the top-level assembly, the WormGear,

and the Derived Substitute derived part.

1 Expand WormGear

➤

Representations

➤

Level of Detail, and

double-click the All Internals Off representation. With this

representation active, eight documents are open.

2 Double-click the Master representation. With this representation, 25

documents are open. Beyond the reduced document count, because the

derived part has a smaller file size than the sum of its parts, you realize

further memory savings.


Part-on-disk Method

In the following steps, you create a substitute level of detail representation

using a supplied, manually created substitute part. The derived part you created

earlier created a significant savings in relative memory consumption. The

Compare Memory Usage | 545



simplified substitute can consume less memory than the derived part,

depending on the number of features of the part.

1 In the assembly document, right-click the WormGear subassembly in

the browser, and then select Open.

2 Save the assembly.

3 Expand the Representations folder, right-click the Level of Detail

node, and then select New Substitute ➤

Select Part File.

4 Select single_part.ipt.

5 Click Open.

A message states the part will be designated as a substitute, and that all

links to external references for the part will be disabled.

6 Click Yes.

The substitute level of detail representation is created and automatically

set as the active level of detail representation.

7 Rename this representation Simple Part Substitute.

8 Save and close the WormGear.iam assembly.





Create the Substitute Representation

In the assembly you created, under the WormGear subassembly, double-click

Simple Part Substitute to set it as the active substitute level of detail

representation.

This simplified representation contains only geometry necessary to interface

with assembly constraints, and enough geometry to visually approximate theactual assembly.

This is the end of the workflow portion of the tutorial.


Guidelines for Creating a Substitute Part

Any part that you use for a substitute level of detail representation must be

designated (tagged) as a substitute part. A part tagged as a substitute uses the

icon at the top-level node in the part file. (The icon is also used to

represent a substitute part in Vault.) In the preceding workflow, single_part.ipt

Create the Substitute Representation | 547



was automatically designated as a substitute when you selected and opened

the part for the substitute level of detail representation.

To mark a part as a substitute while you are in the part file, right-click the

top-level part node, and select Substitute. As in the preceding workflow, a

message states the part will be designated as a substitute. All links to external

references for the part will be disabled.

You can also specify that a substitute part is no longer a substitute, as long as

the part is not currently used in an active substitute level of detail

representation. Right-click the top-level part node, and remove the check

mark next to Substitute. The program restores links to any external

references.

When you create a simplified substitute part, it is good practice to structure

the part geometry such that the part origin and coordinates match the origin

and coordinates of the assembly it substitutes. It ensures that the substitute

part is oriented like the assembly when you create the substitute representation.





Summary


■ Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a part derived

from the owning assembly.

■ Create a substitute level of detail representation based on a manually

created simplified part.

■ Specify and activate a substitute level of detail representation as you place

a subassembly into an assembly.

■ Activate a substitute level of detail representation in an assembly.

This tutorial demonstrated the workflow steps to create and use substitute

level of detail representations. There are various other behaviors and items of

interest to note with this functionality. Consult Help for further detailedinformation.

Summary | 549



Previous (page 547)




Presentations

About this tutorial

22

551



Create exploded views in Autodesk Inventor drawings with presentation files.



Cylinder Clamp.iam

Cylinder Clamp.idw

Tutorial File Used





The assembly explosions you create within Inventor Studio cannot be placedas drawing views in IDW or DWG drawing files. Use presentations instead.

To begin, you open the supplied Cylinder Clamp dataset, and create a

presentation file from the default (mm) template.

Objectives

■ Place a view.

■ Manually explode the assembly.

■ Place the exploded view on a drawing sheet.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Parts 2, Assemblies, and Drawings tutorials.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 552)

Get Started

1 Set your project to tutorial_files.

552 | Chapter 22 Presentations







2 Click➤

Open.3 Select Cylinder Clamp

➤

Cylinder Clamp.iam in the Open dialog

box, and click Open.

4 Click ➤

New.

5 Select Standard(mm).ipn from the Metric tab, and click OK. An

empty Presentation file is opened, and the Presentation tab displays

in the ribbon.

6 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab ➤

Create panel ➤

Create

View , or right-click and select Create View from the marking

menu.

The Select Assembly dialog box displays with the previously opened

Cylinder Clamp assembly selected.

Notice in the Explosion Method area of the dialog box that Manual

is selected by default. This method is probably the method you will use

most often. An Automatic explode option can also be selected. The

Automatic method requires that you supply a distance value. All

components within the selected assembly will be exploded that distance

using any previously defined assembly constraints.

Get Started | 553



This automatic explode technique is useful in a limited number of cases

or as a beginning point for subsequent manual edits. This tutorial uses

the Manual explode method.

7 Click OK in the Select Assembly dialog box. The cylinder clamp assembly

is placed in the Presentation file.

Manually exploding an assembly requires the application of “Tweaks” to

components or groups of components. Creating Tweaks is covered following

a brief discussion about color.


A Word about Color

Autodesk Inventor is delivered with an abundance of predefined materials.

Each material definition consists of a physical asset which includes properties

such as Density, Yield Strength, Tensile Strength, and so on. A material

definition also includes an Appearance asset. Appearance assets come in a

variety of types, each type having properties relative to the type. You can

create new or duplicate existing appearances and modify these to meet your

needs.




Each part that you model with Inventor inherits a material from the template

you use when you begin your design.

During the design process, you can elect to assign specific appearances to a

part and you can elect to override the appearance of the part within an

assembly. These options can aid in the design process by highlighting areas

of focus. All hydraulic components might have a blue appearance in one

assembly representation while all components purchased from a specific

vendor might have a green appearance in another.

The appearances used during the design process may not represent the actual

appearance of the completed design. For the purposes of presentations and

renderings intended for customers or marketing, alternative appearances may

be explored.

The images used in this tutorial are based on an alternative appearance scheme

for the Cylinder Clamp assembly.

The appearances have no impact on the results you will achieve in this tutorial.


A Word about Color | 555



Create Tweaks

Your view should appear oriented as shown in the following image. Use Orbit

to adjust your view as required.

A tweak can be a straight move along a single direction axis, or it can be acombination of straight moves along the X, Y, and Z direction axes. Tweaks

can optionally leave a visible “Trail”.

1 On the ribbon, click Presentation tab

➤

Create panel ➤

Tweak

Components , or right-click and select Tweak Components


The Tweak Component dialog box displays. To create a tweak, you must

define a direction, select components to move, and provide a distance.

When the Tweak Component dialog box is first displayed, the Direction

button is active.




2 In the graphics window, move your cursor over various components

(without clicking) within the assembly and notice the direction axis

triad. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base as shown.

Notice that the Z axis points outwards (away from the face). The Y axis

points upwards. The X axis points in what would be the positive

horizontal direction.

3 Click to select this direction orientation. Notice that the direction axis

triad changes color after you select the face. Also, the Z axis button in

the Transformations area of the Tweak Component dialog box is

selected.

NOTE The direction axes depend upon the selected geometry. By selecting

an angled edge of (any) component, you can manually explode using the

selected edge as the Z axis of the direction triad. Notice how the X, Y and

Z axes differ in the illustration based on the selection of: 1) face, 2) edge or

3) edge.

Create Tweaks | 557



You will now move the purchased air cylinder upwards as your first

tweak.

4 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the Tweak

Component dialog box. Notice that the Y axis of the direction triadchanges color in the graphics window.

By default, the Z axis is active, and you must move the cylinder upwards

along the Y axis. Your first step is to change the transformation direction.

5 Select the Cylinder Body subassembly in the Model browser. To do so,

first click the + next to the Explosion1 node located directly under the

top Cylinder Clamp node.

6 Next, click the + to the left of the Cylinder Clamp.iam assembly node

to see the components of the assembly.

7 In the Model browser, move your cursor over the component name

Cylinder Body Sub_Assy. Notice the red rectangle that highlights the

text. When the text highlights, click to select the subassembly.

8 Move your cursor over an empty space in the graphics window, then

click and drag your cursor up (towards the top edge of the window).




Notice that:

■ The selected subassembly moves along the selected Y direction axis

while you are dragging.

■ A graphical “trail” appears between the original position of the

component and its current position.

■ The transformation distance value in the Tweak Component dialog

box also increments as you drag.

9 Stop dragging (release the mouse button), and move your cursor over

the transformation value field in the Tweak Component dialog box.

10 Double-click on the field to edit the value. Type 100, and press the Enter

key on your keyboard to move the subassembly precisely 100 mm along

the Y axis from its original position.

11 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box.

The dialog box is then reset for a new tweak.

You will next move the clamp in the X direction.


Create Tweaks | 559



Tweak Clamp.ipt

1 After completing the previous exercise, the Direction button is again

active. Move your cursor over the face of the Cylinder Base previously

selected, and click to select it.

2 Click the X button in the Transformations area of the Tweak

Component dialog box. Notice that the X axis of the direction triad

changes color in the graphics window.

3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over Clamp.ipt. (shown as

solid in the illustration for identification purposes only. The other

components will not change to translucent).




4 When the part highlights, click and drag it towards the left side of the

graphics window.

You will next move the retaining ring outwards along the axis of the pin.


Tweak the Retaining Ring

1 Click Clear in the Tweak Component dialog box. The Direction button

is again active.

Tweak the Retaining Ring | 561



2 Move your cursor over the pin that was exposed when you moved the

clamp.

3 When the pin highlights, click to define the direction axis.

4 In this case, you want to move the retaining ring along the Z axis (the

default active transformation axis). Click both retaining rings to select,

and then drag both to the left side of the view.

5 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box.




Notice that the trail for the retaining ring that was farthest away does

not perfectly overlap the longer trail.

6 Click the + next to the Model browser node for ANSI B 27.7M

3AMI-7:1.

7 Right-mouse click the Tweak entry in the Model browser, and select

Visibility. The check mark is removed, the browser entry displays as

unavailable, and the displayed trail in the graphics window is no longer

visible.

8 Click ➤

Save. By default, the Presentation file created has

the same name as the assembly that was placed initially. Presentation

files have the IPN file type extension. Your file is named Cylinder

Clamp.ipn.

Next, you will place the exploded view that you just created onto a new sheet.You will create the sheet in the assembly drawing you edited in the Drawings

tutorial.


Place an Exploded View on a Drawing

1 Click ➤

Open.

2 Select the Cylinder Clamp.idw drawing that was saved during the

Drawings tutorial.3 Right-mouse click on the Cylinder Clamp.idw node at the top of the

Model browser, and click New Sheet on the pop-up context menu.


Create panel ➤

Base, or

right-click and select Base View from the marking menu. The Drawing

View dialog box displays.

5 By default, Cylinder Clamp.iam displays in the File name field. Click

the down arrow at the right side of the field and select Cylinder

Clamp.ipn from the drop-down list.

6 Next, click Current in the Orientation area of the Drawing View

dialog box.

7 Click the drawing sheet to place the exploded view.

Place an Exploded View on a Drawing | 563



8 Right-click and select Done [Esc] to finish placing additional views.

9 Click ➤

Save.


Edit the Explosion

1 Activate Cylinder Clamp.ipn for edit.

Since Cylinder Clamp.ipn is still open, there are several methods that

can be used to return to the file for edit:

■ If individual windows are open within Autodesk Inventor, click the

window border of the IPN file.

■ Click the Cylinder Clamp.ipn tab along the lower edge of the

application.

■ Click the Open Documents up arrow along the lower edge of the

application, and select Cylinder Clamp.ipn from the list of open

documents.

You will now add a Tweak to your Presentation that contains some

direction changes.





➤

Create panel ➤

Tweak

Components, or right-click and select Tweak Components from the

marking menu.

3 Click the face previously used to define direction.

4 Click the Lock Pin instance that appears closest to you in the view.

Edit the Explosion | 565



5 Drag the pin out (towards the left) some distance.

6 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the first segment

of the trail.

7 Click the Y button in the Transformations area of the Tweak

Component dialog box.

8 Click over an empty area in your view, and drag the cursor down towards

the bottom of the view some distance.

9 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the second

segment of the trail.

10 Click the X button in the Transformations area of the Tweak


11 Click over an empty area in your view, and drag down towards the

bottom right side of the view some distance.

12 Release the mouse button to stop dragging and establish the third

segment of the trail.

13 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box. Your view should

appear like the following image:




14 Click ➤

Save.


Edit the Explosion | 567



Associative Drawing View

1 Return to the open drawing file using the steps discussed in the beginning

of the previous exercise.

Notice that the latest tweak is reflected in the exploded drawing view.

You will next apply a rotational tweak to a component in the

Presentation file.

2 Return to the open Presentation file using the steps you have learned.


Rotational Tweaks


➤

Create panel ➤

Tweak

Components, or right-click and select Tweak Components from the

marking menu.

2 Define your Direction axes by clicking the vertical edge of Clamp.ipt

as shown:




3 Select Rotate Axis in the Transformations area of the Tweak


4 Click and drag in the graphics window to rotate the clamp. Alternatively,

enter a precise angle value in the field to the right of Rotate Axis, and

press Enter to rotate the clamp by the entered value.

Rotational Tweaks | 569



5 Click Close in the Tweak Component dialog box.

6 It is possible to delete individual tweaks. In the Model browser, click the

+ to the left of Clamp.ipt to display the two tweaks that have been

applied to the clamp.

7 Right-mouse click the second tweak, and select Delete from the pop-up

context menu. The rotational tweak that you just created is deleted from

your Presentation, and Clamp.ipt returns to the position it occupied

before the application of the tweak.8 Save and close each of the three open files.





Summary

Exploded views of assemblies are often required. Autodesk Inventor utilizes

Presentation files to create exploded views that can be placed into Inventor

drawings.

■ Exploded views can be created automatically using a supplied value.

However, they most often require subsequent manipulation. Creating

exploded views manually is usually more efficient.

■ Components are exploded by applying “tweaks.” They can be a simple

transformation along a single axis or a combination of moves in various

directions.

■ Tweaks can leave visible “trails.” They can be displayed or not displayed.

■ Tweaks also provide rotate capabilities.

Summary | 571



■ Tweaks can be deleted which returns the component to the position

occupied before the application of the tweak.

What Next? Exploded assembly views can be output as animations from the

Presentation file. Explore the animation capabilities by clicking Animate on

the Create panel of the Presentation tab. Animations created by this method

cannot be rendered or manipulated with as much control as is possible using

Inventor Studio. Explore the animation capabilities offered by Inventor Studio

by completing the Studio - Animations tutorial.

Previous (page 568)




Plastic Parts and Fea-tures

About this tutorial

Create a plastic component to explore multi-bodies and plastic features.



PFTutorial.ipt

Control_Button_Solid.ipt

Tutorial File Used

23

573



PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt

PFTutorial_Complete.ipt (finished version)





Create a plastic case for a hand-held music device using the basics of

multi-body and plastic feature functionality in Inventor. Automate the creation

and editing of common plastic part features.

A multi-body part is a top-down workflow. You create and position multiple

solid bodies within a single part document. This technique is especially useful

in the design of plastic parts.

A top-down workflow eliminates the need for complex file relationships and

projected edges between parts. All editing takes place in a single file. At any

time, you can generate unique part files for each body. The generated files are

derived parts that are associative to the master design in the original part file.

If you do not want to learn how to use the plastic features commands, use the

file PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt as a start point. Begin the tutorial at the

section titled Insert a toolbody using Derive.

Before you begin, open and review the supplied plastic part. To simplify the

process of body and feature creation, the tutorial part sketches, work planes,

and surfaces are named to help you identify them.

574 | Chapter 23 Plastic Parts and Features







You can complete the tutorial in segments if you save your work before you

exit.

Objectives

■ Create new bodies using Split.

■ Create grills, rule fillets, rests, and lip features.

■ Create snap fits and bosses.

■ Create a body in place using feature commands.

■ Insert a toolbody using Derive.

■ Use Move Bodies to position a toolbody.

■ Use Combine to perform a Boolean operation.

Prerequisites

■ Intermediate level of understanding part modeling.


■ Activate the Tutorials.ipj project file.

Navigation Tips






Next (page 576)

Split the Solid

To begin:

1 Open Tutorial Files

➤

Plastic Parts and Features

➤

PFTutorial.ipt, and orient the view to match the following image.

2 In the browser, expand the folders for the solid and surface bodies.

Note that there is only one solid body present and four surface bodies.

One of the surface bodies is visible, and all the others are not visible.




3 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab

➤

Modify panel

➤

Shell. Do not

remove any faces. For Thickness, enter 1.5 mm. Click OK to create.

The following cutaway image shows the results of the shell operation.

The cut is not part of the model.

4 Click 3D Model tab

➤

Modify panel ➤

Split. In the dialog box,

choose the Split Solid option. Select the surface named

PartingSurface as the Split Tool. Click OK to finish.

Notice that the part icon in the browser changed to represent a

multi-body part. The Solid Bodies folder contains two bodies. You can

right-click each body and select Properties from the context menu to

set visibility or appearance.

Split the Solid | 577



NOTE We recommend that you assign a unique appearance to each body

in a multi-body part to keep them visually separate. Select each body in the

Solid Bodies folder in the browser, and then right-click and select

Properties from the context menu. You can also select a body and then

choose an appearance override in the Quick Access toolbar dropdown to

set the appearance.

Before proceeding, expand the Surface Bodies folder. and turn off the

visible surface.

Save the file as PFTutorial_1.


Create the Grill

In the next section, we will create the plastic grill feature.

1 In the browser, turn on the Visibility of GrillSketch.





Plastic Part panel ➤

Grill.

3 Activate the Boundary tab and then select the outer closed profile in

the graphics window as shown in the following image. Select the target

solid if the application did not select the body closest to the sketch.

■ Thickness = 0 mm

■ Height = 2 mm

Create the Grill | 579



■ Outside Height = 0 mm

We will skip the Island tab. This sketch does not contain a closed

boundary for an island. The following image shows an example of an

island.

4 Activate the Rib tab and then select the lines.




■ Thickness = 2.5 mm

■ Height = 1.3 mm

■ Top Offset = 0.2 mm

5 Activate the Spar tab and then select the arcs.

Create the Grill | 581



■ Top Offset = 0.5 mm

■ Thickness = 5 mm

■ Bottom Offset = 0 mm

6 Click OK to create the grill.





Create a Rule Fillet

We now want to fillet all the vertical edges of the grill like the one indicated


The Rule Fillet feature is designed to fillet an entire feature based on

pre-determined rules. It means we can fillet the entire grill without having topick individual edges.

Create a Rule Fillet | 583



In the following sequence, we will define the rules which allows the entire

grill to be filleted in a few picks.

1 In the browser, turn off the Visibility of the bottom solid without the

grill. Rotate the part with the grill feature to the inside face of the solid.

TIP The context menu contains three commands to control body display:

Visibility, Show All, and Hide Others.


➤

Plastic Part panel

➤

Rule

Fillet.

■ Use the Source drop-down to set the source to Face.

■ Select the inside curved face of the grill as shown in the following

image.

■ Set the Radius to 0.5 mm.

■ Set the Rule to Incident Edges.

■ Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder to specify the direction.

■ Set the Tolerance to 1 deg.




3 Click OK. You created 128 fillets using rules and a couple of picks.

NOTE The Rule Fillet can be used on any feature in a part file. It is not exclusively

for use with plastic parts.


Create a Rule Fillet | 585



Create a Rest

We now want to build a flat area for some control buttons.

1 Orient the view to the outside of the part as shown in the following

image.

2 Turn on the visibility of RestSketch in the browser.


➤

Plastic Part panel

➤

Rest.

4 On the Shape tab:

■ Select the RestSketch as the profile. If it is the only visible sketch

it is automatically selected.

■ If required, select the top solid as the Solid.

■ For Thickness, enter 1.5 mm and specify Inside.

■ In the drop-down, select Through All.

5 On the More tab:

■ For Landing Options, select Distance and enter 0 mm.

■ For Landing Taper, enter 0 deg.

■ For Clearance Taper, enter 0 deg.

6 Click OK to create the Rest feature.





Create a LipWe will now build a lip-groove combination to facilitate placing the mating

parts in a physical assembly. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the

following image.


➤

Plastic Part panel

➤

Lip.

2 Make sure the Lip button is selected in the dialog box.

3 On the Shape tab:

■ Select the inside edge as the Path Edges.

■ Leave the Path Extents unchecked.

■

Click the Pull Direction check box.■ Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder as the pulling direction.

Create a Lip | 587



4 On the Lip tab:

■ For Outside Angle, enter 0 deg.

■ For Inside Angle, enter 0 deg.

■ For Height, enter 1 mm.

■ For Shoulder Width, enter 0 mm.

■ For Width, enter 0.75 mm.

■ For Clearance, enter 0.5 mm.

5 Click OK to create the lip.




6 In the Solid Bodies folder in the browser, use the context menu to turn

off the Visibility of the top body. Turn on the visibility for the bottom

body. Orient the view to the inside of the part like the following image.

Next, we will use the Lip command to create the mating groove.

7 Click the Lip command.

Create a Lip | 589



8 On the Shape tab:

■ Make sure the Groove button is selected.


■

Leave the Path Extents unchecked.

■ Click the Pull Direction check box.

■ Select the Y Axis in the Origin folder.




9 On the Groove tab:



■ For Height, enter 1 mm.



■ For Clearance, enter 0 mm.

Create a Lip | 591



10 Click OK to create the groove.

The mating lip and groove features are shown in the following cutaway

view.





Create a Body Using Split

We will now build a sliding cover for the battery compartment. If it is visible,

turn off the visibility for the top body.

1 In the Surface Bodies folder, turn on the Visibility of Srf2. Note

that enabling this surface also turned on the visibility of the stitched

BatterySplitSurface in the browser. You can also enable the surface

visibility by selecting BatterySplitSurface in the browser.

Create a Body Using Split | 593



2 On the ribbon, click 3D Model tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Split.

3 Choose the Split Solid option in the dialog box.

4 Choose Srf2 as the Split Tool, and the bottom body as the Solid to

split.

5 Click OK to finish.

6 A new body is created. Turn off the Visibility of the bottom body

and Srf2 (BatterySplitSurface) before proceeding.





Create a Segmented Lip

Orient the view to match the following image. We will use the Lip command

to create a lip-groove combination on one side of the battery cover limited

by two planes.

1 Create two work planes parallel to the planar side faces of the battery

cover offset -15 mm to the inside.


3 On the Shape tab, make sure the Lip button is selected.

■ Select the internal edges on the far side of the curve as the Path

Edges.

■ Select the Guide Face option, and pick the planar face next to theselected edge.

■ Leave the Pull Direction unchecked.

■ Check the Path Extents box, and select the two planes.

The preview shows the portions of the Lip that are selected (first and

last). If the preview matches the following image, the selection is

correct. If it does not match the preview, click the green and yellow

dots to change the selection.

Create a Segmented Lip | 595



4 On the Lip tab:



■ For Height, enter 0.8 mm.




5 Click OK to create the lip.




The work planes are not shown in the following image. Leave the

visibility of the work planes on to create the mating lip feature on the

bottom body.

6 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover, and turn on the Visibilityof the bottom body.

We will now create the mating groove for the battery cover on the bottom

body.


■ On the Shape tab, click Groove.


■ Select the Guide Face, and pick the planar face next to the edge.

■ Leave the Pull Direction box blank.

■ Click the Path Extents check box and select the two limiting planes.

The default selection of the two outer groove segments is correct.




8 On the Groove tab:



■ For Height, enter 0.8 mm.







9 Click OK to create the groove feature. Turn off the Visibility of the

work planes.

The following image shows the lip and groove features in a cutaway view

of the battery cover and the lower body.





Create a Snap Fit

We will now build a retention mechanism on the battery cover with the Snap

Fit feature. Turn off the Visibility for the lower body and turn on the

Visibility for the battery cover.

First, we will create the two positioning points for the snap feature.

1 Start a 2D sketch on the flat wall of the narrow face, as indicated in

the following image. Make sure that the internal edge is projected so the

sketch points are able to be coincident with the edge.

2 Place two sketch points on the internal projected edge, and use

dimensions to locate them 7.5 mm from the sides. In the following

image, the second dimension is linked to the first dimension. You can

also place two independent dimensions (no fx on the dimension).


4 Click the Snap Fit command.

5 Select the Cantilever Snap Fit Loop style.

6 On the Shape tab:

■ Select the battery cover as the Solid. If it is the only visible solid, it

is automatically selected.

■ Select From Sketch as the Placement type.




■ Select the two sketch points as the Centers. If they are the only

sketch points displayed, they are automatically selected.

■ Click the Flip direction arrow and the Catch direction manipulator

arrows in the graphics area until the clips are oriented as shown in


7 On the Clip tab.

■ For Clip length, enter 4 mm.

■ For Clip width, enter 5 mm.

■ For Clip thickness at wall, enter 0.5 mm.

■ For Clip thickness at top, enter 0.3 mm.

Create a Snap Fit | 601



8 On the Catch tab:

■ For Catch width on both sides, enter 0.5 mm.

■ For Catch opening length, enter 2 mm.

■ For Catch width at top, enter 0.5 mm.

■




9 Click OK to create clips.

A trap mechanism on the bottom solid can be modeled by creating a 2D

sketch on the inside face of the bottom body and using the projected

edges of the catch features to create an extrusion. Fillets are added to theextrusion in this image to facilitate cover insertion and removal.

The steps to create the trap feature are not covered in this exercise.

Create a Snap Fit | 603







Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature

We now want to fillet the edges at the intersection between the Snap Fit and

the battery cover solid. A Rule Fillet can do the job.

1 Click the Rule Fillet command.

■ For Source, select Feature.

■ Select the Snap Fit feature.

■ For Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

■ For Rule, select Against Part.

Add a Rule Fillet to a Feature | 605



We do not want the fillet around the top edges (red arrows). The edges

are included because they share the curved face of the Snap Fit that

coincides with the curved face of the battery body. They are called

"merged faces." We can skip such merged faces (and all the edges they

share) by doing the following:

2 Click More to expand the dialog box.

3 Check the Remove Merged Faces box to enable the option.

4 Click OK to create the rule fillet. Both clips are filleted since they both

belong to the same feature.

5 Save the file.





Create a Boss

This exercise consists of two procedures: creating screw mounting bosses on

the top and bottom bodies, and then creating mating bosses for the thread

portion of the fasteners.

Create a Boss | 607



First, we use work points to model the screw mounting bosses on the top and

bottom bodies.

1 Turn on the Visibility of the bottom body and Work Points 1-4. The

work points are located at the termination position of each boss.


➤

Plastic Part panel ➤

Boss.3 Make sure that the Head button is selected.

4 On the Shape tab:

■ In the Placement area, select On Point from the drop-down menu.

■ Select the four work points as the Centers.

■ For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrows

do not point towards the body.

■ For the target Solid, select the bottom solid.

■ For Fillet, enter 0.3 mm.




5 On the Head tab:

■ For Wall Thickness, enter 1.5 mm.

■ For Shank Height, enter 1.5 mm.

■ For Clamp Height, enter 0.5 mm.

■ For Shank Diameter, enter 3 mm.

■ For Clamp Diameter, enter 7 mm.

■ For Head Diameter, enter 8 mm.

■

For Draft Options, enter 2.5 deg in each field.

Create a Boss | 609



■ Select the Counterbore type.

6 Skip the Ribs tab.

7 Click OK to create the four bosses.




8 Rotate the body to see the recess for the screw head.

Create a Boss | 611



Next, we build the mating bosses for the thread portion of the fasteners.

1 Turn off the Visibility of the battery cover and the bottom solid, and

turn on the Visibility of the top solid.2 Click the Boss command.




3 Make sure that the Thread button is selected.

4 On the Shape tab:

■ In the Placement area, select On Point from the drop-down menu.

■ Select the four work points as the Centers.

■ For Direction, select the Y Axis. Flip the direction if the arrows

do not point towards the body.

■ For the target Solid, select the top.

■ For Fillet, enter 0.3 mm.

5 On the Thread tab:

■ Ensure that Hole is selected, and select Full Depth from thedrop-down menu.

■ For Thread Diameter, enter 8 mm.

■ For Thread Hole Diameter, enter 3 mm.

■ For Inner Draft Angle, enter 1 deg.

■ For Outer Draft Angle, enter 2 deg.

6 On the Ribs tab:

■ Ensure that Stiffening Ribs is selected, and select 2 ul from the

drop-down menu.

■ Fro Rib Thickness, enter 1.5 mm.

■

For Rib Draft, enter 1.5 deg.■ For Shoulder Length, enter 6 mm.

Create a Boss | 613



■ For Top Offset, enter 2 mm.

■ For Shoulder Radius, enter1 mm

.

■ For Shoulder Flare Angle, enter 10 deg.

7 Expand Fillet Options on the Ribs tab:

■ For Rib Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

■ For Blend Radius, enter 0.2 mm.

■ For the Ribs Start Direction Angle, enter 0.

■ For Direction, select the X Axis in the Origin folder.




8 Click OK to create the four bosses with stiffening ribs.

Create a Boss | 615



The following image shows a cutaway view of a boss.

9 If you didn’t change the body appearances earlier in the exercise,

right-click each body in the browser, and then select Properties from

the context menu. Assign a unique body appearance in the Body

Appearance drop-down menu.

10 Save the file.

The plastic features portion of this tutorial is complete.





Add Holes to a Single Body

In the next section, we create new holes in a single body using the Hole

command.

1 Turn off the Visibility of all solid bodies except the top cover.

2 Create two 10-mm holes with a depth of 2 mm on the ends of the rest

feature.

3 Create one 20-mm hole with a depth of 2 mm at the center of the rest

feature.

Notice Autodesk Inventor selects the body being referenced as the default

participant.

NOTE To add participants to the Hole operation, use the Solids selector

and pick additional bodies. An example of this could be if you want multiple

bodies to participate in a “Through All” operation.


Insert a Toolbody Using Derive

You can create solid bodies within a part file and use them as toolbodies in

the Combine command for a cut, join, or intersect operation. You can also

use another component placed in the part file using the Derive command.

Add Holes to a Single Body | 617



We will now use the Derive command to import another part file to use as

a cutting tool later in the exercise.

NOTE If you skipped the plastic features sections, you can open the file

PFTutorial_Revolve_Combine.ipt and begin the tutorial here.


Insert panel ➤

Derive.

2 In the file open dialog box, select the file Control_Button_Solid.ipt.

3 In the Derived Part dialog box, you can select any of the solid body

options, but do not select the surface feature option.

NOTE If the component you are inserting is an assembly, and you choose

to maintain each solid as a solid body, the result is multiple bodies in the

Solid Bodies folder.

4 Click OK to finish.5 The new body is inserted in the part. Rotate the part to view the new

body.


Moving Bodies

In this section, we will use the Move Bodies command to position the

toolbody accurately we imported.




The drop-down menu in the Move Bodies dialog box offers three methods for

moving a body:

■ Free drag (default) - Use to drag the selection in any direction or specifyprecise x,y,z values.

■ Move along ray - Axial move only. Use to drag or specify a precise value

along an axis.

■ Rotate about line - Use to drag the selection or specify a precise angle

around a central axis.

1 View the part from the side to expose the toolbody.


Modify panel ➤

Move Bodies.

3 Select the imported body as the body to move.

4 The body shows a 10 mm offset in the preview. Do not drag the preview.

5 Input the following values:

■ For X Offset, enter 35 mm.

■ For Y Offset, enter 0 mm.

■ For Z Offset, enter 0 mm.

6 Select Click to add, and input the following values:

■ For X Offset, enter 0 mm.

■ For Y Offset, enter 24 mm.

■ For Z Offset, enter 0 mm.

7 Click OK to move the body and exit the command.

Moving Bodies | 619



NOTE Move Body appears in the browser as a feature, and the move was

calculated as a single feature. Using Click to add consumes the least

amount of resources as opposed to doing multiple moves as individual features. You can edit, delete, or suppress individual body moves.


Use the Combine Command

The Combine command provides a means to perform Boolean operations

within a part file. In this exercise, we will use the imported toolbody to cut

out a portion of the upper body.


➤

Modify panel ➤

Combine.

2 Select the upper body as the Base.

3 Select the imported body as the Toolbody. Make sure that Keep

Toolbody is unchecked.

NOTE You can select more than one body to use as toolbodies. The number

in parentheses indicates the total number of selected toolbodies. If Keep

Toolbody is unchecked, the toolbody is consumed and cannot be used

for further operations. If it is checked, the toolbody is available for further

operations.

4 Select the Cut operation.

5 Click OK to cut the toolbody from the top cover and finish the

command.





Create a Body Using Revolve

In this exercise, we use the Revolve command to create a body in the part

file.

1 In the browser, turn on the Visibility of the Revolve_NewBody sketch.

2 Start the Revolve command, and select the profile and axis if necessary.

3 Select New Solid as the modeling operation to perform.

4 Click OK to finish the command and create the solid.

5 Select the new body in the browser, and change the body appearance.


Create a Body Using Revolve | 621



Export the Design as Individual Parts

A multi-body part is a single part file. While it is a great way to control a

design, you cannot create a parts list for the bodies in a multi-body part. You

can use the Make Part or the Make Components command to export

bodies as part files.

In this final segment, we will use the Make Components command to export

all the bodies as derived parts into an assembly.


Layout panel ➤

Make

Components.

2 Select all four of the solid bodies for export. You can select the bodies

in the graphics area or in the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. Make

sure that all bodies to be exported are visible.

NOTE Pay attention to which body highlights as you add selections. It helps

you to assign the proper part names when you export them.

3 Assign the target assembly a unique name. Leave all the other selections

at the default settings and select Next to continue.

4 Assign each body a new part name.

5 If you completed the tutorial in sequence:

■ The first body is the top cover

■ The second body is the battery cover

■ The third body is the bottom cover

■

The fourth body is the revolved control button.6 Click OK to create the assembly.

The assembly opens in a new window. All the bodies are present in the

browser as grounded part files.




The part file controls the master design. If changes are made to a body

in the originating part file, the part will update in the assembly.


Summary

In this tutorial, you:■ Used Split to create new bodies.

Summary | 623



■ Created plastic features using the Plastic Part commands.

■ Used the Hole command to modify a single body.

■ Inserted a toolbody using the Derive command.

■ Used the Move Bodies command to position a body.

■ Used the Combine command to perform a cut operation on a body.

■ Created a body in place using the Revolve command.

■ Used Make Components to export bodies into an assembly as individual

part files.

Previous (page 622)




Studio - Renderings

About this tutorial

Render models in Studio.



Tutorial File Used




as instructed.

Objectives

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools,



Navigation Tips



Next (page 626)

24

625







Get Started


Activate Studio

On the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤

Begin panel ➤

Inventor

Studio.


Render

1 On the ribbon, click Render tab ➤

Render panel ➤

Render Image.

2 Ensure that Current View is selected on the Camera menu.

NOTE Because the aspect ratio of your current window may not agree with

the aspect ratio defined for your rendering, Autodesk Inventor draws a

rectangle in the graphics window showing the area to be rendered. You can

adjust your view before creating your rendering.

3 Ensure Table Top is selected on the Lighting Style menu.

4 Click Render. The program renders the model according to the chosen

styles and the size of the model relative to the render area.

When rendering finishes, close the Render Output window.


626 | Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings



Change Styles

1 In the Render Image dialog box, click Select Output Size

and then select 640 x 480 from the Resolution menu. You can adjust

the size and view of the model to fit within the render rectangle, as

needed.

2 Select Desktop from the Lighting Style drop-down menu.

3 On the Output tab, select High Antialiasing , and click Render.

The Render process takes some time. If you do not want to wait for the

model to complete the rendering process, click Cancel Rendering .

You can specify different cameras, lighting, and scene styles for rendering

from the Render dialog box. It is not necessary to activate them.

4 Close the Render Output and Render Image dialog boxes when finished.


Change Appearance

Next, you change the appearance of the arbor press frame.

1 Select the Arbor_Frame component in the graphics window or browser,

and then select Aluminum (Cast) from the Appearance Overridepulldown list. The list is located at the top of the Autodesk Inventor

window in the Quick Access Toolbar and shows the current appearance

selection.

2 Click Render Image.

3 Select 320 x 240 from the Resolution menu.

4 Select the Output tab, and then change the Antialiasing to Low

Antialiasing .

5 Click Render.


Change Styles | 627



Save Image

1 Click Save Rendered Image.

2 Browse to an appropriate directory, and assign a file name.

3 Select a file type from the Save as type menu, and then click Save.

The rendered image is now available for direct use in your documentation

files, or you can edit the image further in a graphics editing software

application.

4 Close the Render Output window.


Image Extents

Notice that the program renders the image within the space defined by the

rectangle in the graphics window. In this example, the reflection is cut off at

the bottom edge of the graphics window. Experiment with different resolutions

and adjust the model view to allow space for reflection and shadow effects,

as needed.

For example:

1 Select the General tab in the Render Image dialog box.

2 Enter 300 in the Width field, and enter 600 in the Height field.

3 Ensure that Lock Aspect Ratio is not selected.

4 View your results.


Summary

Previous (page 628)

628 | Chapter 24 Studio - Renderings



Studio - Animations

About this tutorial

Animate an assembly in Inventor Studio.



Tutorial File Used




as instructed.

Objectives

Prerequisites

■ Know how to set the , navigate the model space with the various view tools,



Navigation Tips



25

629







Activate Studio

1 On the ribbon, click Environments tab ➤

Begin panel ➤

Inventor

Studio .

2 In the browser, right-click the node named Lighting (Table Top), and

then remove the check mark next to Visibility. This change removes

the lighting symbols from the graphics window.

3 Activate a scene style for the best rendering. Several scene styles are

provided and you can create new ones.

Prepare

Start at the Beginning

Click Go to Start on the animation timeline window to set the animation

slider to the beginning of the timeline.

Watch Your Animation

1 Click Play Animation.

630 | Chapter 25 Studio - Animations



2 Click the following image to play an animation.

3 When the slider moves past 3 seconds, click Stop Animation.

Configure the Animation

Before you continue, change the overall length of the animation so you do

not need to continue to press Stop.

1 To the right of the camera selection field in the Animation Timeline,

click Animation Options.

2 On the upper-right side of the Animation Options dialog box, click Fit

to Current Animation.

Configure the Animation | 631



3 Click OK to recalibrate the timeline.

Notice that the scale on the animation timeline changes from the default30 seconds to 3 seconds.

NOTE This value is the total time available for all animation actions. To

increase (or decrease) the time, click Configure and specify the duration.

Animate Camera Viewpoint

1 In the browser, right-click the Cameras node, and then select Create

Camera from View from the context menu.

NOTE You can also right-click in the graphics window, and then select

Create Camera from View.

2 The camera also appears in the graphics window. By default, the

line-of-sight vector is normal to the screen. Orbit the model and zoom

out to see the camera symbol and vector.

The camera consists of three parts: the camera, the line-of-sight vector,

and the target.

632 | Chapter 25 Studio - Animations



Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued)

1 Use the ViewCube or the Orbit command to adjust the viewpoint to

approximate the following image.


Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued)

1 Click Add Camera Action on the animation timeline.

2 Click Go to Start, and then click Play.

The program animates the movement of the ram, the fade, and the

change in camera viewpoint simultaneously.

Summary

■ Set the active animation.

■ Animate a camera position change.

■ Add a new camera from the graphics window.

■ Change the camera from the drop-down list.

■ Change the animation length option to match the existing event duration.

■ Expand and collapse the animation timeline.

■ Hide graphic objects representing lights and cameras.

Animate Camera Viewpoint (continued) | 633



634



Studio - Positional Rep-resentations

About this tutorialCreate and animate positional representations in the assembly environment.



Arbor_Press.iamTutorial File Used



sets and the required Tutorial Files Installation Instructions, and install the datasetsas instructed.

In Autodesk Inventor, you can evaluate various component positions in a

moving assembly by creating positional representations in the assembly

environment. You can use the positional representations within Inventor Studio

as keyframes in your assembly animations.

Objectives

■ Create and animate the positional representations of an assembly using

Inventor Studio.

■ Create positional representations in the assembly environment.

■ Activate Inventor Studio.

■ Animate the positional representations for an assembly.

26

635







Prerequisites

■ Know assembly and part fundamentals in Autodesk Inventor.

■ Know how to set the active project and navigate model space with the

various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 636)

Open Sample File

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, navigate to the Arbor Press

folder, and then open Arbor_Press.iam.

2 Click , and then select Save As. Use

Arbor_Press_Rep_Anim.iam for the file name.

636 | Chapter 26 Studio - Positional Representations




Create Three Positional Representations

1 Expand the Representations folder.

Create Three Positional Representations | 637



2 Right-click the Position folder, and select New to create a new positional

representation. The program creates the positional representation

Position 1 and sets it as the active positional representation.

3 Rename Position1 to Rest Position (0 deg).

4 Repeat the previous process to create two additional positional

representations named Middle Position (-45 deg) and Closed

Position (-160 deg).

NOTE To rename a browser node, slowly double-click the node to enter editing

mode, and then enter the name.

Currently, these three positional representations are identical. In the following

steps, you adjust them so that they contain different representations of the

assembly. You then use Inventor Studio to animate between these saved

positions.Previous (page 636) | Next (page 638)

Define the First Positional Representation

1 Double-click the Master positional representation to make it active.

2 Expand the PINION SHAFT:1 component node to see the constraints

for this part.

3 Right-click the constraint Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) and clear

the Suppress box to activate the constraint.

4 Next, double-click the Rest Position (0 deg) positional representation

to make this representation active.

5 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint and select

Override.

6 Select the Suppression option.

7 Ensure that Enable appears in the menu.

8 Select the Value option.

9 Set the value to 0 deg .




10 Click OK to apply the override and close the dialog box.


Define the First Positional Representation | 639



Define the Second Positional Representation

Next, you use the same process to define the other two representations.

1 Double-click the Middle Position (-45 deg) representation to make

this representation active.

2 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint, and

select Override.




6 Set the value to -45 deg .




7 Click OK.


Define the Second Positional Representation | 641



Define the Third Positional Representation

1 Double-click the Closed Position (-160 deg) representation to make

this representation active.

2 Right-click the Angle SHAFT TURN (180.00 deg) constraint, and

select Override.




6 Set the value to -160 deg .

7 Click OK.


Activate Studio


Begin panel ➤

Inventor Studio .

Studio commands are located on the Render tab.

2 In the browser, right-click Lighting (Table Top), and then remove

the check mark next to Visibility. It removes the lighting symbols from

the graphics window.

3 Right-click the Animations node, and select New Animation. Expand

the Animations node, and double-click Animation2 (the animation

node you created).

The program activates the new animation and opens the Studio timeline.





Reduce the Timeline Length

Before you start, change the overall timeline of the animation to 7 seconds

so you do not have to press Stop after the animation.

1 On the right side of the animation timeline, click Animation Options.

2 In the Length section of the dialog box, double-click in the Secondsfield on the right and enter 7 as the new value. Click OK. The timeline

adjusts to 7 seconds.


Create the First Animation

1 Click Render tab

➤

Animate panel ➤

Pos Reps.

2 In the dialog box, ensure Master is selected in the Start field.

Reduce the Timeline Length | 643



3 Select the positional representation named Rest position (0 deg) from

the list of representations under the End field.

In the next steps, you set the length of this animation event before you


4 In the Time section of the dialog box, click Specify .

5 Enter a value of 2 in the End field located on the right.

6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box.


View the Keyframes

To view the keyframes, click the Expand/Collapse Action Editor command

on the right of the animation timeline.

NOTE In the Animation Timeline editor, the blue keyframes ( parent ) are action

segments that have child keyframes displayed in gray. You can adjust both the

parent and child keyframes. Child keyframes always fall within the parent keyframes.

NOTE To edit a segment with the Animate Positional Representation dialog box,

right-click the segment in the timeline and select Edit. Alternatively, double-click

the segment.





Create the Second Animation

1 Click the Animate PR command again.

2

This time, select the positional representation named Rest position (0

deg) from the Start field.

3 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the End field.4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.

5 Enter a value of 2 in the Start field and a value of 4 in the End field.

6 Click OK to create this animation and close the dialog box.


Create the Third Animation

Repeat these steps to create the third positional representation animation:

1 Click the Animate PR command again.

Create the Second Animation | 645



2 Select Middle position (-45 deg) from the Start field.

3 Select Closed position (-160 deg) for the End field.

4 In the Time section, click the Specify command.

5 Enter 4 in the Start field and 7 in the End field.

6 Click OK. Your timeline should match the following image.


Play the Animation

1 In the Animation Timeline editor, click the Go to Start command.

2 Click Play to play the positional representation animations.

3 Click the following image to view an animation.





Edit the Animation

Next, you change the length of the animation segments.

1 In the animation timeline, drag the beginning node for PRAnim3 to

the 5.5 second position on the timeline.

2 Drag the end node for PRAnim2 to 5 seconds.

3 Drag the begin node for PRAnim2 to 3 seconds.

4 Click the following image to view an animation.

TIP To move an animation segment, select and drag the segment.

Play the animation back to see the effect of the changes.


Summary

In this tutorial, you learned to:

■ Create named positional representations within an assembly by overriding

the value of a constraint.

Edit the Animation | 647



■ Create a sequence of related positional representations.

■ Use Inventor Studio to animate between positional representations.

■ Edit the start and end positions of animation events by dragging on the

timeline.

Previous (page 647)




Skeletal Modeling

About this tutorial

Build skeletal model frames.



SkeletonBase.iptTutorial File Used




as instructed.

Build a skeletal model frame that supports a spherical tank. The frame is

associatively tied to the spherical tank. Adjust the size of the tank, and the

completed frame automatically adjusts to match the change.

Prerequisites



and extruding.


Navigation Tips



27

649







Next (page 650)

Open the Sample Model

You use a supplied sample model, which is the completed skeleton part, to

derive the required frame parts. Examine this part before you create the

assembly.

TIP Keep the skeleton model open as you build the assembly. In a complicated

skeleton model, consider hiding sketches and other geometry to reduce the filtering

required when deriving the skeleton model into the assembly components.

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files.

2 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt.The part contains sketches, work features, and construction surfaces that

define the basic geometry of a support frame for a spherical container.

Skeleton models are suitable for static models, such as frames and other

fabricated assemblies. The initial jumble of geometry may look a bit

confusing, so we will look at the individual sketches and other geometry

in the part.

650 | Chapter 27 Skeletal Modeling



3 In the Model browser, drag the End of Part marker and drop it just

below the STRAP SURFACE node.


Navigate panel ➤

View Face,

and then click CIRC STRAP SKETCH in the Model browser.

Open the Sample Model | 651



1 - Strap Surface Profile

2 - Strap Surface

3 - Strap Body Profile

The spherical construction surface is the key feature in the part. The

diameter of the sphere drives the other geometry in this skeleton, and

consequently drives the size of parts derived from this skeleton.

The shared strap sketch contains two related profiles:

■ A body profile that you will use to revolve a strap encircling the

sphere.

■ A surface profile used to create the strap surface feature. This featureis used as a termination surface for supports between the strap and

the external frame surrounding the sphere. Further information is

provided when the supports are created later in this tutorial.

NOTE The two sketch profiles are linked by parameter values.

5 Drag the End of Part marker below the Work Plane-BOTT of Frame

node in the Model browser, and examine the location of the three work

planes.

The three work planes below STRAP SURFACE define the vertical

extents of the exterior frame. The BOTT of Frame work plane is used

as the termination face for the vertical legs of the frame. The sketch for

the vertical leg is on the TOP of Frame work plane.




6 Drag the End of Part marker below the VERTICAL LEGS SKETCH

node in the Model browser. Use the View Face command to reorient

your view like the following image.

The sketch contains a profile for the square tubing leg. The 2240-mm

dimension is related to the diameter of the sphere. The size and thickness

of the tubing is controlled with user-defined parameters. The followingimage shows the size of the tubing controlled by the TubeSize user

parameter. The user-defined parameters are exported, and thus can be

referenced by any of the parts derived from the skeleton part.

Open the Sample Model | 653



7 Drag the End of Part marker to the bottom of the Model browser.

Examine the remaining sketches. Note that all sketches are related

through projected geometry, work feature definition, or parameters. The

sphere diameter drives all the critical dimensions of the frame.


Create an Assembly

Now you build a new assembly based on the skeleton part.

1 Start an assembly based on the Standard(mm).iam template.


Component panel ➤

Create.

In the Create In-Place Component dialog box:

■ Enter Strap as the name of the new component.




■ If your standard part template is inch-based, click the Browse

Templates button to the right of the Template list. Click the

Metric tab of the Open Template dialog box, and then select theStandard(mm).ipt template. Click OK to return to the Create

In-Place Component dialog box.

■ Click OK to create the Strap part in the assembly.

■ Expand the Origin folder in the Model browser, and place the

component on the XY Plane of the assembly origin.

3 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon to exit the sketch environment.

4 Delete Sketch1 in the Strap part to tidy up the Model browser.


Insert panel ➤

Derive. From the Tutorial

Files folder, select the SkeletonBase.ipt file and open it. The Derived

Part dialog box opens.

6 The Strap part requires only the CIRC STRAP SKETCH. Expand Sketchesin the Derived Part dialog box. Select the CIRC STRAP SKETCH node,

and click the Add button (+) at the top of the dialog box. Alternatively,

you can click the Exclude icon on the node itself to switch its

status.

You may receive a warning that the base component will be modified.

It is fine. Click OK to allow the sketch to be exported.

7 If the Work Geometry icon is in a hybrid state (half yellow and half

gray), click the icon to change it to an Exclude state .

NOTE Sketches, surfaces, and work geometry must be visible in the

originating part to derive into the new part. You can turn off the visibility of

items before using the Derived Component command. It reduces the

number of items you must clear in the dialog box.

8 Ensure the icons next to Surfaces Bodies and Parameters are set tothe Exclude state.




9 Click OK and reposition the geometry in the graphics window. Click

Return. The part should match the following image.


Create panel ➤

Revolve. Select the closed

profile of the strap.

11 Click Axis in the Revolve dialog box, and then select the line highlighted


12 Click OK to create the Strap part.




TIP You can add features to the part as you can with any part created from

scratch. The derived sketch controls the size and position of the base feature

in this example. You can use Derived Component at any point in the

modeling process, not just as the first feature in a part. For example, a second

feature derived from the component might bring in a second sketch, It is

then used to add or subtract geometry from the first feature based on the

derived component.

13 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to the assembly

level.

14 Save the assembly. Use Skeleton.iam for the file name.





Create a Frame Leg

Next, create a leg from the skeleton part and then ground it in the assembly.


Component panel ➤

Create.

2 Enter Leg as the part name, and base the part on the

Standard(mm).ipt template.

3 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

4 Expand the Origin folder under Skeleton.iam in the browser. Click

the XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the assembly origin.

NOTE This step is critical to aligning all parts based on the skeleton model.

5 Exit the sketch in the new part, and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the

Model browser.6 Use the Derive command to derive the SkeletonBase.ipt part into

the Leg part.

7 Exclude all sketches other than VERTICAL LEGS SKETCH.

8 Expand Work Geometry in the Derived Part dialog box, and exclude

all work features other than Work Plane-BOTT of Frame.

9 Exclude Surface Bodies and Parameters from the derived component.

10 Click OK.


Create panel ➤

Extrude. Extrude the tube

profile highlighted in the following illustration.

■ Click the Extents button flyout arrow in the Extrude mini-toolbar,

and select To selected face/point. Then, click the derived workplane in the graphics window.

■ Click the green Ok button to complete the feature.




1 - Extrude to workplane

2 - Profile

12 Expand SkeletonBase.ipt in the Model browser. Right-click Work

Plane - BOTT of Frame, and remove the checkmark next to

Visibility.

13 Finally, return to the assembly environment. Right-click Leg in the

Model browser and select Grounded from the pop-up context menu.



Create a Frame Subassembly

Next, you create the three tubes that form one side of the frame. Two of the

tubes are identical, so creating them as separate parts might not be the best

solution for a parts list or BOM.

You use a subassembly in a slight variation of the preceding workflows. In

this workflow:

■ First, you create a subassembly in-place in the assembly. In the subassembly,

you first create a frame layout from a derived sketch. This sketch is not

used to create solid geometry.

■ Next, create the two different tube parts in the subassembly, using thesame skeleton technique you used previously.

Create a Frame Subassembly | 659



■ Finally, place a second instance of one frame tube, and assemble it using

assembly constraints. The second instance of the tube is constrained to

the derived sketch in the layout part.

NOTE You incorporate the vertical leg in the subassembly later in this topic.


Component panel ➤

Create.


■ Enter Frame as the assembly name.

■ Base the assembly on the Standard(mm).iam template.

2 Click OK.

3 Click the assembly origin XY Plane in the Model browser to align the

subassembly to the top-level assembly. The Frame subassembly is the

active component in the assembly.4 Click Assemble tab ➤

Component panel ➤

Create. In the Create

In-Place Component dialog box:

■ Enter FrameLayout as the part name.

■ Base the part on the Standard(mm).ipt template.

5 Click OK.

6 Align the part to the XY plane of the Frame subassembly origin. Because

it is the first part in the subassembly, it is grounded and aligned to the

subassembly origin.


Model browser.

8 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part. Exclude all geometry otherthan the FRAME SKETCH sketch. Your part should match the following

image.

NOTE Other geometry may be visible in your graphics window. You can

navigate the Model browser and turn visibility off for other geometry to

replicate the image as shown. However, this action is not necessary to

continue the tutorial.




9 Click Return on the Quick Access toolbar to return to the

subassembly environment. The FrameLayout part should be grounded.

10 Click Assemble tab ➤

Component panel ➤

Create. In the Create

In-Place Component dialog box:

■ Enter HorTube as the part name.


11 Click OK.

12 Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam in the Model browser.

Click the XY Plane node. It aligns the part origin to the subassembly

origin.


Model browser.

14 Derive SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part:

■ Exclude all sketches other than the FRAME SKETCH sketch.

■ Exclude Work Geometry and Surface Bodies from the derived

part.

Create a Frame Subassembly | 661



■ Include Parameters. You use one of the parameters from the

skeleton part to control the extrusion distance of the base feature in

the new part.

NOTE Reference Parameters and External Parameters cannot

be included.

15 Click OK.


Create panel ➤

Extrude. Select the profile

highlighted in the following illustration.

1 - Profile to select

17 In the Extrude mini-toolbar, click the arrow next to the value input box

containing the 10 mm default extrusion distance. Select List

Parameters from the pop-up context menu. Click TubeSize in the

Parameters list.

18 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature.

19 Add a 5 mm fillet to the four long edges of the new part.


Modify panel ➤

Shell. Select the two end

faces of the extrusion.

21 Click the arrow next to the Thickness edit box in the Shell dialog box,

and select List Parameters from the pop-up context menu.




22 Click TubeThickness in the Parameters list.

23 Click OK.

Your part should match the one shown in the following image.

NOTE With some additional work geometry in the skeleton model, you can

create the end profile for the horizontal tube, like the vertical leg tube. It

eliminates the need to add additional features to the part, but the additional

complexity of the skeleton model may outweigh that advantage.

24 Return to the Frame subassembly.


Create a Diagonal Tube

Following the same steps used to create the horizontal tube, create a diagonal

tube in the frame subassembly.


Component panel ➤

Create.


■ Enter DiagTube as the part name.


■ Click OK.

Create a Diagonal Tube | 663



2 Expand the Origin folder of the Frame subassembly. Click the XY

Plane in the Model browser to align the part to the subassembly origin.

3 Exit the initial sketch and then delete Sketch1 to tidy up the Model

browser.

4 Derive the FRAME SKETCH sketch and User Parameters from

SkeletonBase.ipt into the new part.

5 Extrude the profile highlighted in the following image by first linking

the extrusion distance to the derived TubeSize parameter.

6 Add a 5 mm fillet to the long edges of the part.

7 Shell the part and link the shell thickness to the derived TubeThickness

parameter.

1 - Profile

8 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and ground the DiagTube.ipt

part.





Add a Second Horizontal Tube

To complete the frame subassembly, you add a second occurrence of the

HorTube part. You then constrain this occurrence to the other frame members

and the frame layout sketch.

1 With the Frame subassembly active, drag HorTube:1 from the Model

browser and drop it in the graphics window.


Position panel ➤

Constrain.

Click the Flush solution in the Place Constraint dialog box.

3 Add a Flush constraint between the two faces highlighted in the

following image.

Add a Second Horizontal Tube | 665



4 Add a second Flush constraint between the end faces of the two tubes

as highlighted in the following image.

5 Click the Mate solution in the Place Constraint dialog box.6 Click the face highlighted in the following image, and then click the

visible sketch edge, which is also highlighted. The edge is geometry in

the derived sketch in the FrameLayout part.

7 Apply the constraint, and then click Cancel to close the Place Constraint

dialog box.




1 - Sketch Line

8 Turn off the Visibility of the FrameLayout part in the subassembly.

9 Save your work.


Derived Surface from SkeletonFinally, you create a left-hand and right-hand support to connect the frame

to the strap. The supports use a derived construction surface as the termination

surface for an extrusion.

1 With the Frame subassembly active, create a component named

SupportLeft in-place in the subassembly. Base the part on the

Standard(mm).ipt template. Select the subassembly origin XY Plane

as the initial sketch plane. Exit the initial sketch and delete Sketch1 to

tidy up the browser.

2 Derive the SkeletonBase part into the new part:

■ Exclude all sketches other than SUPPORTS SKETCH from the

derived part.

Derived Surface from Skeleton | 667



■ Exclude Work Geometry and Parameters from the derived part.

■ Expand Surface Bodies in the Derived Part dialog box.

■ Exclude all surfaces other than Srf2 from the derived part.

3 Click OK to complete the feature. Your assembly should match the one


You might be asking why the separate strap surface is required. Why not

create a solid body of the strap in the skeleton, and then derive the solid

body as a solid or surface body into the support part?

Notice that the strap surface feature is a single 180-degree revolved surface

that matches the outer surface of the strap. The support tube profile will

be extruded to this surface. If the termination surface provides more

than one solution, the maximum termination is always the result. See

the following image for an example.

You can choose a minimum or maximum solution for an extrusion

termination.




1 - Extrude to 360 degree extrude strap

2 - Extrude to 180 degree extrude strap


Create panel ➤

Extrude.

Select the profile highlighted in the following image.

5 Click the Extents button flyout arrow in the Extrude mini-toolbar, and

select To selected face/point.

Derived Surface from Skeleton | 669



6 Click the derived surface highlighted in the following image.

7 Click the More tab in the Extrude dialog box, and then select the

Minimum Solution option.

8 Click OK to complete the feature and close the Extrude dialog box.

1 - Extrude

2 - Profile

9 Return to the Frame subassembly level, and then ground the

SupportLeft part.

10 Repeat the previous steps to create a right-hand support named

SupportRight. Derive the same sketch and surface into the new part,and then extrude the other tube profile in the sketch to the termination

surface. The Frame subassembly should match the one in the following

image.

11 Expand the derived SkeletonBase feature under the SupportLeft and

SupportRight parts, and turn off the visibility of Srf2 to tidy up the

Model browser.





Complete the Frame Subassembly

The vertical leg belongs in the Frame subassembly. Because there are noassembly constraints, you can freely drag components between subassembly

levels without fear of breaking the assembly structure.

1 Return to the top-level assembly (Skeleton.iam).

2 Drag Leg:1 in the Model browser, and drop it below

FrameLayout.ipt:1.

3 Right-click the Frame subassembly in the Model browser and select

Edit.

4 On the ribbon, click Assemble tab ➤ Component panel ➤

Pattern. In the Model browser or graphics window, select all parts in

the subassembly except FrameLayout.ipt.

Complete the Frame Subassembly | 671



5 In the Pattern Component dialog box:

■ Click the Circular tab.

■ Click the Axis Direction button.

■ Expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam and click Y Axis.

■ Enter 4 in the Count edit box.

■ Enter 90 in the Angle edit box.

■ Click OK.

6 Return to the top-level assembly. Ground Frame.iam if you have not

already done so. The assembly should match the one in the following

image.


NOTE Component appearances have been changed for clarity in the followingimage.





Assembly Update

The skeleton part controls all changes to the assembly components. In this

exercise, you change the sphere diameter in the skeleton part and examine

the changes in the assembly.

1 OpenSkeletonBase.ipt, or activate its window if the file is already

open.


Parameters panel ➤

Parameters. Scroll down to the User Parameters area in the

Parameters dialog box.

3 Enter 900 in the Equation cell of the SphereDiameter user parameter.

4 Click Done.

5 Return to the assembly file.6 Click Local Update on the Quick Access toolbar. The assembly

changes to reflect the smaller sphere diameter. Your assembly should

match the one shown in the following image.


Assembly Update | 673



Summary

Skeletal modeling is an efficient and versatile technique for building assemblies

with Autodesk Inventor software. The application of this technique is limited

only by your imagination. The lack of assembly constraints and absence of

adaptive relationships can improve the performance and robustness of assembly

updates. Setting up a skeleton or master model takes some planning, but the

ability to control an assembly easily from a single source can be worth the

effort.

Previous (page 673)




iCopy: Creating

28

675



Use iCopy

Place iCopy results in a target assembly. Constrain the copies and determine

which components to copy or reuse.


15-30 minutesTime Required

676 | Chapter 28 iCopy: Creating



Frame-start.iam, Target.iam, Skeleton-frame.ipt, Plate1.iptTutorial Files

Used





Learn how to

■ Place iCopy results

■ Constrain iCopy content

■ Constrain an iCopy pattern

■ Copy/Reuse iCopy

Prerequisites

■ Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and

perform common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting

geometry.

■ Have a basic understanding of adaptivity and how it affects parts and

assemblies.

■ Understand the basics of skeleton modeling.

■ Read the iCopy concept to understand the terms that are associated with

iCopy commands.

The iCopy command automates the process of copying and positioning similar

components in the main assembly. TheiCopy command creates one ormultiple copies of an iCopy template and adds each copy to the target

assembly. Each iCopy result can vary slightly from other iCopy results in the

pattern depending on the adaptivity that was defined in the iCopy template.

Creating an iCopy template is discussed in the Create iCopy Template tutorial.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 678)

Use iCopy | 677







Open Target Assembly

The target assembly is host to the iCopy results and contains the geometry

necessary to position the iCopy results. The target assembly geometry needs

to correspond to the iCopy template. Thus, it is a good idea to understand

what the iCopy template expects as inputs. This image shows the iCopy

template and highlights the points that are used by the target assembly

geometry.




To place a single iCopy result, you need a work point that corresponds with

each point defined in the iCopy template. To place multiple iCopy results,

you need a work point for each point in the iCopy definition. You also needa rail to define the path for each work point, a work plane to define the

position of the iCopy results, and a path for the pattern.

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files. Open Target.iam located in

\Tutorial Files\iCopy .

Open Target Assembly | 679



2 The assembly contains a single part. The part contains sketch geometry

and work points. You use the work points to position iCopy results.


iCopy

Use the iCopy command to position iCopy results. First, select the iCopy

template to use. Then select geometry to position, size and pattern the iCopy

results, and control the copy or reuse of components.

1 On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab

➤

Component panel

➤

iCopy command.

2 Select Frame-start.iam and click Open. This assembly has been

authored using the iCopy Author command. The Constrain iCopy

dialog box displays.


Constrain iCopy

In the Constrain iCopy dialog box, position the iCopy result in the target

assembly. Select work points to position the geometry. You can modify values

for any parameters included in the iCopy definition.

1 Select the Path pattern tab on the Constrain iCopy dialog box.

2 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for the

Lower left point.




3 Select the work point at the end of the green line for the Lower right

point.

Constrain iCopy | 681



4 Select the work point at the end of the blue line for the Upper left

point.




5 Select the work point at the end of the yellow spline for the Upper

right point.

Constrain iCopy | 683



6 In the FrameH (Frame Height) field, enter 125 mm.

7 In the FrameW (Frame Width) field, enter 125 mm. Press ENTER toaccept the new value. The preview updates for the first instance of the

iCopy pattern.





Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern

In the Constrain iCopy dialog box, pattern the iCopy results in the target

assembly. Rails are automatically selected based on the work points used to

position the iCopy. The rails control the positioning of work points for

additional iCopy results. You select a path to determine the direction of the

iCopy results pattern. A work plane is used to determine the position of the

iCopy results. This work plane is selected automatically.

1 Select Path in the Constrain iCopy dialog box.2 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern.

Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern | 685



The Work Plane is selected automatically, based on the selected path.

3 Enter 8 in the Instance number field.4 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field.




5 Click Next.


Constrain iCopy - Path Pattern | 687



Copy and Reuse iCopy Components

In the Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box, copy or reuse components

in the iCopy definition. Components that are reused are referenced by all

iCopy results. Select Reuse for components that do not change between iCopy

results. Select Copy for components that change between iCopy results.

1 Click Next. The plates reference the same part file for each iCopy result

(reuse). All other components are copied for each iCopy result (copy).


iCopy: File Names

In the iCopy: File Names dialog box, modify file names and the location path

for parts and assemblies that the iCopy command creates. You can modify

names individually, or add a prefix or suffix to all file names automatically.

1 Check the Prefix box in the Naming Scheme area of the iCopy: File

Names dialog box.

2 Enter My- in the Prefix field and click Apply in the Naming Scheme

area of the dialog box. All file names update with the prefix.

3 Click OK in the iCopy: File Names dialog box to create the files.

NOTE If your assembly does not appear as shown in the following image,

click the Local Update button on the Manage tab to update the

iCopy results.




4 Review the relationship between the template points and target points

and rail to see the effect these had on the results.Close the file. Do not

save changes. The Target.iam assembly is used later for the authoring

exercise.


iCopy: File Names | 689



Summary


■ Place iCopy results in a target assembly.

■ Constrain an iCopy result.

■ Constrain an iCopy patterned result.

■ Use Copy/Reuse to manage the placed components.

What Next? Now that you know what iCopy can do when placing results,

follow the Create an iCopy Template tutorial and learn how to build the

template for this powerful command.

Previous (page 688)




Use iCopy

About this tutorial

Complete a skeleton assembly and author the assembly to use with iCopy.


45-60 minutesTime Required

Frame-start.iam, Target.iam, Skeleton-frame.ipt, Plate1.iptTutorial Files Used




as instructed.

Learn how to

■ Create a skeleton assembly

■ Prepare an assembly for the iCopy Author

■ Test the assembly

■ Author an iCopy template

Prerequisites

■ Know how to navigate model space with the various view tools, and perform

common modeling functions, such as sketching and selecting geometry.

■ Have a basic understanding of adaptivity and how it affects parts and

assemblies.

29

691







■ Understand the basics of skeleton modeling.

■ Review the iCopy Help Concept and familiarize yourself with iCopy terms.

iCopy combines skeletal modeling and adaptivity to allow the subassembly

to change shape to fit its position in the model. The iCopy Author command

creates an iCopy template from an adaptive skeleton assembly. TheiCopy

command creates one or multiple copies of the iCopy template and adds each

copy to the target assembly. Each assembly (iCopy result) can vary slightly

from other iCopy results in the pattern depending on the adaptivity that was

used in the iCopy template.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 692)

Open the Template Layout Part

Now you examine the files that compose the iCopy template, then author an

iCopy template. The template layout part is the base part for the skeleton

assembly that is the iCopy template. The template layout part contains the

geometry that is derived into the skeleton components.

1 OpenSkeleton-frame.ipt.

692 | Chapter 29 Use iCopy



2 This file contains several sketches, work geometry, and surface features.

■ Sketch1 contains the layout geometry for the skeleton model.

■ Sketch2 through Sketch7 contain the profiles used to create the frame

members.

■ The work planes are used to position the sketches.

■ Sketch8 is used to create ExtrusionSrf13 through ExtrusionSrf18.

Open the Template Layout Part | 693



■ ExtrusionSrf13 through ExtrusionSrf18 are used to terminate the

extrusions for the frames.

3 Right-click Sketch1 and select Adaptive.



Create the iCopy Template Assembly

The iCopy template assembly contains the skeleton geometry that is used to

create an iCopy definition. You create an assembly, place the

Skeleton-frame.ipt component, and then constrain it.

1 Begin a new assembly based on the Standard (mm).iam template.2 Use the Place Component command to place one instance of

Skeleton-frame.ipt located in the \Tutorial Files\iCopy folder.




3 Right-click Skeleton-frame:1 in the Model browser and select

Adaptive.

4 Save the assembly as Frame.iam in the \Tutorial Files\iCopy folder..


Create the iCopy Template Assembly | 695



Constrain the Template Layout Part

For the iCopy results to update properly, the origin of the template layout

part must be constrained to the origin of the assembly. The template layout

part can remain grounded.

1 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1

and Frame.iam.

2 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box,

■ Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush

option.

■ In the Origin folder of Skeleton-frame:1, select the XY Plane.

■ In the Origin folder of Frame.iam, select the XY Plane.

■ Click Apply.

3 Repeat to create flush constraints between XZ/XZ planes and YZ/YZ

planes.

4 Close the Place Constraint dialog box.


iCopy Author - Layout tab

The iCopy Author prepares an assembly for the iCopy command. To use an

assembly as an iCopy template, the assembly must contain a skeleton part

that drives the other parts in the assembly. The skeleton part must containan adaptive sketch. You select points in the sketch to use as the control points

for placing the iCopy. The parameters in the skeleton part can be added to

the iCopy template. These parameters give greater control over the size and

shape of the assembly and its components.

1 On the ribbon, click the Manage tab ➤

Author panel ➤

iCopy

Author command.

2 In the Model browser, select Skeleton-frame:1. After the layout part

is selected, the Geometry, Parameter, and Document tabs become

available.





iCopy Author - Geometry tab

On the Geometry tab, select and name the control points in the layout part.

The control points are used to position the iCopy result when it is placed in

an assembly. These points must be geometry points (endpoints of lines, center

points of circles, but not sketch points).

1 Select the Geometry tab.

2 In the Geometry column, click Click to add.

3 Select the point in the lower-left corner of the frame.

4 In the Label field, enter Lower left.

5 In the Geometry column, click Click to add.

6 Select the point in the lower-right corner of the frame.

iCopy Author - Geometry tab | 697



7 In the Label field, enter Lower right.

8 In the Geometry column, click Click to add.9 Select the point at the left end of the upper middle frame member.




10 In the Label field, enter Upper left.

11 In the Geometry column, click Click to add.12 Select the point at the right end of the upper middle frame member.

iCopy Author - Geometry tab | 699



13 In the Label field, enter Upper right. Press ENTER to accept the input.

NOTE To remove a work point from the list, highlight the Geometry and Label

fields then press Delete.


iCopy Author - Parameter tab

On the Parameter tab, include parameters from the layout part in the iCopy

template. You can modify the parameter values when placing the iCopy in

the target assembly.

1 Select the Parameter tab. There are two parameters in the list on theright. These parameters are user parameters defined in Skeleton-frame.




2 Select the Label field for FrameH and enter Frame Height.

3 Select the Label field for FrameW and enter Frame Width. Press ENTER

to accept the value.

4 Click OK.

5 Save the file. Click Yes to all if prompted.

6 CloseFrame.iam.


Test the iCopy Definition

When creating an iCopy definition, test the iCopy with just the skeleton. Test

again after you create all the derived parts. Then finally test after placing any

other components. You test the iCopy definition by using it with the iCopy

command to verify it updates as expected.

1 OpenTarget.iam.

Test the iCopy Definition | 701



2 On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab ➤

Component panel

➤

iCopy command.

3 Select Frame.iam in the Select Source Assembly dialog box. Click Open.

The Constrain iCopy dialog box displays.

4 Select the work point at the end of the cyan (light blue) line for theLower left point.





point.





point.





right point.




8 Select the Path pattern tab to specify path information.

9 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (thePath button is selected automatically). The Work Plane is selected

automatically based on the selected path.




10 Enter 8 in the Instance number field.

11 Enter 2500 mm in the Offset field.




12 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy /

Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there are

no components to reuse in the iCopy definition.

13 Click OK to complete the command. The iCopy results are created as

shown. If the iCopy is not successful, return to the iCopy template and

review the steps to create it.




14 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for further

testing.





Create a Frame Part

Now that the skeleton assembly has been successfully tested, you continue

building the assembly. Next, create a frame part by deriving geometry from

the Skeleton-frame part.

1 OpenFrame.iam.

2 Turn off the visibility of Skeleton-frame. It prevents you from

accidentally selecting the surfaces in this file in later steps.

3 Click Create to create a component within the assembly.

■ Enter Frame1 in the New Component Name field.

■ Click and select Standard (mm).ipt from the Metric tab.

■ Verify that the New File Location is set to the \Tutorial Files\iCopy directory.

■ Verify that Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane

is not selected.

■ Click OK.

4 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folder under Frame.iam and

select the XY Plane.

5 Exit the sketch and delete Sketch1. It is not needed for this component.

6 Click the Manage tab

➤

Insert panel ➤

Derive command.

7 In the Open dialog box, select Skeleton-frame.ipt and click Open.

8 Expand the Surface Bodies node. Set Srf1 and Srf6 to and all

other surfaces to .

9 Expand the Sketches node. Set Sketch2 to and all other sketches

to .

10 Expand the Work Geometry node. Set Work Plane5 to and

all other work planes to .




11 In the Derive dialog box, click OK. The surfaces and sketch from

Skeleton-frame are added to the part. Using the Derive command to

add these surfaces maintains a link between the two files. The visibilityof Skeleton-frame.ipt is turned off for clarity in the following image.

12 Start the Extrude command.

■ Sketch2 is selected automatically. It is the only closed profile in the

part.

■ In the Extents drop-down menu, select Between.

■ Select Srf1 and Srf6 as the Between planes. The order does not

matter.

■ Click OK.

Create a Frame Part | 711



13 Turn off the visibility of the surfaces from the derived part (Srf1 and

Srf6). It prevents you from accidentally selecting them in later steps.

14 Return to the main assembly (Frame.iam).





Complete the Assembly

Repeat the previous procedure to create the rest of the assembly. The table

contains a list of file names with the surfaces, sketches, and work planes to

use with the Derive command.

1 Repeat the procedure to create the five frame parts according to the

following table. Be sure to turn off the visibility of derived surfaces after

creating the extrusion.

Work GeometrySketchSurfacesFile Name

Work Plane6Sketch3Srf1 and Srf2Frame2





Complete the Assembly | 713



2 When all part files are complete, save Frame.iam and all dependents.


Constrain the Frame Part

For adaptivity and skeletal modeling to work together, the assembly must beconstrained using a particular workflow. Constrain the origin planes of the




components to the origin planes of the iCopy template layout part. This

procedure provides the most consistent results.

1 In the model window, click and drag any frame part. The part is not

constrained and is free to move.

2 In the Model browser, expand the Origin folders for Skeleton-frame:1

and Frame1:1.

3 Start the Constrain command. In the Solution area of the dialog box,

■ Click the Mate constraint, if not already active, and select the Flush

option.

■ In the Origin folder of Skeleton-frame:1, select the XY Plane.

■ In the Origin folder of Frame1:1, select the XY Plane.

■ Click Apply.

4 Repeat to create constraints between XZ/XZ planes and YZ/YZ planes.

5 Repeat the process for the three origin planes of the remaining frames

(Frame2 through Frame6).

Constrain the Frame Part | 715









Test the iCopy definition again. The frames are the only parts that are derived

from the skeleton part. There are other components that are independent of

the skeleton part. These components are placed later.

1 OpenTarget.iam.

2 On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab ➤

Component panel

➤ iCopy command.




Lower left point.





point.


point.





right point.




8 In the Frame Height field, enter 125 mm.

9 In the Frame Width field, enter 125 mm.





11 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (thePath button is selected automatically).




12 The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path.






15 Click Next to display the iCopy: File Names dialog box. The Copy /

Reuse iCopy Components dialog box does not display because there are

no components to reuse in the iCopy definition.




16 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that you

entered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off.

17 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful,

return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.



iCopy results.




18 Close the file. Do not save changes. This assembly is used for further

testing.





Place the Support Plates

The last step in building the iCopy template is to place any components that

are independent of the skeleton layout part. Support plates are placed and

constrained in the assembly.

1 OpenFrame.iam.

2 Place four occurrences of Plate1.ipt.

3 Use one mate and two flush constraints to position each plate at the

four lower corners of the frame as shown. Use the vertical frame parts

with the mate constraint to position the plates. This procedure provides

more consistent results because the horizontal frame changes when

placing iCopy results.




4 Turn off the visibility of Skeleton-frame:1.

5 Save Frame.iam and all its dependents. Close the file.


Place the Support Plates | 727




Now that all the parts are placed in the iCopy template, test a final time to

verify that everything works as expected.

1 OpenTarget.iam.

2 On the ribbon, click the Assemble tab

➤

Component panel

➤

iCopy command.




Lower left point.





point.


point.





right point.




8 In the Frame Height field, enter 125 mm.

9 In the Frame Width field, and enter 125 mm.


11 Select the cyan (light blue) line to use as the path for the pattern (the

Path button is selected automatically).




12 The Work Plane is selected automatically based on the selected path.






15 Click Next to continue the command. The Copy / Reuse iCopy

Components dialog box displays because there are components that can

be reused in the iCopy definition.

16 Click Next in the Copy / Reuse iCopy Components dialog box. The

plates reference the same part file for each iCopy result (reuse). All other

components are copied for each iCopy result (copy). The iCopy: File

Names dialog box is displayed.




17 Click OK to complete the command. The file name prefix that you

entered previously is maintained until you turn the setting off.

The frame parts are copied for each iCopy result. Each iCopy result uses

the plate part.

18 The iCopy results are created as shown. If the iCopy is not successful,

return to the iCopy template and review the steps to create it.



iCopy results.




19 Save Target.iam and its dependents.





Summary




Summary | 737




■ Authored an iCopy template.

■ Created iCopy results in a target assembly.

What Next? Now that you know how to author and place iCopy components,

you can create your own. The Skeletal Modeling tutorial helps you

understand how to set up a skeleton assembly to use with the iCopy

command.

Previous (page 728)




Splines and Surfaces

About this tutorial

Perform advanced modeling with splines and surfaces.



30

739



spline_1_start.ipt

spline_1_complete.ipt

Tutorial Files

Used





This tutorial explores the tools available for creating and controlling the shape

of splines. Surfaces are used to shape the part and to define the body split

contours.

Objectives

In this tutorial, you learn how to:

■ Create and define splines.

■ Loft with a rail.

■ Create surfaces.

■ Replace a face.

■ Extend surface edges.

■ Split the part into multiple bodies.

■ Use the Emboss command.

Prerequisites

■ Understand how to open, create and save part files in your active project.

■

Understand the fundamentals of solid modeling.

System Settings

On the Application Options, Sketch tab enable the following settings:

■ Edit dimension when created.

■ Autoproject edges for sketch creation and edit.

■ Autoproject part origin on sketch create.

The Grid lines display is not enabled in any of the sketch environment images

in this tutorial.

740 | Chapter 30 Splines and Surfaces







NOTE You can specify the icon color scheme in Application Options. The

appearance of the icons presented in this tutorial may differ if you are not using

the color scheme noted in the following image.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 741)

Create Spline Cross Sections

In the first section of this exercise, we will create two spline cross sections and

one spline rail to use in a Loft operation.

1 Start a 2D sketch on the face indicated.

2 Start the Spline command. Refer to the following image for

placement. Place a fit point at the mid-point (green dot) of the vertical

line on the left (1), another directly above the origin (2). Double-click

to place the final point (3) at the mid-point of the vertical line on the

right. This action creates the spline. You can also right-click and choose

Create to finish the spline segment.

3 Right-click and select Done or press the Escape key to exit the command.

Create Spline Cross Sections | 741



NOTE Fit points at the end of a spline are square. Fit points along the curve

are diamond shaped so you can identify the start and end of joined spline

segments.

When you create a spline, handles appear at each fit point in a passive

state. Handles are shape manipulators. You can drag or dimension to a

fit point without activating a handle. If the handles are not visible, selecta spline in the sketch to display the active and passive handles.

4 Activate the handle on all fit points. To activate a handle use one of the

following methods:

■ Press and drag anywhere on the handle.

■ Right-click a fit point and choose Activate Handle in the context

menu.




TIP Handle manipulation changes the shape of a spline. It is sometimes

necessary to "undo" a spline handle manipulation. Depending on how many

handles were manipulated, a normal Undo command might not producethe required results. When a spline is selected, there are two context menu

commands available for reversing handle manipulations:

■ Reset All Handles Reverses all handle edits and restores the spline

to the natural solve state. Active handles remain active.

■ Reset Handle Reverses a handle edit on a selected fit point or

handle, or the handle nearest the cursor. The reset uses the current

spline shape. If other handles were modified, the reset may not return

the handle to the original solve state. The handle remains active

5 Right-click the middle fit point and enable Curvature in thecontext menu.

TIP Enabling Curvature also activates the linear handle. Enabling the linear

handle does not activate Curvature.

6 Place a horizontal constraint on all handles.

7 Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point (not the

handle) and the part origin.

8 Place a dimension on each handle with a value of 1. A linear

handle dimension is unitless and indicates the distance the spline is

tangent to the handle.

9 Place a radial dimension of 110-mm on the middle fit point curvature

handle. A radial dimension is not a unitless dimension.

10 Place a 9-mm vertical dimension from the projected Origin point to the

middle fit point.

The following image shows the completed sketch.

Create Spline Cross Sections | 743



11 Finish the sketch. The 9-mm dimension persists; the handles

and all handle dimensions are visible only when the spline is active.

12 Start the Save As command and save the file as Spline_Skills1.ipt.

To create an exact duplicate of the spline on the other side of the part perform

the following steps.

1 Orient the part to match the view in the following image and

start a new sketch on the indicated face.

2 Start the Project Geometry command and project the spline to

the new sketch.






Create a Spline Rail

In the next portion of the exercise, we create the rail or "guide curve" to use

in the lofting operation.

1 Orient the part so the narrow end is facing you as shown in the following

image.

Create a Spline Rail | 745



2 Start a new sketch on the narrow end of the part on the face

indicated.

3 Start the Spline command and sketch a spline from the midpoint

of the projected vertical line to a point above the midpoint of the part.

Place the final point at the midpoint of the opposite projected verticalline. Double-click the last point to create the spline.

4 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finish

the spline command.

5 Place a vertical constraint between the middle fit point and the

midpoint of the projected line.

6 Place a 7-mm dimension from the midpoint of the top edge to the

middle fit point.

7 Choose Done from the context menu or press the Escape key to finish

the dimension command.




8 Right-click the middle fit point and choose Flat from the

context menu. The mid-section of the spline now has zero curvature.

Although not required for this exercise, a unitless dimension can be

applied to the handle to extend the length of the flat segment.


10 Save the file.


Create a Lofted Surface

In the next section, we create a lofted surface using the two parallel splines

as cross sections, and the front spline as the drive rail.

1 Start the Loft command.

2 In the dialog box, choose Surface for the Output.

Create a Lofted Surface | 747



3 Select the two parallel splines to satisfy the cross sections.

4 Change the selection type to Rails using one of the following methods,

and then select the spline you created as the drive rail:

■ Right-click and choose Select Rails in the context menu.

■ Select Click to add in the dialog box in the Rails pane.




5 Click OK to create the surface.

The new surface appears in the browser as a lofted feature and also in the

Surface Bodies folder.

NOTE A Surface is initially translucent and a single color for appearance. To change

the appearance of a surface to opaque, select the surface (in the bodies folder or

the browser). Use the context menu to cancel the Translucent selection. Select

Properties in the context menu to assign a new surface appearance if required.


Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face

In this section, you use Replace Face to change the top of the object to match

the shape of the new surface.

1 On the 3D Model tab, Surfaces panel, choose the drop-down arrow to

expose all available commands from the expanded panel.

2 Select Replace Face.

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face | 749



3 Select the top planar face to satisfy the Existing Faces selection. Change

the selection to New Faces and select the lofted surface to satisfy the

New Faces selection.




4 Click OK to replace the planar face with the lofted surface.

5 In the browser, select the lofted surface and turn off the visibility in the

context menu.

Change the Top of the Object Using Replace Face | 751



The top of the part now conforms to the shape of the surface.

6 Start the Shell command.

7 Specify a 2-mm thickness. Do not remove any faces. Use the default

Inside shell option.

8 Select OK to complete the operation.

9 Save the file.


Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies

The interior of the part is now hollow. In the next section of the exercise, we

use a top-down workflow to split the part into multiple solid bodies.

1 On the Surface panel, select the Thicken/Offset command.

2 In the graphics window, select the top of the part to satisfy the selection.

3 In the dialog box, select Surface for the Output. Enter a distance value

of 3-mm. Use the flip direction arrow to offset the surface towards the

interior of the part.




4 Select OK to create the offset surface and finish the command.

5 Highlight the new surface in the browser to view.

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies | 753



6 On the Surface panel, click the drop-down arrow to expose all available

commands.

7 Select the Extend command in the drop-down.

8 Select the two outside edges of the offset surface to satisfy the Edges

selection. Specify an offset value of 7.5 mm. Click OK to finish the

command.




9 On the Modify panel, click the Split command.

10 In the dialog box, select the Split Solid option.

11 Select the offset surface as the Split Tool.

Split the Part into Two Solid Bodies | 755



12 Click OK to split the part into two solid bodies and finish the command.

13 In the browser, turn off the visibility of the offset surface. Because the

extended edges are dependent on the offset surface, the originating

surface controls the feature visibility.

14 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser. There are now two solid

bodies present in the file. You can control the visibility and color of each

body individually.




15 Save the file.


Create Another Split Tool

In the next section, we create a spline profile and surface for another split

tool.

1 Start a new sketch on the bottom of the part.

2 Orient the part view as shown in the following image with the wide end

of the part on the right.

Create Another Split Tool | 757



3 Create a spline with five fit points as shown in the following image.

Double-click the last point to create the spline. It is of no consequence

if the handles on your spline do not match the image.




4 Place a vertical constraint between the following fit points:

a 1 and 5

b 2 and 4

5 Place a horizontal constraint between fit point 3 and the projected

origin point.




6 Enable all linear handles on the spline using one of the following

methods:

a Right-click and select Activate Handle in the context menu.

b Press and drag anywhere on a handle.

7 Right-click the middle fit point and enable Curvature.

8 Place a vertical constraint on the handle at the midpoint and the two

endpoints.




9 Place a unitless dimension of 1 on each linear handle.

10 Place a 12-mm radial dimension on the curvature handle at the middle

fit point. It is of no consequence if your spline differs slightly from the

following image.




11 Add an angular dimension of 34 degrees between the linear handles and

the edges of the part as shown in the following image.

12 Dimension the fit points as shown in the following image.





14 Start the Extrude command. Set the Output to Surface and

select the spline to satisfy the Profile selection. Set the Distance to

40-mm. Reverse the direction of the extrusion so the profile intersects

the existing bodies. Click OK to create the surface.




15 Save the file.





Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body

In the next section, we use the new surface to split the part and create a third

body.

1 On the Modify panel, choose the Split command.

2 In the dialog box, select the Split Solid option.

3 Select the extruded surface as the Split Tool.

4 If only one body is visible in a multi-body part, Inventor selects the

visible body as the solid to include. Because more than one solid body

is visible, select the upper body to satisfy the Solid selection.

Split the Part to Create a Third Solid Body | 765



5 Click OK to create the body.

Notice there are now three bodies in the Solid Bodies folder in the

browser.

6 Expand the Solid Bodies folder in the browser.

7 Right-click each body in the folder and select Properties in the context

menu. Change the Body Appearance Style for each body to a unique

appearance

8 Save the file.


Isolate the Body

1 Expand the Solid Bodies folder and select the new body.

2 With the body highlighted, right-click and select Hide Others

in the context menu. It isolates the body you want to work on.




Notice that the context menu also contains the Show All command to

unhide all bodies.


Create an Offset Surface and Trim

In the next section, we create an offset surface to use as a trimming tool.

Create an Offset Surface and Trim | 767



1 On the 3D Model tab, Surface panel, start the Thicken/Offset

command.

2 In the dialog box, set the Output to Surface and pick the extruded

surface to satisfy the selection. Set the direction of the new surface to

the interior of the body. Set the Distance to 2-mm. Click OK to create

the surface.




3 Turn off the visibility of the extruded surface.




4 Start the Split command.

5 Select the Trim Solid option; select the surface as the Split Tool. Make

sure the side to remove is pointing away from the material.

NOTE Rotate the model to verify the side to remove arrow is pointing away

from the solid. You can also select the second Remove direction and not the

one indicated in the following image. It is acceptable as long as the output

is correct.




6 Choose OK to remove the material.

7 Turn off the visibility of the surface.

8 Turn on the visibility of all solid bodies. Notice the 2-mm gap between

the bodies.




9 Save the file.

This completes the spline and surfacing portion of the tutorial. To complete

the part you can continue the tutorial.


Create an Embossed Feature

In the next section, we create the embossed feature.

1 Turn on the visibility of the Emboss Sketch in the browser.

2 Turn off the visibility of the bottom solid and the large upper solid.

NOTE Turn off the visibility of the non-participating solids to allow Inventor

to choose the body to be operated on automatically.

3 Start the Emboss command.

4 Set the Depth to 3-mm.

5 Select the Emboss from Face option.




6 Click OK to create the embossed feature.

7 Start the Fillet command.

8 In the Fillet dialog box, enter 2-mm for the Radius value.

9 Select the drop-down and set the fillet type to Smooth (G2).Click the pencil icon to change to a selection mode.

Create an Embossed Feature | 773



10 Pick the upper and lower edges of the emboss feature, and then clickOK to create the fillets.




11 Save the file.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill

In the next section, we create a vented opening called a Grill.

1 In the Solid Bodies folder, make sure the visibility of the bottom solid

and the embossed solid is off. Make the large top solid visible.

NOTE If you turn off the visibility of bodies, Inventor does not include themin a feature operation.

2 Turn on the visibility of the Grill Sketch in the browser.

Create a Vented Opening Using Grill | 775



3 On the 3D Model tab, Plastic Part panel, click the Grill command.

4 On the grill sketch, select the large outer ellipse to satisfy the Profile

selection in the Boundary tab. Accept the default settings for size.




5 Select the Island tab and then select the small center ellipse to satisfy

the Profile selection. Accept the default of 0-mm.




6 Select the Rib tab and then select all the remaining line geometry to

satisfy the rib selection. Accept the size defaults.




7 Click OK to create the grill.




8 Turn on the visibility of all bodies.

9 Save the file.

Congratulations, you have completed the Spline and Surfaces tutorial.





Summary

In this tutorial you:

■ Created and dimensioned splines.

■ Manipulated spline handles.

■ Created lofted and extruded surfaces.

■ Created multiple bodies in a part file.

■ Used Replace Face to change a part contour.

■ Extended surface edges.

■ Used the Emboss command.

Summary | 781



782



Bolted Connections

About this tutorial

Design bolted connections.

Mechanical DesignCategory

31

783




Bolted_connection.iam (metric)Tutorial File Used





Objectives

■ Create and edit bolted connections with the Design Accelerator Bolted

Connection generator.

■ Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that saves

extensive assembly and part modeling time.

Prerequisites

■ Install and connect to the Content Center.

■ Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space with

the various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 784)

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Bolted

Connection

➤

Bolted_connection.iam.

2 Click ➤

Save As.

3 For the file name, enter Bolted_connection_tutorial.iam.

784 | Chapter 31 Bolted Connections







4 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Fasten panel ➤ Bolted

Connection .

5 In the Bolted Connection Component Generator dialog box, select theThrough All hole type.

6 Select Concentric from the drop-down menu in the Placement box.The Start Plane command enables.

Start the Generator | 785




Place the Holes

1 Select the start plane.

The Circular references command is enabled.

2 Select the circular edge.




The Termination command is enabled.


Place the Holes (continued)1 Orbit the assembly, and select the termination plane.

Place the Holes (continued) | 787



The holes preview.




2 Verify that 6.00 mm is selected in the Diameter menu.


Place the Holes (continued)

In the hole and fastener list box, notice that the program shows the hole

thumbnails and descriptions. Two holes are shown, because that is the number

required to pass through both components, as determined by the start and

termination selections.

If another component or part feature are included in the selection, three holes

are required.

Place the Holes (continued) | 789




Add the Fasteners

1 Above the hole thumbnails and descriptions, select the Click to add

a fastener text. The available bolts display.

2 Select ISO from the Standard menu to filter the selection.

3 Select ISO 4016. The selected bolt previews in the graphics window.

Notice also that the program selects a length long enough to pass through

the chosen components automatically.




NOTE If your Content Center library does not contain the ISO standard, or

this particular bolt, select All from the Standard menu, and then select

a similar bolt.

4 Select the Click to add a fastener text, located directly under the bolt

thumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.

Add the Fasteners | 791



The generator logically filters the available selections. For example, when

you add fastener hardware between the bolt and the top hole, the

program presents only washers for selection.

5 Select the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower hole

thumbnail, and then select ISO 7092.




6 Click the Click to add a fastener text located below the lower washer

thumbnail, and then select ISO 4032. The fastener stack is complete.

Add the Fasteners | 793



7 Click Apply.

The File Naming dialog box opens where you can specify the Display

name of the bolted connection and the File name settings.

8 Remove the checkmark next to Always prompt for filename option,

and click OK.





Use Existing Hole

Next, you add another bolted connection using an existing hole.

1 Select the Blind connection type option.

Use Existing Hole | 795



2 Select By hole from the drop-down menu in the Placement box.

3 Select the start plane.

The Existing Hole command is enabled.

4 Select the countersunk hole.




The Blind Start Plane command is enabled.

5 Select the start plane for the blind hole, which in this case is the top face

of the spindle component.




The hole previews.




6 Select the Click to add a fastener text, and then select a

countersink-type cap screw, for example, ISO 10642.




7 Click OK.


Edit Bolted Connection

1 In the browser, double-click the Spindle component to edit it.

2 Click the Parameters command located on the Manage tab, and then

change the value for d4 to 20 mm.

3 Click Done in the Parameters dialog box.

4 On the Quick Access toolbar, click Return to return to the assembly.

Notice that an update icon appears in the browser next to Bolted

Connection:1. The bolt is not long enough to make the connection and

requires an update.




5 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit

using Design Accelerator.

The bolted connection generator automatically previews the next

available size contained in the Content Center. The preview lasts long

enough to pass through the bolted components, the nut, and washers.

Edit Bolted Connection | 801



6 Click OK.

7 In the graphics window, right-click the cap screw contained in Bolted

Connection:2, and then select Edit using Design Accelerator.

Both the cap screw and the blind hole have grip handles. You can zoom

in to see the grips.




8 Drag the upper grip handle to change the length of the cap screw.

Notice that the cap screw preview snaps to the next available length

contained in the available Content Center libraries. In this example, the

next available length is 20 mm.

Edit Bolted Connection | 803



Notice also that the description text for the cap screw in the generator

dialog box updates immediately as you resize the cap screw.





Modify Hole Depth

1 Next, drag the grip for the hole to increase the hole depth, approximating

the depth shown in the illustration.

2 Click OK.

Modify Hole Depth | 805



In addition to modifying the hole depth with a grip free-drag, you can

precisely define the hole depth.

3 In the browser, right-click Bolted Connection:2, and then select Edit

using Design Accelerator.

4 Select the lower hole thumbnail, and then click the access button next

to the hole thumbnail.




5 In the Modify Hole dialog box, enter 16 mm in the Hole Depth field

and 14 mm in the Thread Depth field.

6 Click the check mark to close the dialog box, and click OK in the

generator dialog box.

Modify Hole Depth | 807







Change Bolted Connection Direction

Assume the direction for Bolted Connection:1 must be reversed. In other

words, the nut must be next to the basic_plate component.

1 Right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using Design

Accelerator.

2 Click Start Plane, and then select the new start plane.

3 Click Circular references, and then select the circular edge.

Change Bolted Connection Direction | 809



4 Click Termination.

5 Select the termination plane.




6 Click OK.

Change Bolted Connection Direction | 811




Change Configuration of Bolted Connection

Next, we change the configuration of a bolted connection.

1 Right-click Bolted Connection:1, and then select Edit using Design

Accelerator.

Before you continue, look at the relationship between the hardware stack

in the dialog box and the direction of the connection in the graphics

window.

Notice that the direction indicator in the graphics window always

corresponds to the insert direction of the screw.




Though you can change the connection direction on the model, the

general top-to-bottom stack order of the hardware in the dialog box

remains the same. The screw is always the top-most item.

Change Configuration of Bolted Connection | 813



2 Select the thumbnail for the nut, and then click Delete to remove the

nut from the connection.

3 Use the same method to delete the two washers.

4 Select the thumbnail for the hole closest to the cap screw, and then click

the menu button.

5 Select ISO-Socket Head Cap Screw ISO 4762.




6 Next, change the type of the screw. Select the thumbnail for the cap

screw, and then select the menu button.

7 Select Socket Head Bolts from the Category filter menu.

8 Select ISO 4762.

9 Drag the grip for the cap screw to shorten the length to 20 mm.




10 Click OK.








Summary

Using the Bolted Connection Generator, you have learned how to:

■ Start a Bolted Connection.

■ Place holes.

■ Add fasteners.

■ Use an existing hole.

■ Edit a bolted connection.

You can check the Help files for further information.

Previous (page 812)




Shafts

About this tutorial

Design shafts.



32

819



Start a new assembly file (metric)Tutorial File Used

In this tutorial, you create and edit a shaft with the Shaft Component

Generator and Design Accelerator.

Objectives

■ Design a shaft.

■ Check a shaft.

■ Set loads and supports.

■ Set file names.

■ Insert a shaft.

■ Redesign a shaft.

Prerequisites



various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 820)

Overview

To create a shaft, you complete the following steps:

■ Start the Shaft Component Generator.

■ Add and remove sections to the designed shaft.

■ Set parameters of shaft sections.

■ Add shaft features.

■ Specify supports, force, and moment.

■ Edit the shaft using Design Accelerator.

820 | Chapter 32 Shafts



NOTE In this tutorial, you will insert components from the Content Center. Make

sure that you have Content Center installed before you start designing the shaft.


Create an Assembly File

To begin:


Autodesk Inventor uses template files to determine default settings for

part, assembly, and drawing files. As you become familiar with the

program, you can define your own templates.

2 Click New on the Quick Access toolbar.

3 Double-click Standard (mm).iam in the Metric tab.

4 On the Quick Access toolbar, click Save, and save a copy of the

file as shaft.iam.


Start the Shaft Generator1 On the ribbon, click on the Design tab before starting the Shaft

Generator to become familiar with the Design Accelerator commands.

Create an Assembly File | 821



2 To start the generator, on the ribbon click Design tab ➤

Power

Transmission panel ➤

Shaft .

The Shaft Component Generator opens on the Design tab, by default.

3 Click in the graphics window to place the shaft.

The shaft is ready to be configured.


2D and 3D Dynamic Preview

While using the Shaft Generator to design a shaft, you can preview the shaft

in both the dialog box and the graphics window. The previews are dynamicand adjust automatically to show your chosen profiles and their relative sizes

and positions on the shaft.

1 To display the shaft preview on the Design tab, click Options.

NOTE On the Design tab, the Options command is on the toolbar in the

Sections region. On the Calculation tab, the Options command is on

the toolbar in the Loads & Supports region.

2 In the 2D Preview region, select Always Show, and click OK.

This creates a dynamic preview of the shaft on the Design tab.

The 2D preview includes only sections, and displays by default on the

Calculation tab.




The shaft also dynamically previews within the graphics window, according

to the shaft features and values you specify in the dialog box. You can design

a shaft by adding or deleting sections and features, or by adding loads and

supports. When you add loads and supports using commands on the

Calculation tab, the preview of loads and supports appears.


Add Shaft Element

When you first start the Shaft Generator, the shaft contains some sections by

default. You design the shaft by modifying, deleting, and adding shaft sections.

You can select the shaft sections with the 2D preview in the dialog box, the

graphics window, or with the tree control.

1 In the Sections area, select Sections from the drop-down list.

2 Select the tree control for the Cylinder 50 x 100 section.

Add Shaft Element | 823



NOTE You can select only one section at a time.

Notice that this section highlights in the 2D preview and in the graphics

window.

3 Click Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. The program adds

a plain shaft section to the right of the selected element.

The first Cylinder section becomes red in the tree control. The Shaft

Generator recognizes that you have a fillet between two sections of the

same width next to each other, which is not supported. The program

changes the section back to the default color when you change the widthof one of the shaft sections.





Specify Parameters

To change the size parameters for the shaft section, you can use one of the

following editing methods.

1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the shaft section.■

■ In the 2D Preview area of the Design tab, double-click the shaft

section or right-click and select Sections

➤

Edit from the context

menu.

■ In the tree control of the Design tab, click , or double-click the

section or feature.

For this tutorial, we will use the first method.

1 Double-click the shaft section in the Autodesk Inventor window.

2 In the Cylinder dialog box, leave the Main Diameter value of 50 mm

unchanged, but change the Section Length field to 50 mm.

3 Click OK.


Specify Parameters | 825



Specify Shaft Element Type

Now, add a retaining ring to the selected shaft section.

1 In the tree control, click the arrow next to to expand the list of

available features for this shaft section, and select Add Retaining Ring .

The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section.

2 To edit the retaining ring, select it in the tree control, and click .

The Retaining Ring Groove dialog box opens.

3 From the first drop-down list in the Position group box, select Measure

from first edge.

4 Use the second drop-down list to select a retaining ring from the ContentCenter. Select ISO 464.

5 In the Dimensions box, change the Distance field to 23 mm.

6 Click OK.


Change Dimensions of First Shaft Section

1 Select the first shaft section from the left.

2 To open the Cylinder dialog box, double-click the section in the 2D

Preview area of the Design tab.




3 In the Cylinder dialog box, change the Main Diameter to 40 mm and

Section Length to 50 mm.

4 Click OK.


Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section

1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, select the third shaft element from

the left.

2 In this step, use 3D grips to edit section parameters. For this shaft

section, two 3D grips are available. Use both of them to edit the

dimensions.

Double-click the length 3D grip as shown in the image.

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section | 827



3 In the Edit dialog box, enter a new length value of 50 mm, and then

click . The length of the section changes.

4 Double-click the diameter 3D grip as shown on the image.




5 In the Edit dialog box, enter new length value of 65 mm, and then click

. The diameter of the section changes.

6

Change Dimension of Third Shaft Section | 829



7 Now, add a through hole to the selected shaft section. In the tree control,

the third shaft section is activated. Click the arrow next to to

expand the list of available features for this shaft section, and select Add

Through Hole.

The default hole is added to the selected section. To edit the hole, select

it in the tree control, and click the .

8 In the Through Hole dialog box, change the Hole Diameter value to

12 mm. Ensure that you change the value for the Hole Diameter

parameter, not the Main Diameter parameter.

9 Click OK.


Change Dimensions of Cone Section

1 In the Autodesk Inventor window, double-click the cone section. The

Cone dialog box opens.

2 Change the First Diameter value to 80 mm.

3 Click OK.





Change Dimensions of the Next Section

In the next step, we use the 2D preview within the Design tab to edit section

parameters.

1 In the 2D Preview area, select the cylinder as shown on the image.

2 Right-click to display the context menu, and click Sections

➤

Edit.

The Cylinder dialog box opens.

3 Change the Section Length field to 40 mm, and click OK.

4 Now, add a locknut groove on the right edge of the section to the selected

shaft section. In the tree control, the appropriate shaft section is activated.

Change Dimensions of the Next Section | 831



Click the arrow next to to expand list of available right-edge

features, and select Lock Nut Groove from the list.

The default locknut groove is added to the selected section, and the

Locknut Groove dialog box opens.

5 Change the Thread Length to 13 mm, and click OK.


Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section

To complete the shaft shape, add one more section.

1 Click Insert Cylinder located in the toolbar. A plain shaft section

is added to the right of the selected section.




2 In the tree control, click to display the Cylinder dialog box.3 Change the Main Diameter field to 40 mm, and click OK.

4 Add a retaining ring feature to the selected shaft section. Click the arrow

next to to expand list of available features for this shaft section,

and select Add Retaining Ring from the list.

The program adds the default retaining ring to the selected section.

5 Click to display the Retaining Ring Groove dialog box to edit the

parameters.

6 In the drop-down menu, select Measure from second edge to insert

the retaining ring on the right side of the cylinder section.

Add and Edit the Last Shaft Section | 833



7 Use the second drop-down list to select DIN 471 from the Content

Center.

8 Set the Distance to 2 mm, and click OK.


Insert Cylindrical Bore

You can also insert cylindrical and conical bores. In this tutorial, you will

insert a cylindrical bore.

1 Select Bore on the left from the drop-down menu in the Sections

area.

2 Select Insert Cylindrical Bore from the toolbar.

3 Click to display the edit dialog box.

4 Change the Section Length field to 140 mm, and click OK.





Add Shaft to Templates Library

Now save the designed shaft to the Templates Library.

1 To display the Templates Library area, click the More Options

command in the lower-right corner of the Design tab.

2 Click Add to add a newly designed shaft to the template library.

3 In the Template Description dialog box, specify the name of the template

as shaft_tutorial.

4 Click OK. This new template is added to the Templates Library.

NOTE To open the template, click Set.

TIP

■ When you double-click a template, you can change the template

description.

■ You can use the drag method to reorder templates within the library.


Add Shaft to Templates Library | 835



The Calculation Tab

Select the Calculation tab, which contains:

■ A 2D Preview of the shaft, based on the configuration you chose on the

Design tab.

■ Loads and Supports graphical indicators.

■ A toolbar for entering loads and supports.

■ Areas for setting shaft material and additional calculation properties.

NOTE The 2D preview is on by default. To hide the 2D Preview, select the Always

Hide option within the 2D Preview box of the Options dialog box, and click

OK.


Specify Supports

When you switch to the Calculation tab, notice how the 2D and 3D Previews

change. Not only the graphical representations of loads and supports are

displayed, but there are also green and blue position markers.

For each section, the program shows three position markers: one at each end

of a section, and one position marker in the middle of each section. A blue

position marker means that load or support is positioned on such a position

marker.

NOTE Supports are represented by triangles. Loads are represented by arrows.

1 Select Supports from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supports

region.

2 Press and hold the Alt key. In the Autodesk Inventor window, drag the

support to the second shaft section from the left as shown on the image.




The nearest blue position marker indicates that the support is positionedtowards it.

NOTE The position marker can be half-blue and half-green if it is between

two sections.

3 Double-click the support to display the Free Support dialog box, and

change the Distance from middle of section field to 1.5 mm, which

is the distance from the currently active position marker to the support.

4 Click OK.

5 In the Autodesk Inventor window, press and hold the Alt key, and then

drag the second support indicator to the shaft section located on the

right end of the shaft, as shown.

Specify Supports | 837




Specify Loads and Perform Calculation

1 Select Loads from the drop-down menu in the Loads & Supports

region.

A radial force is inserted by default; however, we must change it to torque.

2 In the tree control, select Radial Force, and click the arrow next to the

icon.




3 Select Torque from the displayed list. The Torque dialog box opens.

Enter 2 0 0 N m in the Torque field, and click OK.

4 In the toolbar, click Torque to add a second torque. In the Torque

dialog box, ensure that -200 N m is entered in the Torque field, and

click OK.

NOTE The sum of all torques must equal 0.

5 You can also change positions of the torques. In the dialog box preview,

drag the torque arrows to the shaft sections as shown in the image.

6 Click the Calculate command. Expand the Results area on the right

side of the Calculation tab to see the calculated results of the loads,

supports, and values.

7 Switch to the Graphs tab to view the diagrams of individual shaft

loadings.

TIP Click the Result icon to display the HTML report.


File Name Settings

1 Before you finish the shaft, click the Design tab.

File Name Settings | 839



2 Click the File Naming command, located at the top-right corner

of the dialog box.

If the Always Prompt for Filename option is selected, when you place

the completed shaft in the graphics window, the File Naming dialog box

appears. You use this dialog box to specify the display name and File name

for Design Accelerator components and features. For this exercise, do not

select this option.


Insert the Shaft

Now, insert the completed shaft into the assembly.

1 Click OK in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box.

2 Click in the graphics window to place the shaft.





Edit the Shaft

You can edit the inserted shaft.

1 Select the shaft in the browser or graphics window, then right-click, and

select Edit Using Design Accelerator.

2 Ensure that the Design tab is activated, and then select the cone section,

as shown.

3 In the 2D Preview area, double-click the selected cone section to display

the Cone box dialog box.

4 Change First Diameter to 100 mm and Section Length to 90 mm.

Click OK to close the Cone dialog box.

5 Click OK in the Shaft Component Generator dialog box. The edit isapplied to the shaft.

Edit the Shaft | 841




Summary

Using the Shaft Component Generator, you learned how to:

■ Start a Shaft Generator.

■ Configure a shaft.

■

Specify loads and supports.■ Specify load values.




■ Insert a shaft.

■ Edit a shaft.

Previous (page 841)

Summary | 843



844



Spur Gears Connections

About this tutorial

33

845



Design spur gear connections.


15 - 20 minutesEmphasis

SpurGear.iam (metric)Tutorial File Used





Design a spur gears connection using the Design Accelerator Spur Gears

Generator. Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion thatsaves extensive assembly and part modeling.

Objectives

■ Specify placement of gears.

■ Set the method of design.

■ Set file names.

■ Insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.

Prerequisites


various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 846)

Open Sample File and Start Generator


2 Open Spur Gears

➤

SpurGear.iam.

846 | Chapter 33 Spur Gears Connections







3 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤

Power Transmission panel ➤

Spur Gear.

Design Accelerator generators open in the last valid state a component

was inserted into the Autodesk Inventor assembly.

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Spur Gear command to load

the Spur Gears Generator with the default installation data.


Spur Gears Dialog Box

When you start the Spur Gears Component Generator, it opens on the Design

tab. You can enter specific parameters, define spur gears placement, and select

methods of calculation.

The Design tab is divided into several group boxes with options:

Spur Gears Dialog Box | 847



Common

This area includes parameters common for both gears, such as module or helixangle.

The Design Guide drop-down menu contains five possible options of design

and calculation. Based on your selection of the design guide, the edit fields

within the Design tab are enabled. Every method requires different input

parameters.

Gear 1, Gear 2

This area includes parameters that can vary for Gear 1 and Gear 2 such as

number of teeth or face width. Also, commands for placement specification

of Gear 1 and Gear 2 are located here.

Use the drop-down menu to select the type of gear to insert: component,

feature, or no model.




More Options

When you click the More options command, located in the lower-right

corner of the Design tab, the area with other options for spur gears design

opens. For example, if you select Number of Teeth in the Input Typegroup box, it indicates that number of teeth is a known value.

Spur Gears Dialog Box | 849



Results

Double-click the double line on the right, or click the chevron to display the

Results pane with the list of calculated values. The values in gray indicate that

results do not match the inserted values in the Design tab. Click Calculate

to get results for current inputs.





Select Gear Options1 Within the Common area of the Design tab, select the Module option

from the Design Guide drop-down menu. The selected option indicates

what the design and calculation is based on. In this tutorial, we select

the Module option.

Select Gear Options | 851



2 Click the More Options command located in the lower-right

corner of the Design tab for additional options for spur gears.

3 On the Size Type group box, select Module.

If you design spur gears in a metric assembly, the generator selects the

Module option by default. If you design spur gears using English units,

the generator selects the Diametral Pitch option.

4 In the Input Type area, select the Number of Teeth option. In this

case, the number of teeth is an input parameter.

5 In this tutorial, you insert one feature and one component. Select

Feature from the drop-down menu in the Gear 1 group box. The first

gear is inserted as a feature of the shaft in the assembly.

6 Select Component from the drop-down menu in the Gear 2 group

box. The second gear is inserted as a new part.




NOTE Alternatively, you can select the No Model option to insert a

calculation without a component or feature.

NOTE If you insert features, you cannot use Motion for your gears to rotate

them. It is possible only if you insert two components.


Place the Gear

1 To specify the placement for Gear 1, click Cylindrical Face in the Gear

1 group box.

2 In the graphics window, select the cylindrical face as shown in the

following image.

Place the Gear | 853



NOTE The diameter of section on the shaft must be equal or greater than

outside diameter of the gear.

3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within the

assembly.4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the following

image.




A preview shows Gear 1 in the specified position.

Place the Gear | 855




Place the Second Gear

Now, you can specify the position for the second gear.

1 In the Gear 2 group box, click Cylindrical Face.

2 In the graphics window, select the cylindrical face to place the second

gear as shown in the following image.




3 Click the Start plane command to specify the start plane within the

assembly.

4 In the graphics window, select the start plane as shown in the following

image.

Place the Second Gear | 857



A preview shows Gear 2 in the specified position.





Enter Parameters

Now, you can enter parameters into the Common, Gear 1, and Gear 2 groupboxes.

1 Set Pressure Angle value to 20 degrees.

2 Set Helix Angle value to 12 degrees.

3 Enter the correct number of teeth. Your gear design is based on these

known parameters. Enter 29 into the Number of Teeth edit field in

the Gear 1 area.

4 Enter 57 into the Number of Teeth edit field in the Gear 2 area.

5 Set both Facewidth values in Gear 1 and Gear 2 to 30 mm.

6 Set Unit Correction in Gear 1 area box to 0.


Enter Parameters | 859



Perform the Calculation and Set File Names

1 To perform the calculation, click Calculate. The preview updates, and

the message in the Summary of messages area reports that the

calculation completed successfully.

2 To open the Summary of messages area located at the bottom of the

Calculation and Design tabs, double-click the double line at the

bottom of the tabs, or click the chevron at the bottom of the tabs.

In the graphics window, the preview of the spur gears connection reflects

all inserted values, such as numbers of teeth.

3 Click OK. The File Naming dialog box opens.

In the File Naming dialog box, you can specify the Display name and

File name for Design Accelerator components and features. When the

Always prompt for filename box is checked, the dialog box opens

every time you insert the Design Accelerator component or feature.4 Click OK to insert the spur gears connection into the assembly.





Perform the Calculation and Set File Names | 861



Summary

Using the Spur Gears Generator, you learned how to:■ Start a Spur Gears connection.

■ Set calculation options.

■ Place components.

■ Perform the calculation.

■ Set file names.

Check the Help for further information about generators.

Previous (page 860)




V-Belts Connections

About this tutorial

Design V-belts connections.



VBelts.iamTutorial File Used

34

863







Create and edit a V-belts drive using the Design Accelerator V-Belts generator.

Develop your design in a standards-based, automated fashion that saves

extensive assembly and part modeling

Objectives

■ Design V-belts driven with two pulleys.

■ Design a belt.

■ Set pulley properties.

■ Set file names and display names.

■ Insert V-belts connection.

Prerequisites


various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 864)

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open

V-Belts

➤

VBelts.iam.

864 | Chapter 34 V-Belts Connections







2 Click Design tab ➤


V-Belts.

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the V-Belts command to load the

V-Belts Component Generator with the default installation data.


Select the Belt Plane

1 First, select a work plane or planar face as the midplane of the belt.

The Belt Mid Plane command activates.

2 Select the visible work plane as shown in the following image.

Select the Belt Plane | 865



When you select the work plane, the grips display. The number of displayed

grips depends on the number of pulleys.




NOTE The V-belts Generator opens with the last valid settings.


Select Belt Type

1 In the Belt section of the V-belts Generator, click the down arrow to

display the available V-belts.

2 Select the A - ANSI/RMA IP-20 Classical Wrapped V-belt.

Select Belt Type | 867



NOTE In this Autodesk Inventor version, the V-belts Generator is not connected

to the Content Center.


Select First Pulley Type

1 In the Pulleys region, click the down arrow of the first pulley.

2 Select Grooved Pulley A,AX - ANSI/RMA IP20.

NOTE When you start the V-belts Generator, there are always two pulleys displayed.

To add other pulleys, click the Click to add pulley text.


Set First Pulley Position1 In the Pulleys region, select the first pulley. Click the arrow to display

options for geometry placement of the first pulley.

2 Select the Fixed position by selected geometry option.

The pulley preview activates.




3 Select the cylindrical face of the shaft to position the first pulley

automatically.

Set First Pulley Position | 869




Select Second Pulley Type

1 In the Pulleys box, click the row with the second pulley.

2 Click the down arrow, and select Grooved Pulley A,AX ANSI/RMA

IP20.





Set Second Pulley Position

1 In the Pulleys box, click the arrow to display options for geometry

placement for the second pulley.

2 Select the Direction driven sliding position option.

3 Select the sliding work plane for the holder.


Set Second Pulley Position | 871



Change Pulley Properties

1 Click the Edit command of the second pulley to open the Groove Pulley

Properties dialog box.

2 Select Transmission Ratio from the Design Guide drop-down menu.

3 Enter 2 in the Ratio edit field in the Dimensions area, and click OK.


Specify the Second Pulley Final Position

1 In the assembly, drag the center grip and place the second pulley to the

appropriate position.




The sliding is available along the selected sliding work plane. The program

determines the final pulley position according to available belt length.

2 To perform strength analysis, switch to the Calculation page of the

V-belt generator.


File Name Settings

1 In the upper-right corner of the V-Belts Component Generator, click

File Naming.

The File Naming dialog box specifies the Display name of V-belt

connection components and the Filename settings.

2 In the File Naming dialog box, select the Always prompt for filename

box. By making this selection, you are prompted for the newly inserted

Design Accelerator file name and display name of the component every

time you create a component.3 Click OK to insert the V-belts transmission to the assembly.

File Name Settings | 873




Place Constraints


Position panel ➤

Constrain.

2 Constrain the second pulley axis to the shaft axis using the Mate

constraint.

The following image shows the correct selection of the constraint for

the second pulley axis.






Place Constraints | 875



Summary


■ Design V-belts connection with two pulleys.

■ Design a belt.

■ Set pulley properties.


■ Insert a V-belts connection.

Remember to check Help for further information.

Previous (page 874)




Bearings

About this tutorial



35

877



bearing.iam (ANSI standard)Tutorial File Used





Create and edit a bearing connection using the Design Accelerator Bearing

generator.

Objectives

■ Select bearings from Content Center according to specific criteria.

■ Set bearing parameters.

■ Set criteria parameters for bearing selection.

■ Insert a bearing.

Prerequisites


■ Know how to set the active project, and navigate the model space with

the various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 878)

Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open

Bearings

➤

bearing.iam.

878 | Chapter 35 Bearings









Bearing .

NOTE Hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Bearing command to load

the Bearing Generator with the default installation data.


Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane

Specify the position of the first bearing.

1 Click Cylindrical Face , and select the shaft face in the

assembly.

Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane | 879



2 Click Start Plane. Select the plane in the shaft where the

bearing will be mated.




3 Click the Orientation option to change the orientation of the

bearing.

The program automatically inserts the Bearing Inside Diameter (Shaft

Diameter) value into the filter dimension edit fields on the right side of

the Design tab.

NOTE The beginning workflow can vary. You can first select the type of bearing

from Content Center, and then specify ranges for outside bearing diameter, shaft

diameter, and bearing width. Selecting the shaft cylindrical face is a logical first

step, because the program then inserts the values for shaft diameter automatically

into the Bearing Generator.


Select the Shaft Cylindrical Face and Start Plane | 881



Select Type of Bearing

Select the type of Bearing from Content Center.

1 To open Content Center, click the arrow next to the topmost edit field

in the dialog box.

2 Click the icon to select Angular Contact Ball Bearings.

The bearing that matches the inserted criteria appears in the lower part

of the Design tab.

Tips

■ For bearing selection, Family is recommended.

■ To narrow your selection, you can select Standard when you choose

bearings from Content Center.


Set Filter Parameters




To narrow bearing selection, you can enter filter values for bearing dimensions.

It is not necessary to do so in this tutorial, because previously you selected

the cylindrical face in the assembly, and the appropriate Inside Bearing Diameter (Shaft Diameter) range values were inserted into the second row

of filter edit fields. These filter edit fields appear on the right side of the Design

tab.

In this tutorial, we use the ANSI Standard, which usually offers one bearing

for one Inside bearing diameter. In the lower part of the Design tab, only

one bearing appears.

To narrow the selection:

1 In the first row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearing

outside diameter.

2 In the third row of filter dimensions edit fields, specify a range for bearing

width.

NOTE You must enter both filter values. They can be identical.


Update the Bearing List

1 Change the type of bearing or the filter values, as described previously,

to activate the Update command.

2 Click the Update command to update the list of bearings that match

the filter criteria.


Select Bearing

When the bearing list is updated, a list of bearings that match the criteria

appears in the lower part of the Design tab. In this tutorial, only the SKF ALS

15 bearing displays in the list; however, you must still select it.

1 Move your cursor over the row containing the bearing.

Update the Bearing List | 883



2 Click the row to select the bearing.

When you select the bearing, it displays in the field above the list, and theOK command is enabled.


Perform the Calculation

1 Click the Calculation tab to perform a calculation and strength check.

2 Select the type of calculation. In this tutorial, select the Check

calculation option.

3 Enter 100 lbforce for the Radial Load.

4 Set 3000 lbforce for Basic Dynamic Load Rating in the BearingProperties group box.

5 Click Calculate to perform the calculation. Results appear on the right

side of the Calculation tab.

NOTE The values of the bearing selected in the Design tab are inserted into the

edit fields automatically.


Insert First Bearing

After you have performed the calculation and strength check described in theprevious lesson, you can insert the first bearing.

1 Click OK to display the File Naming dialog box.

2 Clear the Always prompt for filename check box to prevent

prompting for a new Design Accelerator file name and component display

name every time you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the bearing into the Autodesk Inventor assembly.




In the next several lessons, we insert a second bearing.


Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter

ValueSet the filter to find the appropriate bearing according to the Inside bearing

diameter dimension.



Bearing .

2 In the right side of the Design tab, click the arrow next to the

second From field.

3 Select Measure from the menu.

4 In the assembly, click the shaft element to measure the dimension.

Start the Generator and Specify Bearing Filter Value | 885



The program inserts the Inside bearing diameter value (2 in) into the

From field.

5 To insert the end value, enter 2 in the To field.





Select Bearing Type

Select the type of Bearing from the Content Center.

1 To open Content Center, click the arrow next to the first edit field.

2 Click the icon to select the Angular Contact Ball Bearings category.

A list of the bearings matching the inserted criteria are displayed in the

lower part of the Design tab.

3 Select the ALS 16 bearing.

The name of the selected bearing displays in the field above the list.


Place and Insert Second Bearing

Now, we specify placement of the second bearing.

1 Click Cylindrical Face , and select the shaft face in the

assembly.

Select Bearing Type | 887



2 Ensure the Start Plane command is selected, and select the

plane in the shaft where the bearing will be mated.




3 Click the Orientation option to change the orientation of thebearing.

4 Select the bearing from the list near the bottom of the dialog box.

5 Click OK to insert the second bearing into assembly.



Place and Insert Second Bearing | 889



Summary


■ Select bearings from the Content Center according to specific criteria.

■ Set bearing parameters.

■ Insert bearings.

Previous (page 887)




Disc Cams

About this tutorial

36

891



Design disc cams.



Cam_Spring.iamTutorial File Used





In this tutorial, you design and edit cams using the Design Accelerator Disc

Cam Generator.

Objectives

■ Design a disc cam.

■ Position the disc cam within the assembly.

■ Set disc cam properties.

■ Add your own motion file.

■ Set a file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Accelerator

component.

■ Insert the disc cam into the assembly.

Prerequisites


various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 893)

892 | Chapter 36 Disc Cams







Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Disc Cams

and Compression Springs ➤

Cam_Spring.iam.



Disc Cam .

The Disc Cam Generator opens in the Design tab by default.

NOTE To load the Disc Cam Component Generator with the default

installation data, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the Disc Cam

command.





Specify Disc Cam Placement

To insert a model of the disc cam into the assembly:

1 Select Component from the drop-down menu in the Cam region of

the dialog box.

NOTE If you select the No Model option from the drop-down list, the

program inserts only the calculation into the assembly.

2 Click Cylindrical Face, and then select the cylindrical face.

3 Click Start plane, and then select the start plane.





Specify Disc Cam Parameters

In the Cam region, enter the parameters for the cam:

1 In the Basic Radius field, enter 22 mm.

2 In the Cam Width field, enter 10 mm.

3 Click More Options in the lower right corner of the Design tab.

4 In the Follower Type region, select Swinging Arm.

5 In the Follower Shape region, select Cylinder.

6 In the Follower region (in the upper portion of the dialog box), enter

16 mm in the Roller Radius field.

7 In the Pivot Distance field, enter 60 mm.

8 In the Arm Length field, enter 60 mm.

9 In the Reaction Arm field, enter 60 mm.

Specify Disc Cam Parameters | 895




Set Segment Values

1 In the Actual Segment region, select 1 from the drop-down menu.

■ You can also select a segment by clicking the segment in the graph.

■ You can set segment length by dragging the segment end in the graph

area.

2 From the Motion Function drop-down menu, select Double

Harmonic - Part 1.

3 Set Motion End Position to 90 degrees.

4 Set Lift at End to 5 mm.

5 In the Actual Segment region, select 2 from the drop-down menu.

6 From the Motion Function drop-down menu, select Double

Harmonic - Part 2.

7 Set Motion End Position to 180 degrees.





Adding Segments

Though you do not add or delete segments in this tutorial, this page describes

how to do so.

■ Click Add After in the Actual Segment area to add a new segment after

the currently selected segment.

■ Click Add Before to add new segment before the currently selected

segment.

■ Click Delete to delete the currently selected segment.

■ The Zoom command switches on or off the zoom to the cam elementgraphs only.

■ The Save graph data to file command saves all graph data and

data about cam profile and follower path to the tab-delimited text file.


Adding Segments | 897



Create Your Own Motion File

The following page is not required to complete this tutorial.

The Disc Cam Generator offers a list of motions available within the drop-down

menu in the Actual Segment region. You can also define your own type of

motion, as well as remove any user-defined motion from the menu.

Create and define a motion.

1 Create a text file, and enter the following values for a Polynomial motion

of the third degree.

NOTE You must format the text file properly. Click the Help command on

the Add Motion dialog box for more information.

00

0.0280.1

0.1040.2

0.2160.3

0.3520.4

0.50.5

0.6480.6

0.7840.7

0.8960.8

0.9720.9

11

2 Save the file.




3 In the Actual Segment region of the cam generator, click Add new

user motion.

4 Enter a motion name.

5 Browse to, and select, the .TXT file you created.

6 Click OK to add your motion to the list of motions. Each user motion

appears with the icon.

TIP To delete a user-defined motion, select the motion and then click Delete.



You use the Calculation tab to set values to perform calculation and strength

check.

1 Switch to the Calculation tab.

2 Select Cycle Time, and enter 1 s.

3 In the Follower Loads region, enter 20 N for the Force on Roller

field.

4 For Accelerated Weight, enter 0.010 kg.

5 For Spring Rating , enter 2 N/mm.

6 Enter these values for the Cam Material and Follower Material

fields.

■ For the Allowable Pressure field, enter 200 MPa.

■ For the Modulus of Elasticity field, enter 206700 MPa.

■ For the Poisson’s Ratio field, enter 0.3 ul.

7 Click Calculate to perform the calculation.

The program shows the results on the right side of the Calculation tab. The

inputs that fail the calculation are displayed in red (their value does not

correspond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of the

calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area. It displays whenyou click the chevron in the lower-right part of the Calculation tab.

Perform the Calculation | 899



TIP Click the Results command in the right upper corner to open anHTML report.

Click OK.


File Name Settings

In the File Naming dialog box:

1 Specify the Display name of the disc cam and the File name settings.

2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newly

inserted Design Accelerator file name and display name of the component

every time you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the disc cam into the assembly.





Place Constraints


Position panel ➤

Constrain

.

2 In the Assembly tab of the Place Constraint dialog box, select the

Tangent type to constrain the cam.

Place Constraints | 901



3 Save the assembly. You use this assembly in the Compression Springs

tutorial.


Summary

In this tutorial, you used the Design Accelerator Disc Cam generator to create

and edit cams.




You learned how to:

■ Design a disc cam.

■ Position the disc cam within the assembly.

■ Set disc cam properties.

■ Add your own motion file.

■ Set the file name and display name for a newly inserted Design Accelerator

component.

■ Insert a disc cam into the assembly.

Refer to the Help for further information.

Previous (page 901)

Summary | 903



904



Compression Springs

About this tutorial

37

905



Design compression springs.



Cam_Spring.iamTutorial File Used





In this tutorial, you create compression springs using the Design Accelerator

Compression Spring generator.

Objectives

■ Design a compression spring.

■ Position the compression spring within the assembly.

■ Use the graphical preview.

■ Set compression spring properties.


■ Insert the compression spring into the assembly.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Disc Cams tutorial.


various view tools.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 907)

906 | Chapter 37 Compression Springs







Start the Generator

1 Set your active project to tutorial_files, and then open Disc Cams

and Compression Springs ➤

Cam_Spring.iam.


Spring panel ➤

Compression

.

The Compression Spring Generator opens in the Design tab by default,

with the last valid settings.

■ Hold the CTRL key while clicking the Compression command to

load the Compression Spring Component Generator with the default

installation data.




■ We recommend that you create a disc cam using the disc cam tutorial

before you design a compression spring, so that your assembly is

complete.


Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load

1 Click Axis in the Placement region, and then select the cylindrical

face of the valve.

2 Select Start Plane. Orbit the assembly and select the start plane of the

top retainer as shown on the image below.




A graphical preview of the compression spring displays in the Autodesk

Inventor assembly.

Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load | 909



A graphical preview of the selected geometry displays in Autodesk

Inventor.

In the graphical preview of the compression spring, four types of gripsare available:

■ grips to specify the spring diameter

■ grips to specify the wire diameter

■ grip to move the spring along its axis

■ grip to change the coils number

3 To edit a value, drag or double-click the appropriate grip.

4 On the Design tab, in the Placement region, select

Min. Load from the drop-down menu.




NOTE When you click the spring reference image at the top of the Design tab,

a schematic image with the basic spring dimensions opens.


Specify Compression Spring Placement and Load | 911



Measure the Dimension

We can use the Measure command to measure the distance between two

faces. The generator automatically designs a compression preview according

to the measured distance.

1 Select the Calculation tab. In the Spring Strength Calculation

region, select Compression Spring Design from the drop-down menu.

2 In the Assembly Dimensions region select H, L1--> L8.

3 Click the arrow next to the Min. Load Length field.

4 Select Measure.

5 In Autodesk Inventor assembly, select two faces on the spring retainers

to measure the distance between them.




6 Click Calculate to display the preview. Notice that measured distance

of 30 mm appears in the Min. Load Length field.

Measure the Dimension | 913





In the Calculation tab, you can set the values for compression springcalculation.

1 In Calculation Options, select F, Assembly Dimensions -->d, L0,

n, D from the Design Type drop-down menu.

2 Select No Correction from the Method of Stress Curvature

Correction drop-down menu.

3 In the Loads region:

■ Set Min. Load to 500 N.

■ Set Max. Load to 800 N.

■ Set Working Load to 600 N.

4 Click Calculate to perform the calculation.




The program shows results on the right side of the Calculation tab.

The inputs that fail the calculation appear in red (their value does not

correspond with other inserted values or calculation criteria). Reports of the calculation are displayed in the Summary of Messages area, which

appears after you click the chevron in the lower-right part of the

Calculation tab.

5 Click the Results command in the right upper corner to open

the HTML report.

6 Click OK.


Insert the Compression Spring into the AssemblyIn the File Naming dialog box:

1 Specify the Display name of compression spring and the File name

settings.

2 Select the Always prompt for filename box to prompt for the newly

inserted Design Accelerator component's file name and display name

every time you create a component.

3 Click OK to insert the compression spring to the assembly.

When you were designing the compression spring, the program prompted

you to select the compression spring placement. The program places the

compression spring in the selected position.


Insert the Compression Spring into the Assembly | 915







Summary

The skills you learned in this tutorial include:■ Design a compression spring.

■ Position the compression spring within the assembly.

■ Use the graphical preview.

■ Set compression spring properties.


■ Insert a compression spring into the assembly.

Remember to check Help for further information.

Previous (page 915)

Summary | 917



918



Weldments

About this tutorial

Build weldments.



Welding.iam (metric)Tutorial File Used

38

919







In this tutorial, you build a weldment from an assembly.

The weldment file is a variation on the assembly template and opens with the

Weld tab active. You can also use any of the other assembly tabs and

commands.

You use the welding feature groups (Preparations, Welds, or Machining) to

add assembly-level features and fully define your weldment.

Objectives

■ Add weld preparation features.

■ Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads.

■ Add machining features to a welded assembly.

■ Rollback to any weldment state.

■ Create weldment drawings.

Prerequisites



and extruding.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 920)

Welding Steps Overview

When creating a weld in this tutorial, your steps include the following:

1 Set up your workspace.

2 Open an existing assembly.

3 Change to the weldment environment.

920 | Chapter 38 Weldments







4 Add groove and fillet cosmetic welds.

5 Add post-weld machining features.

6 Examine weld preparations and 3D fillet welds.

After the weldment is complete, you will:

■ Turn off the display of weld symbols in the model.

■ Open a blank drawing.

■ Create drawing views of the various weldment stages.

■ Retrieve weld symbols from the model.

■ Add a cosmetic weld annotation in the drawing.

Welding Steps Overview | 921




Weldment Feature Groups

The three weld groups represent stages in the weldment process:

■ Preparations - Metal removal, typically a chamfer, to prepare for a weld.

■ Welds - Fillet, groove, and cosmetic weld beads.

■ Machining - Metal removal after welding, often through multiple assembly

components.

Features added in the three groups act at the assembly-level only. They do not

appear in the individual parts and subassemblies.

The following image shows weld and machining features in a weldment

assembly.




The weldment features exist in the weldment assembly only and do not affect

the part files.

You activate the various weldment feature groups with the Weld tab or

through the Model browser. To do this, you must first open a Weldment file.

1 Set the active project to tutorial_files.

2 Click New on the Quick Access toolbar. Ensure that you click

the icon itself, and not the associated drop-down menu.

3 To ensure that you complete this tutorial using a metric template file,

click the Metric tab displayed along the top of the selection area of the

dialog box.

4 Double-click the template file Weldment (ANSI - mm).iam.

5 To activate the Preparation feature group, click Preparation on theWeld tab.

Commands for creating weld preparations, such as chamfers and

assembly-level cut extrusions, become active on the Weld tab.

You can also activate one of the three weld groups through the Model

browser. For example, if you double-click Welds in the browser, the

commands for creating welds, such as Fillet, Groove, and Cosmetic,

become active. Alternatively, you can right-click a group in the browser

and select Edit from the context menu.

6 Close this file without saving.


Weldment Feature Groups | 923



Open an Assembly

Two different workflows can be used to create a weldment. You can:

■ Use a weldment template to create an empty weldment into which you

then place components and welds.

■ Open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.

In this exercise, you open an existing assembly and convert it into a weldment.

1 Click Open on the Quick Access toolbar, and then open

Weldments ➤

Welding.iam.

2 Click Zoom All on the Navigation bar to fit the model in the window.


Convert panel ➤

Convert to Weldment.

A message appears alerting you that the weldment cannot be converted

back to an assembly.

4 Click Yes. The Convert to Weldment dialog box displays.

5 Click the ANSI Standard option.

6 Select Welded Steel Mild from the Weld Bead Material drop-down

list.

7 Click OK.




The weld feature groups (Preparations, Welds, and Machining) appear

in the Model browser.


Weld Types

You can create three types of weld features: fillet, groove, and cosmetic welds.

Cosmetic weld features, the preferred type, are represented by graphical

elements. You can represent a wide variety of weld beads as cosmetic welds,

including fillet welds and various groove welds.

Weld preparations are not required for cosmetic welds. The weld symbol

contains the weld preparation required for the selected edges.

Cosmetic weld features do not affect mass properties, and the application does

not consider them during interference analysis.

You can also create 3D fillet welds.

■ The weld is a true 3D feature in the assembly.

■ The program evaluates 3D fillet welds in assembly mass properties and

interference analysis.

Weld Types | 925



TIP Limit the use of 3D fillet welds to specific cases that require functionality not

available in cosmetic welds.


Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead

In this portion of the tutorial, you add two cosmetic weld beads to the

assembly.

To add a weld bead, you must first activate the Welds group.

1 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit from the

pop-up context menu.

2 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤

Weld panel ➤

Cosmetic

.

3 Select the five edges on the Brace part. Edge selections define the extents

of the weld bead.




NOTE You may need to use the Select Other command to select the two vertical

edges.


Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued)

1 Click the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog

box, then click Weld Symbol as shown.

2 On the Weld Symbol palette, click Bevel Groove Weld.

Add a Cosmetic Weld Bead (continued) | 927




Complete the Cosmetic Weld

1 Define the weld properties:

NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identify

the field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window

is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the

cursor.

■ Enter 6 mm in the Depth field (use the following illustration forreference).

■ Enter 6 mm in the Leg 2 field.

■ Select the Flat symbol from the Contour drop-down menu.

■ Select G (grind) from the Method drop-down menu (this menu is

only visible after you specify a contour).




2 Click OK.

NOTE Pause the cursor over a data entry field, and use the tooltips to identifythe field name. Make certain that the Autodesk Inventor application window

is active (and not this tutorial window), or tooltips will not appear under the

cursor.

The program represents a cosmetic weld with a bright orange line. The

weld symbol is attached to the cosmetic weld.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not appear exactly as shown in the previous

illustration.


Return panel ➤

Return.

4 Save the file.


Complete the Cosmetic Weld | 929



Weld Extents

You can control the length of single edge welds by specifying two parallel

faces or work planes.

1 In the Model browser, right-click the START WELD work plane, and

select Visibility.

2 Repeat for the END WELD work plane.

3 In the Model browser, right-click Welds, and then select Edit.

4 Click Weld tab ➤

Weld panel ➤

Cosmetic.

5 Click the edge highlighted as shown.

TIP If you select the wrong edge, press the Ctrl key and deselect the edge.


Complete the Weld Extent

1 In the Cosmetic Weld dialog box, select From-To from the Extents

drop-down list.

2 Select the two visible work planes.




TIP Click on the outer edge of a work plane to select it.

3 To specify the weld bead size, begin by clicking the Create Welding Symbol check box to expand the dialog box.

4 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 text box.

5 Click OK.

6 Click Return.

7 Turn off the visibility of the two work planes.

NOTE Your weld symbol may not be visible following creation, or it may not

appear like the previous illustration. If it is not visible, orbit the model until you

can see the symbol. You can click the symbol, and then drag the green grips to

resize the symbol leader or move the symbol along the weld.


Create a 3D Fillet Weld

Next, we add a simple 3D fillet weld to one of the cylindrical reinforcement

plates.

1 In the Model browser, double-click the Welds node.


Weld panel ➤

Fillet.

Create a 3D Fillet Weld | 931



For a 3D weld, you select sets of faces on two different components. The

program creates the weld at the common edges of the faces.

3 Click the channel face adjacent to one of the cylindrical plates.


Complete the 3D Fillet Weld

To complete the weld, select the other face to locate the weld.

1 In the dialog box, click the Select Face(s) 2 button.

2 Click the cylindrical face on the adjacent plate.




3 Enter 6 mm in both fields under the selector buttons.

4 Select the Create Welding Symbol check box.

5 Enter 6 mm in the Leg 1 field.

6 Click OK to create a 45 degree fillet with a leg length of 6 mm.

Complete the 3D Fillet Weld | 933




Change Weld Symbol Visibility

In larger weldments, the graphics screen can become cluttered with weld

symbols. You can control the visibility of weld symbols, or weld features,

individually or as a group.

1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then remove the checkmark

from Symbol Visibility. The program hides the weld symbols in the

graphics window.

Alternatively, expand the Welds node and switch the visibility of

individual weld symbols.

2 Click Return to go back to the weldment assembly environment.


Add a Machining Feature

Weldments often require machining after welding. The final weld feature

group, Machining, provides a way to add assembly-level features that remove

material from the welded assembly.

To add a machining feature, on the ribbon, click Weld tab➤

Processpanel ➤

Machining .





Add a Hole

1 On the ribbon, click Weld tab ➤ Preparation and Machining

panel ➤

Hole.

2 In the Holes dialog box, select Concentric from the Placement

drop-down menu.

3 Select the top face of one of the cylindrical reinforcement plates.

4 For the circular reference, select the circular edge of the cylindrical plate.

5 Highlight the 3-mm dimension in the Diameter field, and then enter33 mm as the hole diameter.

6 Select Through All from the Termination drop-down menu.

7 Click OK.

The hole feature cuts through the two hole plates and the channel.

NOTE You can add extrude cuts, chamfers, and hole features in both the

Preparations and Machining weld groups.


Add a Hole | 935



Add an Extrude Cut

Add a second machining feature that cuts through one of the welds.


Sketch panel ➤

2D Sketch.

2 Click the top face of the brace highlighted in the following figure.


Draw panel ➤

Project

Geometry.

4 Click the edge highlighted as shown.





Complete the Sketch


Draw panel ➤

Center Point

Circle.

2 Move the cursor over the midpoint of the projected line, and then click

when the green midpoint symbol appears.

3 Move the cursor away from the center point, and then click again to

define the radius of the circle.

The exact size of the circle radius is not important. Use the circle in the

following figure as a guide.

4 Right-click, and select Done [ESC] from the marking menu.


Exit panel ➤

Finish Sketch orright-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.


Extrude the Sketch


Preparation and Machining

panel ➤

Extrude.

The program selects the circle profile.2 Select All from the Extents drop-down list in the Extrude dialog box.

Complete the Sketch | 937



3 Ensure that Direction is selected as shown.

The program previews the cut, which should look like the image below.

4 Click OK.

The cut affects the two components and the weld bead.





Feature Rollback

The three weldment groups represent time-dependent processes in the creation

of a welded assembly. Features from a subsequent process cannot appear when

an earlier group is active. For example, machining features do not appear

when the Welds group is active.

1 Right-click Welds in the Model browser, and then select Edit from the

pop-up context menu.

The program rolls back the model to the welding state and removes the

two machining features.

2 Click Return.

In the weldment assembly environment, all weld group features are

visible.


Feature Rollback | 939



Create a Weldment Drawing

You can create drawing views of the weldment in the following states:

■ Assembled with no assembly-level features.

■ Complete with weld preparations.

■ As welded.

■ With all post-weld machining.

To create a weldment drawing:

1 OpenWelding.idw.

The drawing contains a blank A0 sheet with a border.


Create panel ➤

Base.

The Drawing View dialog box displays.

If Welding.iam is the only model open, it is automatically selected as

the source for the drawing. (If nothing is selected it is likely that you

have not clicked Return as instructed on the previous panel).

3 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the File

list, and then select Welding.iam from the list.

4 On the Model State tab, select Welds from the Weldment list.

5 On the Component tab, select All Components from the

Representation View menu.

6 Select 1/2 from the Scale list.7 Click Top in the Orientation list.


Place Drawing Views

To complete the base view:

1 Click the upper-left corner of the sheet as shown.




2 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab ➤

Create panel ➤

Projected

command is automatically activated.

3 In the graphics window, move the cursor below the base view and click

when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.


Complete Orthographic Views

You can continue to place projected views from the base view.

1 Move the cursor to the right of the base view.

2 Click when a preview of an orthographic projection is shown.

Complete Orthographic Views | 941



3 Right-click, and select Create.


As-machined Drawing Views

Now create drawing views of the as-machined weldment.


Create panel ➤

Base

to display the Drawing View dialog box.

2 If you have multiple models open, click the down arrow next to the File

list, and then select Welding.iam from the list.




3 Select All Components from the View pane on the Component tab.

4 Ensure Machining is selected from the Weldment list on the Model

State tab.

5 Select 1/2 from the Scale list.

6 Click Top in the Orientation list.

7 To complete the base view, click to the right of the existing views.


Projected Drawing Views

Add two projected drawing views from the base view of the machined state.

1 On the ribbon, the Place Views tab ➤

Create panel ➤

Projected

command is automatically activated.

2 Add two projected views to match the image shown.

Projected Drawing Views | 943



The machining features appear in the drawing views based on the welded

state of the assembly.


Retrieve Weld Symbols

You can retrieve weld symbols from the model in the drawing views.

1 Right-click the side view of the as-welded assembly.

2 Select Get Model Annotations

➤

Get Welding Symbols from the

overflow menu.

NOTE The overflow menu appears just below or just above the marking

menu. Its location depends on where you right-click in the graphics window.

Symbols for visible welds in the view are retrieved from the model and

displayed. If a weld displays in pink, right-click the symbol, and then

select Delete from the overflow menu.




3 To reposition and reorient the symbol, you can click a weld symbol and

then drag the green grips.


Add a Caterpillar

You can add cosmetic weld entities to drawing views in place of, or to improve

the documentation of, cosmetic model welds. You can add weld caterpillars

and weld end treatment geometry to any drawing view.


Navigate panel ➤

Zoom

Window.

2 Zoom in on the front view of the as-welded assembly, as shown in the

following figure.

Add a Caterpillar | 945




Add a Caterpillar (continued)


Symbols panel ➤

Caterpillar.

2 Click the five line/arc segments highlighted as shown.




3 Click the Partial command.

A partial caterpillar displays on one side of the highlighted edge.

4 Move the cursor away from the view to position the caterpillar toward

the outside of the weldment, and click to place the caterpillar.

Click the following image to play an animation. Notice how the

caterpillar switches sides as the cursor moves.

5 Click the Options tab.

6 Enter 6 mm in the Width edit box.

7 Enter 2 mm in the Spacing edit box.

8 Check Seam Visibility.

9 Click OK.

10 Save your work.


Add a Caterpillar (continued) | 947



Summary


■ Create a weldment from an assembly.

■ Add weld preparation features.

■ Create cosmetic and 3D weld beads.

■ Add machining features to a welded assembly.

■ Rollback to any weldment state.

■ Create weldment drawings.

Previous (page 946)




Sheet Metal Parts

39

949



About this tutorial

950 | Chapter 39 Sheet Metal Parts



Build sheet metal parts.



Cylinder Clamp.iam metric_hole.ide 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idwTutorial File

Used





Parts fabricated from sheet metal are commonly required in designs. AutodeskInventor provides functionality that simplifies the design, editing, and

documentation of both the finished folded model and flat patterns associated

with sheet metal parts.

Objectives

■ Create a simple sheet metal guard working within the context of the

Cylinder Clamp assembly that was used in the Assemblies tutorial.

■ Add sheet metal-specific annotations to a drawing of the guard.

Prerequisites

■ Complete the Parts 2 and Assemblies tutorials.

■ Understand the basics of sheet metal fabrication.




Navigation Tips



Next (page 952)








Get Started

In the first portion of this tutorial, you will create a simple sheet metal guard.

You create the guard in the assembly using projected geometry and

measurements of assembly components. This workflow ensures that the guard

will be sized correctly.

There are other ways to start a design. Before you begin the steps of the tutorial,

let’s review a typical workflow that produces a similar model:

1 A common first step is the creation of a closed profile sketch.

2 Using this closed profile sketch, a sheet metal Face feature is created as

the base feature of the model.




3 Once a base Face feature exists, Flange features can be added.

4 Additional Flange features with automatic mitering can be added to

existing Flange features.

5 Finally, a series of Hole features can complete the model.

Using a Face feature as the base feature is very common in a stand-alone design

workflow. However, the sheet metal part that you are creating will often need

to fit inside or over existing parts in an assembly. In the next portion of the

tutorial, you open an existing assembly and create a part like the one

illustrated. You will use geometry selected in the assembly to determine the

size and position of the features that you will create.

Get Started | 953




Open the Assembly


2 OpenCylinder Clamp ➤

Cylinder Clamp.iam.

3 Using the View Cube, Orbit, or View Face, adjust your view of the

assembly so that it appears as follows:

The guard that you are going to create must fit over the base. By creating the

sketch for a Contour Flange feature on the face of Cylinder Base.ipt, you

can use the geometry of that part while defining your sketch profile geometry.


Component panel ➤

Create,

or right-click and select Create Component from the marking menu.

5 Enter my_2mm_guard in the New Component Name field in the CreateIn-Place Component dialog box.




6 Click the Browse Templates button to the right of the Template

field, which contains Standard.ipt as the default selection, and select

the Metric tab in the displayed Open Template dialog box.

7 Select the Sheet Metal (mm).ipt template, and click OK to enter the

selection in the Create In-Place Component dialog box (replacing the

default) and close the Open Template dialog box.

8 Click OK to close the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

9 In the graphics window, click to select the back face of Cylinder

Base.ipt as shown:

Following the selection of the face shown, an empty sketch within the newly

created sheet metal file displays. Next you create a simple open profile sketch

to use to create a Contour Flange as the base feature of your guard.


Open the Assembly | 955



Prepare Your Sketch

NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you have

recently completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, your sketch grid is

undisplayed by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require

the use of the sketch grid and can be completed with the grid displayed or

undisplayed.

While creating a part within an assembly, you are able to see and reference

the other parts in the assembly. By default, when you reference geometry in

another part, you get an associative relationship to that part. If the original

part changes, the geometry that you created also changes to honor the

association. In this tutorial, you use an option to reference the geometry

without creating the associative reference. In situations where you are certain




there will be no further design changes, not creating an associative relationship

improves subsequent assembly recompute performance.


Format panel ➤

Construction

to ensure that the line you project is “construction” geometry that will

not be used for feature creation.

2 Next, click Sketch tab ➤

Draw panel ➤

Project Geometry, or

right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu.

3 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the lower

edge of Cylinder Base.ipt as shown:

NOTE Holding down the Ctrl key while projecting geometry breaks the associative

link that would normally be obtained.

Next, you create a simple, three-line sketch that represents the inside faces of

the Contour Flange. It will create the basic shape of the guard.


Prepare Your Sketch | 957



Create the Open Profile


Format panel ➤

Construction

to reset your geometry creation to normal geometry.

2 Next, click Sketch tab ➤

Draw panel ➤

Line, or right-click and

select Line from the marking menu.

3 In the graphics window, move your cursor over the lower-left corner of

Cylinder Base.ipt until you see the green circle. It indicates that you

are over the endpoint of the construction line that you previously

projected.

4 Click to place the first point of your line.

5 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indications,

place three line segments: vertical, then horizontal, and then vertical

again. Beginning the new segment from the end point of the previous

segment ensures that the lines form a single, continuous open profile.Your profile should appear as in the following image:




NOTE To determine the horizontal endpoint on the right end of segment2, drag your cursor down to locate the right end point of the construction

line that you projected earlier and then move your cursor upwards vertically

maintaining that alignment. The lower endpoint of segment 3 should be

coincident with the right endpoint of the projected construction line.

These three lines represent the inside faces of the Contour Flange that

creates the base feature of the sheet metal guard.


Constrain panel ➤

Dimension, or right-click

and select Create Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place a

vertical dimension of 95 mm to define the height of the guard. Both

vertical line segments adjust due to the horizontal constraint that was

created when segment 2 was placed.

Create the Open Profile | 959



7 Click Sketch tab ➤ Exit panel ➤ Finish Sketch, or right-click

and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment.

Next, you create the Contour Flange using the open profile sketch you just

created.


Create a Contour Flange

Before you create the Contour Flange, check the Sheet Metal Defaults.




NOTE Complete the Sheet Metal Styles tutorial (when you have time) to

understand the inter-relationships between the Materials, Sheet Metal Rules, and

Sheet Metal Unfolding Rules. By correctly establishing a set of Sheet Metal Rules

for your work, and ensuring that these rules are set as the default in your Sheet

Metal.ipt template, you will be able to begin sheet metal design projects without

editing the Sheet Metal Defaults each time you start a new part design.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤

Setup panel ➤

Sheet

Metal Defaults, or right-click and select Sheet Metal Defaults from

the marking menu.

2 Take note of the following items:

■ Name of the Sheet Metal Rule

■ State of the check box for Use Thickness from Rule

■ Value in the Thickness field

If Use Thickness from Rule is checked, and the value in the

Thickness field is something other than 2 mm, click the check box to

remove the check.

3 The Thickness field is now enabled. Enter 2 mm to replace the value in

this field.

4 Click OK to apply the 2-mm thickness to the current model file.

NOTE These steps allowed you to override the material thickness declared by the

active Sheet Metal Rule. In most cases, you begin your designs using a template

that has an appropriate Sheet Metal Rule active. Or, you previously created Sheet

Metal Rules for your work that you can select from the drop-down list of Rules

available in the shared Styles and Standards library.

Now, you can create the Contour Flange.


Create panel ➤

Contour

Flange.

6 In the graphics window, click over the three-line sketch that you

previously completed. Note that the 2-mm thickness of the sheet metal

Contour Flange is previewed, and that it is offset to the inside.

7 In the Contour Flange dialog box, click the Flip Side option. The 2-mm

material thickness should now be offset to the outside of the profile, as

shown in the following image:

Create a Contour Flange | 961



8 With the Contour Flange dialog box active, adjust your view (using either

the View Cube or Orbit) to see the side of the model as follows:




Next, you change the flange creation direction and measure an existing edge

to complete the creation of the Contour Flange.


Complete the Contour Flange

1 In the Contour Flange dialog box (in the Width Extents area), click

Distance Flip.

2 Click > to the right side of the Distance field, and select Measure from

the menu.

3 With the Measure option active, click in the graphics window to

measure the length of the edge shown. Use the measured value as the

Distance value for the Contour Flange.

Complete the Contour Flange | 963



Following the click, the measured value of 120 mm displays in the

Distance field and the Contour Flange previews as 120 mm long.

4 Click OK to create the displayed Contour Flange and close the dialog

box.




The sheet metal Contour Flange is the base feature in the model file that you

created working within the assembly context. The sheet metal part displays

as solid while the other components within the assembly display as translucent.

By working within the assembly context you were able to use existing critical

dimensions without initially knowing their values. Next, you add a sheetmetal Flange feature with automatic mitering around three edges along the

back side of the guard.


Place a Flange Feature

Many sheet metal parts are created by bending a portion of the flat sheet. Use

the Flange command to add flat material along an edge, portion of an edge

or around all edges of a face. The flat material connects to the selected edge

using a bend radius defined within your Sheet Metal Rule. The Flange

Place a Flange Feature | 965



command provides flexibility in the position and size of the flange relative

to the selected edge and other features within the evolving model.


Create panel ➤

Flange,

or right-click and select Flange from the marking menu.

2 In the graphics window, click to select the three inside edges shown.

As you select the edges, the Flange feature previews. Note that Flanges created

from co-planar edges automatically miter at corners that would otherwise

interfere. You can access the Auto-miter option from the Corner tab of the

Flange dialog box.

NOTE For this Flange, be certain to select the three inside edges.

By default, sheet metal Flange features are created using the Bend Position

option labeled Inside of bend face extents. This produces a Flange face

coincident with the selected edge. In this case, such a Flange would not allow

clearance for the corners of Cylinder Base.ipt. Instead, you will change the




Bend Position to Bend from the adjacent face, which uses the selected

edge as the beginning location of the bend for the Flange.

3 Click the Bend Position option labeled Bend from the adjacent

face.

NOTE As you click this option, notice that the preview of the three Flange

faces moves out from the selected edges. To see this change more clearly,

display the model as Wireframe (View tab ➤

Appearance panel ➤

Wireframe from under the Visual Style drop-down menu), and view

the model from the Top. Switch between Inside of bend face extents

and Bend from the adjacent face (be certain to return to Bend from

the adjacent face, then reset your display to Shaded and reset your

view angle, before continuing).

4 For this Flange feature, use the default value of 90 degrees for the Flange

Angle, as well as the default value of 25 mm for the Height Extents

Distance.

5 Click OK to create the Flange and close the Flange dialog box.

Place a Flange Feature | 967



Next, you create a sketch containing center marks for punched holes.


Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks


Sketch panel ➤

Create

2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

Next, select the face of the guard shown in the following image:




NOTE If you have not already cleared the Autoproject edges for sketch

creation and edit application option as specified in the tutorial

Prerequisites, this sketch and all subsequent sketches made in this tutorial

will have unnecessary projected geometry.

2 If necessary, adjust your view normal to the sketch using the View Cube

or the View Face command. Click View tab ➤

Appearance panel

➤

Shaded with Hidden Edges from the drop-down menu under

Visual Style. Use this orientation and display to see edges of other

components within the assembly. Your view should appear as follows:

Prepare to Sketch Punch Center Marks | 969



You will again create non-associative construction geometry, as you didwhen you began your sketch for the Contour Flange base feature.


Format panel ➤

Construction.


Draw panel ➤

Project Geometry, or

right-click and select Project Geometry from the marking menu.

5 While holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard, click the outside

circular edge of Lock Pin:1 as shown:

This projected circle provides the location for a sketched Center Point.

It locates a Punch feature (used to provide clearance for the pin), as well

as the alignment for two additional Center Points that will be used to




locate punched mounting holes to attach the guard to Cylinder

Base.ipt.

Continue by adding two construction line segments.


Sketch Punch Centers


Draw panel ➤

Line, or

right-click and select Line from the marking menu.

2 In the graphics window, move your cursor into the center of the

construction circle previously projected. When the green dot appears,

indicating that you have located the center of the projected circle, click

to place the first point of a line segment:

3 Paying attention to the vertical and horizontal constraint indicators,

place a vertical and a horizontal construction line segment by selecting

two additional points. Your profile should appear as follows:

Sketch Punch Centers | 971




Constrain panel ➤

Dimension or right-clickand select Create Dimension from the marking menu Then, place a

horizontal length dimension of 85 mm that defines the distance between

the guard mounting holes.

5 Continue by placing a vertical dimension of 8 mm between the bottom

edge of the guard and the horizontal construction line:


Format panel ➤

Construction to reset your

geometry creation to normal geometry.


Draw panel ➤

Point.




8 Place three sketch points at the ends of the two construction line

segments.


Exit panel ➤

Finish Sketch, or right-click

and select Finish 2D Sketch to exit the sketch environment.

NOTE You can optionally continue to work with a hidden edge display. The

remaining illustrations in this tutorial show a shaded display. To return to a shaded

display, click View tab ➤ Appearance panel ➤ Shaded from the drop-down

menu under Visual Style.

Now that you have sketched Center Points, you will next place two

different-sized Punch features to provide clearance for the pin and holes for

mounting screws.Previous (page 968) | Next (page 973)

Punch Holes

While there are several ways to create circular holes in your sheet metal part,

using a round Punch feature provides you with annotation benefits when you

detail the flat pattern of your design.

Punch Holes | 973



NOTE This tutorial uses an example Sheet Metal Punch iFeature that contains the

two punch sizes required by this tutorial. The IDE file that contains this punch is

located in the default project folder that is active when the tutorial_files project

is active. To learn more about Sheet Metal Punch iFeatures, please review the Skill

Builders posted to: http:\\www.autodesk.com\inventor-skillbuilder These sheet metal

Skill Builders can be found by clicking on the Parts heading.


Modify panel ➤

Punch

Tool.

2 The Punch Tool Directory dialog box opens. By default, it displays Punch

Tools that are stored in the Punches folder, which is located in the

Catalog folder under the default installation folder. Click Workspace

in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the Punch Tool Directory

dialog box to switch to the Tutorial Files folder.

3 Select Cylinder Clamp

➤

metric_hole.ide, and click Open to displaythe Punch Tool dialog box.

4 The example file includes punches of two different sizes; however, the

2.5-mm diameter punch is previewed on the three center points in the

displayed and unconsumed sketch. While the 2.5-mm diameter punch

is needed on two of the center points, you must first clear the center

point that will be used for the 12-mm punch. While holding the Shift

key, move your cursor over the center point as shown, and click to clear

the center point.

5 Click Finish in the Punch Tool dialog box to place the 2.5-mm diameter

punch on the remaining two center points and close the dialog box.

Next, you follow a similar set of steps to place the 12-mm diameter punch.


http://www.autodesk.com/inventor-skillbuilder

http://www.autodesk.com/inventor-skillbuilder




Punch Holes (continued)

1 Click + to the left of the Folded Model node in the Model browser to

view the expanded feature tree.

2 Click + to the left of the iFeature in the Model browser.

3 Right-click the sketch node located under the table node, and click

Share Sketch on the context menu. The sketch that was consumed

(and hidden) by the placement of the Sheet Metal Punch iFeature is

redisplayed. This provides you with a visible sketch to use while placing

the 12-mm diameter punch. Notice that a new sketch node is placed in

the Model browser above the feature that originally consumed the sketch.


Modify panel ➤

Punch

Tool.

5 Click Workspace in the navigation panel on the upper-left side of the

Punch Tool Directory dialog box.

6 Select the metric_hole.ide file, and click Open.

7 Click the Punch tab in the Punch Tool dialog box.

8 Click the text string ADSK-METRIC-25 to display the list of selectable

keys that exist for this Sheet Metal Punch.

NOTE You must click directly on the text stringADSK-METRIC-25. Clicking

the line with the text will not work.

9 Click on ADSK-METRIC-120 to change the selection.

10 Click Refresh in the Punch Tool dialog box to refresh the displayed

preview of the Punch iFeature to be placed.

Punch Holes (continued) | 975



11 Click Finish to place the 12-mm diameter Punch iFeature and close the

Punch Tool dialog box.

12 Right-click the shared sketch node in the Model browser (the node

above the first iFeature node), and click Visibility to remove the check

mark and hide the shared sketch geometry.

Next, you mirror the punched holes.


Mirror the Punched Holes

To complete the folded model of your guard, mirror the three punched holes

to the face on the opposite side. The Mirror functionality requires a plane to




mirror across, and due to the steps used to construct this part, you cannot

simply use one of the origin planes.


Work Features panel ➤

Plane and select Midplane between Two Parallel Planes from the

drop-down menu.

2 In the graphics window, click the outside face shown in the following

illustration:

3 Now, rotate the view and click the outside face on the opposite side. The

new work plane is created midplane between the two outside faces.

Mirror the Punched Holes | 977



4 Click Sheet Metal tab ➤

Pattern panel ➤

Mirror.

5 Click in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the first

2.5-mm Punch.

6 Click again in the Model browser to select the iFeature node of the

second 12-mm Punch.

7 Click the Mirror Plane selection arrow in the Mirror dialog box to

enable selection of the mirror plane.

8 In the graphics window, click the midplane work plane that you created

in the middle of the guard.

9 Click OK to mirror the selected Punch iFeatures and close the Mirror

dialog box. Notice that a Mirror node appears in the Model browser.




The mirrored features now appear on the opposite side of the guard.

Next, you create a flat pattern of your folded model.


Create the Flat Pattern

You have finished adding features to the folded model. Many of these features

added bends using the default bending radius. Some of these features left gaps

or corner reliefs using rules specified in the active Sheet Metal Rule. When the

folded model is flattened, these features result in a flat sheet that can be

detailed in preparation for manufacturing. Bend lines and bend extents are

shown on the flat pattern and attributes of the punched iFeatures can be

recovered during the creation of a drawing of the flat pattern.


Flat Pattern panel ➤

Create Flat Pattern.

Create the Flat Pattern | 979



Because you are working within a sheet metal part that is active within

an assembly, the sheet metal part file will be opened in isolation, and

the flat pattern will be created.

2 Double-click the Folded Model icon at the top of the Model browser

to return to the folded model.

NOTE Alternatively, you can also click Flat Pattern tab ➤

Folded Part

panel ➤ Go to Folded Part to return to the folded model state.

3 Click Save.

4 Close the copy of the my_2mm_guard file that was opened.

5 Double-click the Cylinder Clamp.iam node at the top of the browser

to return to the assembly.

6 Click Save to save the assembly.

7 Close the assembly.

Next, you add both a bend and punch table to a partially completed drawing

of the guard.





Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation

1 Open the file 2mm_inplace_guard_start.idw, located in \Tutorial

Files\Cylinder Clamp.

NOTE This drawing contains several views of a completed example guard

that is supplied with the example tutorial files.


Table panel ➤

General.

The Table dialog box displays, and the view selection cursor is active inthe graphics window.

3 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see the

dotted red view boundary highlight.

Flat Pattern Drawing Annotation | 981



4 Click to select the flat pattern view as the source view for the General

table.

NOTE The General table type provides column selections unique to the type

of source view selected. In this case, the table provides bend information.

5 Click OK in the table dialog box to accept the default selections, close

the dialog box, and place the table.

6 Move your cursor over the upper-left corner of the drawing border. When

your cursor changes to indicate a “point on” constraint, click to place

the table.




A table is created with columns for Bend ID, Bend Direction, Bend

Angle, and Bend Radius using the values for each of the bends in the

selected view. Also, notice that the Bend ID numbers have been addedto the flat pattern view near the bend centerlines.

The bend sequence identified is not likely to match the sequence your

fabrication shop uses. Modifying the bend order sequence and adjusting the

table is covered in the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial.

Next, you place a punch table on the drawing.


Place a Punch Table


Table panel ➤

Hole View

(use the down arrow to the right of Hole to display Hole View).

2 Move your cursor over the view of the flat pattern until you see the

dotted red view boundary highlight, and click to select the view.

3 Move the datum target cursor along the lower edge of the flat pattern,

until you reach the left-most corner and the “point on” constraint is

indicated.

Place a Punch Table | 983



4 Click to select this point as the datum for dimensioning the punched

holes.

5 Move the displayed outline of the table to align it with the lower-left

corner of the drawing boarder. When the “point on” constraint is

indicated, click to place the table.

6 Right-mouse click over the table, and select Edit Hole Table from the

context menu to display the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box.




7 Click Column Chooser on the Formatting tab of the dialog box to

display the Hole Table Column Chooser dialog box.

8 In this dialog box, select Description from the list of Selected

Properties, and click Remove.

9 Select HOLE DIAMETER in the list of Available Properties, and

click Add.

10 Select PUNCH ID in the list of Available Properties, and click Add.

11 Click OK to accept the new column arrangement and close the Hole

Table Column Chooser dialog box.

12 Click OK in the Edit Hole Table: View Type dialog box to update the

table using the new column arrangement and close the dialog box.

13 Save the drawing of the guard flat pattern.


Summary

Summary | 985



In this tutorial, you learned a basic workflow for creating a sheet metal part

and placing sheet metal annotations on a flat pattern drawing. Some key

points of this exercise include:■ Working within the context of an assembly, you were able to use assembly

geometry to define key design aspects of your sheet metal part.

■ Sheet metal features are often created on one side or the other of a selection

to take into account the material thickness or bend radius.

■ Sheet metal Punch iFeatures simplify the creation of simple and complex

cut (and formed) features on your model. Punch iFeatures carry attribution

that can be recovered in a Punch table on your drawings.

■ Bends created by features display a bend centerline and bend extents on

the flat pattern. These bends can be easily identified in a Bend table on

your drawing that contains important manufacturing attributes.

■ The flat pattern of your folded model is easily created and provides an

accurate representation of the flattened bend zones between adjacent

features. The size of these flattened bend zones are determined by the

Unfold Rule defined within the active Sheet Metal Rule used when you

begin a new sheet metal model from a template.

What Next? - As a next step, continue to explore sheet metal functionality

by completing the Sheet Metal Parts 2 tutorial.

Previous (page 983)




Sheet Metal Parts 2

About this tutorial

Explore sheet metal functionality.


40

987




Start a new sheet metal part (metric)

contour_roll-start.ipt

Tutorial File Used

sm_part2_model-completed.ipt (finished version)





Create a lofted flange feature, and then rip and flatten it. Work with the flat

pattern to explore many sheet metal features.

Objectives■ Lofted flange features

■ Rip features

■ Bend order sequence

■ Cosmetic centerline features

■ Contour Roll features

■ Unfold features, with features added to the flattened model

■ Added refold features

Prerequisites

■ Complete the tutorial Sheet Metal Parts.


various view tools.




Navigation Tips



Next (page 989)

988 | Chapter 40 Sheet Metal Parts 2







Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches

The Lofted Flange feature provides a way to create transitional sections in

your model. They may be the only (or primary) feature in a model or they

may be part of a more complex design.

The Lofted Flange feature requires the selection of two profile sketches. The

profiles can be open or closed (or one of each) and can be on parallel or

non-parallel sketch planes. The resulting feature can be optionally targeted at

either a press brake or die-form manufacturing process.

1 To begin this exercise, begin a new sheet metal part using the Sheet

Metal (mm).ipt template.

2 In the open sketch, create a 1400-mm circle centered on 0,0.

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 989




➤

Exit panel ➤

Finish Sketch, or

right-click and select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

4 Create a Work Plane offset (up) from the XY Origin Plane by 2000 mm.

5 On this new offset Work Plane, create a 2D sketch.

6 In the sketch create a 600 mm x 600-mm square. Apply 300-mm

dimensions so that the square is centered on 0,0.

7 Place a point on the mid-point of one side of the square.

NOTE This point is not required for the Lofted Flange; however, you will use

it later to create a Rip feature to flatten the Lofted Flange.




8 Click Sketch tab

➤

Exit panel ➤

Finish Sketch, or right-click and

select Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

9 Hide the work plane that you created and the XY origin plane (if

displayed). Hide the dimensions on both Sketch1 and Sketch2. Your

model should appear as shown in the following image from the default

Home View (F6).

Lofted Flange - Select Profile Sketches | 991



Next, you create the Lofted Flange.





Lofted Flange - Create the Flange

1 Before you create the Lofted Flange, on the ribbon click Sheet Metal

tab ➤

Setup panel ➤

Sheet Metal Defaults, or right-click and select

Sheet Metal Defaults from the marking menu.

2 In the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box, clear the Use Thickness from

Rule option. Enter a value of 4 mm in the Thickness value entry field.

3 Click OK to accept the new material thickness and close the dialog box.


Create panel ➤

Lofted Flange.

5 In the graphics window, click to select the sketched square as Profile

1.

6 Click to select the sketched circle as Profile 2. A preview of the resulting

Lofted Flange displays using the default settings.

7 Since Press Brake is the selected Output option, the preview shows

a Lofted Flange that can be created using straight bends. This results in

a faceted approximation of the circle. There are three methods that you

can use to adjust the resulting facets. In this exercise, you increase the

default value for the Chord Value. Highlight the value of 0.5 mm,

and enter a new value of 4 mm. Notice that your preview adjusts to show

fewer facets.

NOTE If you have die-forming fabrication available, you can optionally select

Die Form as the Output option. Doing so results in a smooth, conical

transition from the circular profile to the square profile.

8 Another optional selection determines if the material thickness is on

one side or the other of the sketched profile. To see this better, zoom into the point that you created on the square profile sketch. By default,

the material is offset to the outside of the selected profile. In this exercise,

you want the dimensioned size of the profile to represent the outside of

the resulting part. The material must be offset to the inside of the profile.

Click the middle Flip Side.

Lofted Flange - Create the Flange | 993



Notice the material thickness now previews to the inside of the profile.

9 Click OK in the Lofted Flange dialog box to accept the edits you have

made, create the Lofted Flange, and close the dialog box.

Because you selected two closed profiles to create this Lofted Flange, the model

will not currently create a flat pattern.

Next, you add a Rip feature to allow the model to flatten.


Rip

Like its physical counterpart, a folded sheet metal model that forms a

continuous tube-like shape cannot be flattened. The Rip feature provides an

easy way to create a cut in a face of the model that will allow the flat patternto be produced.




To create a Rip feature, you select a face of the model and (optionally) either

one or two points that lie on the selected face. If you select an outside face,

any points selected must be on an edge of the outside face. Optionally, youmight select an entire face to be removed.

TIP In this exercise, the point used to locate the Rip feature was added to one of

the Lofted Flange profile sketches. Another technique is to create a 2D sketch on

a flat face of a Lofted Flange targeted for Press Brake output. Then place a point

at a strategic vertex or edge midpoint.

1 In the Model browser, click the + to the left of Lofted Flange1.

Right-click Sketch2, and select Visibility in the context menu to make

Sketch2 visible.

2 Adjust your view of the model so that the edge of the sketched square

which contains the point is visible on top.


Modify panel ➤

Rip.

4 Select the face to be ripped (which contains the sketch point along the

edge).

Rip | 995



5 Select the point you previously created that defines the location of the

single-point Rip.




With the point selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip | 997



NOTE The Rip can cut a bend face adjacent to the selected face; however,

a rip cannot cut across a bend face and through a second face. In this

example, if the point was located anywhere other than the midpoint of the

edge, the rip could not be created.

6 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the

dialog box.7 In the Model browser, right-mouse select Sketch2, and click Visibility

in the pop-up context menu to switch off Sketch2 visibility.


Rip (continued)

The previous Rip feature exercise directed you to create a sketch point to serve

as the rip point. While the creation of sketch points are required for certain

rip workflows, there are many instances where sketch points are not necessary.

Inventor also accepts work points, midpoints on edges, or endpoints on face

vertices as valid rip point selections.




Now, you will delete the rip feature and try creating it once again. But this

time, you will use the midpoint on the top edge of the 600mm x 600mm

square as the rip point.

1 First, make sure that the Sketch2 visibility is turned off as previously

directed.

2 Next, right-click the Rip node in the Model browser and select Delete

from the pop-up context menu. Your model should appear as shown.


Modify panel ➤

Rip.

4 As you did before, select the identical top face to rip.

Rip (continued) | 999



5 Next, move your cursor to the midpoint of the top edge. When the

midpoint appears, click to select.




6 With the midpoint selected, the Rip feature previews.

Rip (continued) | 1001



7 Click OK in the Rip dialog box to create the Rip feature and close the

dialog box.

Next, you will create a flat pattern of the ripped Lofted Flange.





Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange

Now that the Lofted Flange has had a Rip feature applied it is no longer a

continuous closed shape. It is now possible to create a flat pattern suitable for

manufacture.

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab

➤

Flat Pattern panel

➤


Flatten the Ripped Lofted Flange | 1003



The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and the bend extent lines

which indicate the bend zones required to flatten the lofted flange.

NOTE You can easily add a Rip feature to a lofted flange created from two

closed profiles and generate a valid flat pattern. Your manufacturing shop

may prefer to fabricate this type of part as two pieces.

Using this flat pattern, you next explore Bend Order Annotation.





Bend Order Annotation

To accommodate efficient manufacturing, bends must often be created on

the shop floor in a specific sequence. The manufacturing sequence has little

in common with the design sequence. Using the flat pattern you currently

have open, you can explore modifications to the bend order sequence.

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab

➤

Manage panel ➤

Bend

Order Annotation.

Notice that a series of numbers appear within circles with a yellow

background. As you proceed, focus on these numbered symbols in theupper portion of the flat pattern:

Bend Order Annotation | 1005



As you can see, these numbers do not currently have a logical sequence:




Next, you explore creating a directed sequence of bend overrides.

NOTE Do not be concerned if the order of the numbered symbols on your flat

pattern differ from those shown in the images.


Directed Reorder

1 Right-click in the graphics window, and select Directed Reorder from

the pop-up context menu.

The Directed Reorder method of applying bend sequence overrides

requires that you select a beginning bend and an ending bend. The

system applies a new bend order sequence between the selected bends.

Directed Reorder | 1007



2 Click the upper-most bend symbol (labeled A in the previous image) to

select the starting position of the override sequence.

3 Click the lower-most bend symbol (labeled B) to select the ending

position. Notice that the symbols all change from yellow circles to green

squares.




Also notice that the numbering sequence has been changed. The bend

you selected as the starting position is now numbered 1. The remaining

bends are numbered in sequence to the bend that you selected as the

ending position.

Directed Reorder | 1009



Next, you explore creating a sequential reorder of bend identification overrides.


Sequential Reorder

If you were happy with the sequence you obtained, you can right-click and

select Done, then right-click again and select Finish Bend Order.

Alternatively, pressing Esc twice is equivalent to selecting Done and Finish

Bend Order from the pop-up context menu.

Since this is an exercise, you will not keep the directed sequence that you

created.

1 Right-click, and select Remove All Overrides from the pop-up context

menu. Notice that the green squares revert to yellow circles and the

numbering sequence returns to the initial sequence generated by

Autodesk Inventor.

2 Right-click again, and select Sequential Reorder from the pop-up

context menu.




Use sequential reordering to pick bends manually in the order that you

need them to be manufactured.

3 Beginning again with the upper-most bend, click every other bend. As

you click a bend, notice that the yellow circle again changes to a green

square. The numbers change to correspond to the selected sequence.

Click two or three more bends until you get the feel of this technique.

As explained previously, when you are happy with the reorderedsequence, press Esc twice, or use Done followed by Finish Bend Order

from the context menu.

4 Since this is an exercise, right-click again and select Remove All

Overrides from the context menu followed, by Finish Bend Order

to exit the command.

NOTE In a third method of editing the bend order, you select a single, individual

bend and change the bend order identification.

Next, you explore converting lines sketched on your flat pattern into cosmetic

centerlines.


Sequential Reorder | 1011



Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines

Cosmetic centerlines are straight lines sketched on a flat pattern that are

converted to bend lines with bend extent lines. They represent bends that do

not exist in your folded model, possibly stiffening creases or a bend line you

want to place on a die-formed portion of your flat pattern. Cosmetic centerlines

carry bend attributes that can be recovered in drawings. They can be sequenced

using the Bend Order Annotation techniques explored in the previous exercise.

1 Click to select the face of the flat pattern.




NOTE If you did not clear the Autoproject edges for sketch creation

and edit application option, as specified in the Prerequisites at the

beginning of this tutorial, the sketch and all subsequent sketches made inthis tutorial will have unneeded projected geometry.


➤

Sketch panel ➤

Create

2D Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking

menu.

3 Click OK in the dialog box that displays the message Edits to the flat

pattern are exclusively applied to the flat pattern and will

not be reflected on the folded model.

4 Sketch two straight lines as shown:

Cosmetic Centerlines - Create Sketched Lines | 1013



NOTE In this example, the size and position are not critical so dimensions

will not be applied. In your designs, you will likely want to apply dimensions

to position these lines accurately.


Exit panel ➤



Next, you convert the sketched lines to cosmetic centerlines.





Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Cosmetic

Centerline, or right-click and select Cosmetic Centerline from the

marking menu.

The Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box displays, and bend direction

information appears on the existing bends in the flat pattern. The

Sketched Bend Lines selection cursor is active.

2 Select the two straight lines that you added to the sketch.

Notice that the bend direction for these two lines differs from the bend

direction of the other bends. This may or may not suit your purposes.

To minimize material handling during the creation of this example part,you change the bend direction.

3 Click the Specifies Bend Up or Bend Down button in the Cosmetic

Centerlines dialog box to change the bend direction attribute.

Notice that the displayed bend attributes of the sketched lines now match

the displayed bend attributes of the other bend lines on the flat pattern.

4 Change the Bend Angle value to 3 degrees in the Cosmetic

Centerlines dialog box.

5 Click OK in the Cosmetic Centerlines dialog box to create the cosmetic

centerlines using the specified attributes and close the dialog box.

Notice that the sketched lines now display using the Bend Centerline

linetype. Using the techniques learned in the Bend Order Annotation exercise,

click Flat Pattern tab

➤

Manage panel ➤

Bend Order Annotation,

or right-click and select Bend Order from the marking menu. Notice that

the cosmetic centerlines now participate in the bend order sequence.

Cosmetic Centerlines - Convert Sketched Lines | 1015



These cosmetic centerlines can now be included in bend tables and bend notes

you create in your drawings.

6 Click the Esc key to exit Bend Order Annotation.


➤

Folded Part panel ➤

Go

to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the

marking menu, to return to the folded model state.

8 You can Save your exercise file; however, the file is not used in further

exercises.

9 Close the file that you have been using for these exercises.

Next, you will add Contour Roll features to a supplied sheet metal part.





Contour Roll

Creating digital prototypes of roll formed sheet metal parts in Autodesk

Inventor requires using a Contour Roll feature. The Contour Roll command

creates a feature like a Contour Flange that uses a sketched profile as well as

a sketched axis of revolution. The profile and axis geometry must exist within

the same sketch.

In this exercise, you open a file that contains a straight Contour Flange feature.

You add two Contour Roll features and a final Contour Flange. You then create

a flat pattern of the resulting folded model.


2 Open Sheet Metal Parts 2 ➤

contour_roll-start.ipt.

Contour Roll | 1017




➤

Sketch panel ➤

Create 2D

Sketch, or right-click and select New Sketch from the marking menu.

4 When prompted to select a plane or sketch, select the top face of the

Contour Flange feature as shown:




NOTE All sketch illustrations in this tutorial show the grid displayed. If you recently

completed either the Parts 1 or Parts 2 tutorials, you have undisplayed the

sketch grid by changing the Application Options. This tutorial does not require

the use of the sketch grid and may be completed with the grid displayed or undisplayed.

Next, you project edges into the sketch.


Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry

In this exercise, you project the edges of the existing Contour Flange and add

a straight line as the axis of revolution. However, you can use any open profile

consisting of lines, arcs, splines, and elliptical arcs to create a Contour Roll

feature.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1019



NOTE The Contour Roll feature will transform sharp sketch corners into bends in

the finished part using the bend radius value. This behavior is like the Contour

Flange feature and is not apparent in the following exercise.

1 If necessary, orient your sketch using the View Cube or View Face so

that you are looking at the sketch plane.


Draw panel ➤

Project

Geometry, or right-click and select Project Geometry from the

marking menu.

3 In the graphics window, click to select the lines and arcs that define the

outside edge of the Contour Flange feature as shown:

NOTE Be sure to select individual lines and arcs rather than the face loop of

the detail faces.

4 Click Sketch tab

➤

Draw panel ➤

Line, or right-click and selectLine from the marking menu.




5 Create a line to represent your axis of revolution as shown:

NOTE The length of this line is not important; however, the line should be

parallel to the short, horizontal line segments that you projected into your

sketch. You can either imply the parallel constraint as you draw the line or

add a parallel constraint after the line has been drawn.

Project Contour Roll Profile Geometry | 1021



6 Click Sketch tab

➤

Constrain panel ➤


and select General Dimension from the marking menu. Place a

100-mm dimension between the line you created and the short,horizontal line segment that you projected into your sketch.

7 Click Sketch tab

➤

Exit panel ➤



8 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the overflow menu

(or press F6) to reorient your view to an isometric view.


Create a Contour Roll


➤

Create panel ➤

ContourRoll. The Contour Roll dialog box displays, you are prompted to select

an open profile.

2 In the graphics window, click the edge geometry that you projected into

your sketch. The selected geometry highlights, and the Axis selection

button becomes active.

3 In the graphics window, click the straight line that you created parallel

to the projected edge and then offset with a 100-mm dimension.

A 90 degree Contour Roll section previews; however, what is previewed

is not what you want for this exercise.

4 Clear the default Rolled Angle value of 90 deg degrees and enter 30

deg into the value field.

Your preview should now appear as follows:




5 Click OK to create the 30-degree Contour Roll segment and close the

dialog box.

Next, you repeat these steps with a few minor differences to create a similar

Contour Roll that sweeps 30 degrees in the opposite direction.


Create a Second Contour Roll

1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the

end face of the edge of the first Contour Roll as the new sketch plane:

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1023



2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal

material, and then add a straight line segment. This straight line segment

should be on the side of (and parallel to) the long horizontal projection

and offset by 100 mm. For the previous contour roll, the axis of

revolution was on the side of the two short horizontal segments. By

putting the axis on the opposite side of the profile, the revolution will

curve in the opposite direction when you create this contour roll.




3 With your sketch completed, create the Contour Roll feature.

Notice that the Rolled Angle value is 30 degrees, the last value you

used in this command. It is the value you will use for this second contour

roll. Your preview should appear as shown in the following image.

Create a Second Contour Roll | 1025



4 Click OK to create the second 30-degree contour roll segment and close

the dialog box.

As a final modeling step, you will use the same sketch and project edges

technique to create a sketch to use for a second contour flange.


Add another Contour Flange

1 Repeat the steps you used to create the Contour Roll feature, using the

end face of the edge of the second Contour Roll as the new sketch plane.

2 As you did previously, project the outside edges of the sheet metal

material. You are now ready to create the Contour Flange feature.





➤

Create panel ➤

Contour

Flange. The Contour Flange dialog box displays. Select the profile you

just projected.

Expand the dialog box using More (>> in the lower right), and use the

Width Extents type of Distance and a value of 200 mm.

4 Click OK to create the second 200-mm Contour Flange segment and


Your completed model should appear similar to the following image.

Adjust your view of the model as needed.

Next, you create a flat pattern.


Add another Contour Flange | 1027



Flatten the Rolled Tube

Because the Contour Flanges and Contour Roll features have formed an open

tube, you can create a flat pattern without adding any additional features.




The flat pattern is created. The Flat Pattern tab displays as the active ribbon

tab.




The flat pattern displays the bend centerlines and bend extents for the four

90-degree bends that form the square tube, It also displays as the two roll

centerlines for the two 30-degree rolls created by the Contour Roll features.

Bend centerlines, bend extents, roll centerlines, and roll extents are all exported

to separate layers when a flat pattern is exported to DWG or DXF formats to

facilitate flexibility in CNC manufacturing.

Flatten the Rolled Tube | 1029



In the final portion of this tutorial, you explore the use of the Unfold and

Refold feature. You unroll and unfold the model that you created, adding

some features and then refolding and rerolling the model.


Unfold and Refold Feature Pair

There are some features that are easier to create when the model is flat. Use

the Unfold feature to unfold (or unroll) all or some of the bends (or rolls)

within your model. With the model unfolded, you can then add features and

use Refold features to return the model to the folded state.

In this portion of the tutorial, you unroll the two Contour Roll features and

unfold two of the four bends that form the square tube. You add a hole which

you will pattern down the length of the part. To complete the exercise, you

add two Refold features to refold and reroll the model. The completed model

will appear as shown in the following image.

1 On the ribbon, click Flat Pattern tab ➤

Folded Part panel ➤

Go

to Folded Part, or right-click and select Go to Folded Part from the

marking menu, to return to the folded model.




NOTE Alternatively, you can also double-click the Folded Model node in

the Model browser to return to the folded model state.

2 If necessary, right-click and select Home View from the pop-up context

menu (or press F6) to change the view to an isometric orientation.


Modify panel ➤

Unfold. The Unfold

dialog box displays, and two stationary reference planes appear at either

end of the Contour Roll features.

4 In this exercise, we first unroll the Contour Roll features. Click in the

graphics window to select the lower stationary reference plane.

Unfold and Refold Feature Pair | 1031



Once you select a stationary reference, the rolls that can be unrolled

relative to that reference are highlighted.

Next, you continue with additional Unfold selection steps.


Continue Unfold Selection

1 Click to select the lower curved face as shown in the following image.




As you select faces, the preview shows the model state that results by

unrolling the selection.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1033



2 In this exercise, we straighten the tube completely. Click the upper

curved face (not the preview graphic) to select the second rolled face.




Once the second rolled face is selected, the model again previews the

unroll results.

Continue Unfold Selection | 1035



3 Click Apply in the Unfold dialog box to straighten the model as shown

in the preview and to reset the dialog box for the next round of unfolds.

Next, you unfold two of the 90 degree bends which form the square tube.


Partially Unfold the Tube

Use the Unfold feature to pick the bends that you want to flatten. It is not

necessary to flatten the model completely. It is possible to add the linear hole

pattern. For this exercise, with the model unrolled in its current state, you

will first unfold an additional two 90-degree bends.

1 As with the unrolled model that you created, you first identify astationary face. Click the face shown in the following image.




As soon as you select the face shown, the bends that can be unfolded

relative to that face highlight:

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1037



2 Click to select the bend which forms the 90-degree corner closest to you:




Once the bend is selected, the part previews in the unfolded state.

Partially Unfold the Tube | 1039



Next, you finish creating the Unfold feature.


Complete the Unfold Feature

1 Click to select the second 90-degree bend as shown in the following

image.




Following the select, the unfolded bend is previewed:

Complete the Unfold Feature | 1041



2 Click OK in the Unfold dialog box to flatten the two bends as shown in

the preview and to close the dialog box. Your model should now appearas shown in the following image.




Although these steps are not required to add the holes (that you will add next)

they illustrate adding an Unfold feature to flatten straight bends.

Notice that your feature browser now contains two Unfold features: one for

the unfolding of the two contour rolls and one for the unfolding of the two

straight bends.

Next, you add a hole and pattern the hole so that it crosses the (now flat) faces

of the Contour Roll features.


Complete the Unfold Feature | 1043



Add a Hole


Sketch panel ➤

Create

2D Sketch, or right-click and select 2D Sketch from the marking menu.

Then select the face shown in the following image.

2 Reorient your view, if necessary, using the View Cube or View Face

commands, so that you are looking directly at the sketch.


Draw panel ➤

Point. Drag over the projected

origin point, and then up. You should see the dotted line which indicates

that the point you will place is aligned with the origin point.




4 Click to place the point.


Constrain panel ➤


and select General Dimension from the marking menu. Now, place

a 25-mm dimension between the point and the bottom edge of the

unfolded part.

Add a Hole | 1045



6 Finish the sketch and exit the sketch environment.


Modify panel ➤

Hole, and place a 5-mm

diameter hole with a Through All termination on the sketched point.

Next, you pattern the hole.


Pattern the Hole

1 On the ribbon, click Sheet Metal tab ➤ Pattern panel ➤

Rectangular.

2 Select the hole as the feature to pattern.

3 Click the Direction 1 button and select a vertical edge and direction

as shown:




4 Enter a value of 20 for the total number of holes, and a value of 25

mm for the distance between each hole.

5 Click OK to create the pattern of holes that cross the two flattened roll

faces and close the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.

Next, you add two Refold features to return the flattened model to the folded

and rolled state.

Pattern the Hole | 1047




Add Two Refold Features

The Refold feature is the complement of the Unfold feature. You are not able

to place a Refold feature unless there is an Unfold feature in the model. When

there are more than one Unfold features in the model, you must refold them

in reverse order. You must refold the most recently created Unfold feature

first.

Although there are several Refold workflows, in this exercise you use the most

common workflow. You right-click to select the Unfold feature and select

Refold Feature in the pop-up context menu. This method automatically selects

the originally selected stationary face and which ever bends or rolls were

originally selected to create the Unfold feature. Other Refold workflows providemore flexibility and allow partial refolding when that makes sense for your

design situation.

1 Right-click the Unfold feature in the Model browser that is immediately

above the Hole feature. Select Refold Feature in the pop-up context

menu.

Notice that the two 90-degree straight bends refold, and that a Refold

feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser.

2 Right-click the first Unfold feature (between the Contour Flange

feature and the second Unfold feature), and select Refold Feature.

Notice that the two 30-degree Contour Roll features reroll and that a

second Refold feature is added to the list of features in the Model browser.

The completed model will appear as shown in the following image.




This completes the exercises of this tutorial.


Add Two Refold Features | 1049



Summary

The features you explored in this tutorial represent powerful additions to your

sheet metal modeling skills.■ Transitional shapes defined by selecting two profiles for a Lofted Flange

feature are common in some sheet metal design situations.

■ The ability to define the output of a Lofted Flange targeted at either a Press

Brake or Die Form manufacturing process provides flexibility in both design

and manufacturing.

■ The ease of adding a Rip feature to a Lofted Flange created from two closed

profiles provides for ease of flat pattern creation during the design process.

■ Bend Order Annotation on the sheet metal flat pattern allows

documentation of the correct fabrication sequence.

■ The ability to add cosmetic centerlines provides additional efficiencies by

allowing the documentation of bends that have not been created in the

folded model state.




■ Certain features are easier to create while the model is flat: Unfold and

Refold features allow efficient creation of these features while showing

them correctly in both the final folded model and the flat pattern.

What Next? As a next step, consider exploring the creation of Lofted Flange

features with two open profiles. Or, create a variation of the folded and rolled

square tube with cut features that cross over both the 90-degree square corner

bend as well as the 30-degree rolled faces. You can also explore the capabilities

of the Inventor Studio environment which was used to create several of the

photorealistic images that were used in this tutorial.

Previous (page 1048)

Summary | 1051



1052



Sheet Metal Styles

41

1053



About this tutorial

Control sheet metal characteristics.



electrical box.iptTutorial File Used

1054 | Chapter 41 Sheet Metal Styles







In this tutorial, you capture and manipulate the following sheet metal

characteristics using sheet metal styles:

■ Complete material definition

■ Bend relief shape and size

■ Bend radius value

■ Bend transition type

■ 2-bend corner relief type and size

■ 3-bend corner relief type and size

Various style types, or style categories, control sheet metal characteristics. The

style types, when taken together, create a composite style that determines the

characteristics of a sheet metal part. You can apply styles locally to the active

part, or you can save new styles and style edits to the Style Library to share

the styles.

Objectives

■ Create new styles.

■ Save the styles to the Style Library.

■ Use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part.

■ Edit the styles.

■ Apply a library style change to a part.

Prerequisites



and extruding.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 1056)








Edit the Project and Open the Sample File

Later in the tutorial, you write style information to the Style Library. The

library must be set to Read/Write. You use the Projects editor to make this

setting.

1 Click ➤

Manage

➤

Projects.

2 Double-click the tutorial_files project to make this project active.

3 In the lower panel of the Project editor dialog box, if Use Style Library

is Read Only or No, right-click this setting and select Yes. This value

sets the Style Library to Read/Write.

4 Click Save and then Done.

5 Openelectrical box.ipt, located in the Electrical Box folder.





Add a New Material

In this portion of the tutorial, you add a new material to the document.

1 On the Tools tab ➤

Material and Appearance panel ➤

Materials

. The Material Browser displays.

The Material Browser has two sections:

■ Document Materials, upper section

■ Library Materials, lower section

2 The new material can be made from an existing one. In the library

section, if not already selected, select Inventor Material Library.

3 In the library list, on the right, scroll to locate Steel - Mild. Double click

the material in the list.

The material is added to the document and opened in the Material Editor.

4 In the Material Editor, change the material name to Steel - Test.

5 Before continuing, in the Asset section, select the structural asset. Note

the properties making up the material listed in the pane below. When

making new materials you can modify some properties, others are

determined by the material Type and Class to which the asset is assigned.

In addition, the new material is not currently saved in the part file. If

you close the part without saving, this new material is lost.


Change the Appearance

1 Ensure Steel - Test is selected in the Material browser.

2 In the Asset section of the Material Editor, select the Appearance asset.

3 To the right, click

4 In the Asset Browser, select the Appearance named Steel - Galvanized

5 Click . You can also use double-click to select and exchange an

appearance in one step.

Add a New Material | 1057



6 Close the Material Editor.

7 Select the component and in the Material Browser, select the new material

Steel - Test. The part has the new material and appearance.

8 Close the Material Browser.


Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gaugeand Material

Next, you define a new sheet metal rule style that includes a sheet metal gauge

and material, along with bend and corner relief attributes.

To define the gauge and material:

1 On the ribbon, click {Condition: product='inv'}{Condition: product='inv'}

Manage tab Styles and Standards panel Styles Editor .




The browser on the left side of the Styles and Standards Editor lists

three style types or style categories:

■ Lighting

■ Sheet Metal Rule

■ Sheet Metal Unfold

Unique styles are nested under each of these top-level nodes.

Expand the Sheet Metal Rule style category in the browser.

2 Right-click the Default node, and select New Style from the pop-up

context menu. Name the new style Sheet Metal Rule Style Test. Click

OK to close the New Local Style dialog box.

3 Ensure that the new style is selected in the browser, and that the Sheet

tab is selected.

4 Select Steel, Mild from the Material menu.

5 Specify a thickness of .105 in.


Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Gauge and Material | 1059



Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and

Corner Relief Now, define the bend and corner relief attributes:

1 Select the Bend tab.

2 Change the Bend Radius from Thickness to Thickness * 1.15.

3 Select the Corner tab.

4 Change the 2 Bend Intersection relief shape to Square.

5 Change the Relief Size to Thickness * 5.




6 Right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style Test in the browser, and select

Active from the pop-up context menu.

If you receive an error message, click Accept. The error is not critical in

this exercise.

7 Click Save in the Style and Standard Editor dialog box.

If a message box displays, click Accept.

The program applies the bend radius and corner relief style attributes to

the part.

Define the New Style - Sheet Metal Rule Bend and Corner Relief | 1061





3 Click OK. The program notifies you that the operation overwrites styles

in the library.

4 Click Yes.

Any style marked Yes is saved to the Styles Library. They can be shared

from part to part, and shared with anyone who has access to the project.

TIP You can also save styles to the style library in the Style and Standard

Editor. Right-click a style in the browser, and select Save to Style Library.

5 Save and close the part.


Create Sample Part

In this portion of the tutorial, you create some simple sheet metal geometry

and then apply styles to the part.

1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window.

Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down menu next to

the icon.

2 In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Sheet Metal (in).ipt template .

3 Sketch a rectangle approximately 10 inches square. The exact size and

shape is not important.

Create Sample Part | 1063



4 Click the Finish Sketch command on the ribbon, or right-click andselect Finish 2D Sketch from the marking menu to exit the sketch.


Create panel ➤

Face . You can

also right-click and select Face from the marking menu.

6 Accept the default dialog box settings, and then click OK.

Next, you add two flanges.

7 Click the Flange command from the ribbon or the marking menu.

.8 Select two adjacent edges.




9 Click OK.

The default template uses the default sheet metal styles. Next, you use

Sheet Metal Defaults to apply the new styles to the part.

TIP If you routinely use a certain style set, create a sheet metal part template that

uses those styles by default.


Use Sheet Metal DefaultsYou use Sheet Metal Defaults to apply different styles to the active sheet metal

part. The changes are local to the part.


Setup panel ➤

Sheet

Metal Defaults , or right-click and select Sheet Metal

Defaults from the marking menu.

Because you saved the styles you created to the Style Library, they are

available for application in this part.

2 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Sheet MetalRule Style Test.

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1065



3 Ensure the Use Thickness from Rule option is selected.

The Thickness input field is disabled, and the thickness you specified

for Sheet Metal Rule Style Test is shown in the field.

4 From the Material drop-down menu, select Steel - Test.

5 Click Apply. The program applies the styles to the part.




6 For confirmation purposes, you can use the commands on the Tools

tab, Measure panel to run a couple of checks.

■ The sheet thickness is 0.105 in, as specified in Sheet Metal RuleStyle Test.

■ The bend radius is 0.121 in, per the style specification of Thickness

* 1.15 (0.105 * 1.15).

Use Sheet Metal Defaults | 1067



■ In addition, the corner is square, per the Sheet Metal Rule Test

Style.





Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles

With Sheet Metal Defaults, you can quickly apply different styles to the

part in a wholesale manner. You can also directly access the Styles and

Standards Editor through the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to make edits

to the styles themselves.

1 If you closed the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box to use the Measure

panel commands, select the Sheet Metal Defaults command again

from the ribbon or the marking menu .

2 Click the Edit button next to the Sheet Metal Rule menu.

Sheet Metal Defaults and Editing Styles | 1069





Update Styles

On the previous page, the edit you made to the Rule Style Test style was

only applied locally (the active part). To make the edit available globally, save

that style to the Style Library.

1 In the Style and Standard Editor, right-click Sheet Metal Rule Style

Test (under the Sheet Metal Rule node in the browser) and select

Save to Style Library in the pop-up context menu.

2 Click Done to close the editor.

3 The edited and globally saved style is not picked up automatically by

parts that share the style. Update that style in any other part that uses

the style.

4 Close the Sheet Metal Defaults dialog box.

5 Openelectrical box.ipt.

TIP Select the file from the Recent Documents section of the Application

menu.

6 Click Manage tab ➤ Styles and Standards panel ➤ Update

.

7 In the Update Styles dialog box, set the Update? column for Sheet

Metal Rule Style Test to Yes.

8 Click OK.

A message appears stating that the library style definition will overwritelocal style edits.

9 Click Yes. If a message box displays, click Accept.

The edit that you made to Sheet Metal Rule Style Test (the change

in corner relief size) is applied to this part.

10 Closeelectrical box.ipt.


Sheet Metal Defaults and the Flat Pattern

Finally, you can also use Sheet Metal Defaults when the flat pattern is active.

Update Styles | 1071



The sample part you created should still be open.



Create Flat

Pattern .

2 Next, click Sheet Metal Defaults .

3 From the Sheet Metal Rule drop-down menu, select Default.

4 From the Unfold Rule drop-down menu, select Steel 16 Ga_KFactor.

5 Click OK. The changes are applied to the part.





Summary


■ Created new styles.

■ Saved the styles to the Style Library.

■ Used Sheet Metal Defaults to apply styles to a sheet metal part.

■ Edited the styles.

■ Applied a library style change to a part.

Summary | 1073



Remember to check Help for further details.





Frame Generator

About this tutorial

Build structural frames.



42

1075



Start a new assembly file

frame_generator.ipt

Tutorial Files

Used frame_generator_hybrid.ipt





In this tutorial, you create structural frame assemblies in a standards-based,

automated fashion with Frame Generator.

First you use a predefined skeletal model consisting of unconsumed sketches

to determine the placement and extent of frame components, such as square

tubing and c-channel. Then you fit those components together with miters

and cuts.

Finally, you use a hybrid model consisting of a solid and sketches to place the

frame components. The Frame Generator process saves extensive assembly

and part modeling.

Objectives

■ Select and position frame components.

■ Trim excess material.

■ Create miter joints.

■ Create notched cuts.

■ Make edits to the assembly.

Prerequisites


view tools, and work with components in the assembly environment.

■ Understand the Help topic “Getting Started.”

Navigation Tips



Next (page 1077)

1076 | Chapter 42 Frame Generator







Get Started

Frame Generator uses frame members contained in the Content Center. To

begin, set your active project, and then verify that Content Center is installed

and configured.

1 Click ➤

Manage

➤

Projects.

2 In the Projects dialog box, double-click the tutorial_files project in

the projects list to set it as the active project.

3 In the lower-right corner of the Projects dialog box, click Configure

Content Center Libraries.

4 In the Configure Libraries dialog box, verify that the Din and ISO

Content Center libraries are available.

5 Close all dialog boxes.

NOTE The Content Center libraries must be configured and available to perform

the tutorial steps. If no libraries are available, install and configure the Content

Center libraries before starting the tutorial. See the Help for more details, or contact

your CAD Administrator.


Skeletal ModelThis tutorial uses a skeletal model to position and create frame members.

Create an assembly and place the skeletal model.

1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam

template.

2 Place one occurrence of frame_generator.ipt located in the Frame

Generator folder into the assembly.

Get Started | 1077



This part consists of one 2D and one 3D sketch that together define the

sample skeletal model. You use this part model to define the placement

and extent of frame components in the assembly.

3 Save the assembly using Skeletal.iam for the name.





Insert Profile

The Frame Generator commands are located in the Frame panel of the Design

tab. We start by inserting frame members on the four upright lines.


Frame panel ➤

Insert Frame

.

2 Select ISO from the Standard menu.

3 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu.

4 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.

5 Select the upright sketch line as shown in the image. Ensure that you

select somewhere on the upper half of the line. The position of the framemember is partially dependent on which half of a given line you select.

Insert Profile | 1079



6 The tube previews as shown in the image. Select the other three upright

lines.




NOTE To remove a line from the selection, press and hold Ctrl and then

select the line again, or select the profile preview.


Profile Orientation

By default, the tube profiles are centered on the selected sketch lines.

The orientation indicator corresponds to the selected sketch line.

Profile Orientation | 1081



1 Click the middle radio button to the right of the profile preview image.

The profile preview in the graphics window shifts position relative the

sketch line to match the position of the orientation indicator.




2 Click the center radio button to return to the default orientation.

The previews update accordingly.

The Offset fields control the distance by which the profile is offset from

the selected sketch line.

3 Enter 300 mm in the Horizontal Offset field (labeled with the

Horizontal Offset icon).




The Mirror Frame Member command controls the profile orientation

relative to the selected geometry, in this case a sketch line.

4 Click Mirror Frame Member, and notice the offset direction swapsin the graphics window.




5 Return the profiles to the original orientation: click Mirror Frame

Member again, and enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field.





Create Profile

We must make one last adjustment to the orientation before creating the

frame members.

1 Click the arrow next to the Angle field, and then select 90.00 deg from

the menu.

2 Click Apply.

3 Click OK in the Create New Frame dialog box.




The Frame Member Naming dialog box displays. This dialog box is used

to change member display names, member file names, and locations.

4 Click OK without making changes.

Whenever this dialog box appears in the tutorial, click OK without

making changes in the dialog box.

NOTE If you press Cancel during the frame member naming, the frame

members are created using the default names.

The profiles are created, and you can continue to make other profile

selections.


Place the Upper C-channel

Now we insert a c-channel on the upper horizontal lines.

1 Select ISO 657/11 - 1980(E) from the Family menu.

2 Select CH 250 x 34 from the Size menu.

3 Select the sketch line as shown in the image.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1087



The preview shows the profile is upside down (relative to the design

intent for this model).




4 Select 270.00 deg from the Angle menu.

Place the Upper C-channel | 1089




Orient the Upper C-channel

The orientation of the c-channel must be changed to meet the design intent.

1 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicators, as shown, so

that the top of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the tubes.




2 Click Apply.


Place the Lower C-channels

We now place c-channel members along the bottom lines, so that the bottom

of the c-channel is flush with the ends of the rectangular tubing.

1 Select the four lower lines as shown in the image.

Place the Lower C-channels | 1091





3 Click Apply.


Place the Lower C-channels | 1093



Place the Horizontal tube

Place a tube across the remaining horizontal line.

1 Select the remaining horizontal line.




2 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Rectangular) from the Family menu.3 Select 250x150x10 from the Size menu.

Place the Horizontal tube | 1095




5 Click the radio button to move the orientation indicator.

6 Click Apply.





Place the Angle Braces

Only one more selection set and we are finished with component placement.

We place the angle braces using the sketch lines.

1 Select ISO 657/14 - 2000 (Square) from the Family menu.

2 Select 80x80x6.3 from the Size menu.

3 Ensure that the orientation indicator is on the center radio button, the

horizontal and vertical offsets are set to 0.00 mm, and the angle is 90.00

deg .

4 Select the two angular lines.

Place the Angle Braces | 1097





2 On the ribbon, click Design tab

➤

Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten .

3 In the Lengthen - Shorten Frame Member dialog box, click Both Ends.

4 Select the c-channel.We know the rectangular tube is 150 mm wide and that the c-channel

currently extends to the center of the tubes. Therefore, the extension

distance is (150/2) + (15) = 90.

5 Enter 90 mm in the Extension field.

6 Click Apply.

The program adds 90 mm to both ends of the c-channel.

7 Click Cancel.

Lengthen Profile | 1099




Notch Profile

Next, we fit the tube within the c-channel using the Notch command.


Frame panel ➤

Notch .

2 Select the tube, as shown.

The first selection is the component to cut. The second selection is the

cutting tool.

The other member selection command activates automatically.

3 Select the c-channel to use as the cutting tool.

4 Click Apply.




5 Repeat these steps for the notch cut on the other vertical member at the

opposite end of the c-channel.

6 Click Cancel.

7 To see the notches clearly, turn off the visibility of the c-channel. In the

Model browser, right-click the c-channel, and then remove the check

mark next to Visibility.

8 Turn on the Visibility of the c-channel when finished.


Notch Profile | 1101



Create Miter Joints

Now, create miter joints between the shorter vertical tubes and the horizontal

tube.


➤

Frame panel ➤

Miter .

2 Select the first and second tube as shown.

3 Orient the model view as shown in the following image to see how the

miter options affect the miter joint.




NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for

clarity.


Change Miter Joint Options

We now try different miter options and use the one that best fits our design.

1 To create a clearance for a groove weld and see the two miter types, enter

5 mm in the Miter Cut Extension field.

Miter Cut at both sides is selected by default. As the name implies,

this option adds or removes material on both components equally.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1103



2 Click Apply.

The total offset distance between the mitered faces is 5 mm.

3 To continue experimenting with the miter options, select Miter Cut

at one side.

4 Select the lower tube, and then select the upper tube.




5 Click Apply.

The joint is offset 5 mm, but only the lower tube is offset from the joint

midplane.

6 This time, select the upper tube first, and then the lower tube.

7 Click Apply.

The first component selected is the component offset from the joint

midplane.

Change Miter Joint Options | 1105



8 Create another miter joint at the other tube junction.

9 Click Cancel when finished.


Remove End Treatments

For this exercise, assume that the miter joints you created previously are

incorrect and must be recreated.


➤

Frame panel ➤

Remove End

Treatments . This command is located in the expanded Frame

panel.




2 Select the horizontal tube, and then click Apply.

The program removes the miter joints and restores the tubes to their

original, unmodified state.

3 Click Cancel.


Frame panel ➤

Miter ,

and then re-create the miter.

NOTE The miter offset type is not important for this example.

Remove End Treatments | 1107




Re-create Miter Joint

Re-create the second miter.


Frame panel ➤

Miter ,

and create the miter shown.






Trim Profile

Next, we remove the excess material from the lower c-channels.

1 Orient the model view as shown.

NOTE The visibility of the tube in the background has been turned off for

clarity.

Trim Profile | 1109




➤

Frame panel ➤

Trim to Frame

.

3 First, select the trimming component, which is the tube.




4 Select the component to trim, which is the c-channel.

Trim Profile | 1111



5 Click Apply.




6 Use the same method to trim the other c-channel.

You can repeat these steps to trim the c-channels at the other three

junctions, but it is not required for this exercise.

7 Close the Trim to Frame dialog box when finished.


Trim Profile | 1113



Cut Profile

Now, remove the excess material from the angle braces using existing faces

as the cutting plane.



➤

Frame panel ➤

Trim/Extend

.

3 First, select the component to cut, which is the square tube.




4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.

5 Click Apply.

If desired, you can set the view to Wireframe display, and orbit the

model to more clearly see the cut results. Return to Shaded display

when finished.

Cut Profile | 1115



In the remaining steps, we cut the other side of the tube using the same

method.

6 Select the tube, click the Face command, and then select the face, as

shown.




7 Click Apply.

8 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.


Profile Information

Use the Frame Member Info command to view characteristics of a frame

component.


Frame panel ➤

Frame Member

Info . This command is located in the expanded Frame panel.

2 Select a frame member.

Profile Information | 1117



The dialog box populates with the information on the selected

component. The Select command remains active, and you can select a

different component to return information on that component.

3 Click Done when finished.


Change Profile

Use the Change command to make various edits to a selected component.

The Change command uses the same dialog box as the Insert Frame

Members command and allows modification of any of the properties in the

dialog box.


➤

Frame panel ➤

Change

.

2 Select the longer square tube.

3 Select 90x90x6.3 from the Size menu. Leave all other settings at the

default values.

NOTE You can use the Multi-Select Profiles option located at the lower right

of the dialog box to select and modify multiple components in one execution.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Yes in the Frame Generator message box.6 Click OK in the Frame Member Naming dialog box.

The cuts on the tube are preserved.


Load Calculation

You can use the Beam/Column Calculator to determine how loads affect

the design.




On the ribbon, click Design tab

➤

Frame panel ➤

Beam/Column

Calculator to access the command.

The Beam/Column Calculator command is not used in this tutorial.


Refresh

You can publish your own frame shapes to Content Center or modify existing

Content Center families and templates. Use the Refresh command to update

existing frames after the Content Center has been modified.

On the ribbon, click Design tab

➤

Frame panel ➤

Refresh to

access the command.

The Refresh command is not used in this tutorial.


Modify the Skeleton

The frame components are associative to the skeletal sketches. We modify the

sketches in frame_generator.ipt to see how this change affects the framemembers.

1 Edit frame_generator:1.

Refresh | 1119




Parameters panel

➤

Parameters .

3 Change the value for base_L to 3000 mm.

4 Click Done.

5 Return to the assembly. The frame components, including the various

joints and cuts, update to match the change.




6 Close the assembly.


Hybrid Skeleton

In this exercise, we start a new assembly and place a component that contains

a solid and unconsumed sketches. This component is used as the skeleton for

our frame. We use Frame Generator to add frame members around the solid

and sketches.

1 Create a new, blank assembly file using the Standard (mm).iam

template.

2 Place frame_generator_hybrid.ipt into the assembly.

Hybrid Skeleton | 1121



This skeletal model consists of a solid feature and unconsumed sketches.

3 Change the display from Shaded to Wireframe.


Insert Profile - Insert Frame Members

We now insert frame members around the existing geometry. First, select the

profile to use for the frame members.

1 Save the assembly. Use frame-hybrid.iam for the file name.


➤

Frame panel ➤

Insert Frame

.

3 Select DIN from the Standard menu.




4 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu.

5 Select S 40 x 5 from the Size menu.

6 Select Steel from the Material menu.


Insert Profile - Select Geometry

Now we select the geometry to position the lower and upper frame members.

For the lower frame members:

1 Select the four lower edges. Ensure that the first selection matches the

image, as indicated by the cursor.

2 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1123





5 Click Apply. The Create New Frame dialog box appears.

6 Click OK.

For the upper frame members.

1 Select the four upper edges. Ensure that you select the left end of the

first line, as shown.

2 Click Apply.

3 Change the graphics display to the Shaded visual style.

Insert Profile - Select Geometry | 1125







Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member

Next, we position the first vertical member.

1 Select the vertical edge.



Insert Profile - Position First Vertical Member | 1127



The inside surfaces of the channel must be flush with the outer surfaces

of the existing channels.

4 Enter -10 mm in the Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset fields.




5 Click Apply.

NOTE Since the orientation of the channels for each vertical edges isdifferent, we place the channels one at a time.


Insert Profile - Position Remaining VerticalMembers

Repeat these steps for the remaining vertical edges:

1 Select an edge.

2 Use the Angle field to adjust the orientation of the frame member, asneeded.

3 Click Apply.

4 Click Cancel when all vertical members have been inserted.

Insert Profile - Position Remaining Vertical Members | 1129




Lengthen Profile

In our design, the vertical members must be flush with the upper and lower

channels. We must lengthen the vertical members to meet this criteria.

1 Orient the model view, as shown.





Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten .

3 Select the vertical channel. Make the selection near the top of the

channel.

NOTE When you lengthen one end of a component, the end closest to your

cursor when you select the component is the end that is lengthened.

4 Ensure the One End command is selected.

Currently, the end of the vertical channel is flush with the inner surfaces

of the upper channels. The width of the channels is 40 mm. Therefore,

the extension distance is 35 mm.


6 Click Apply.







➤

Frame panel ➤

Miter .

3 Select the two channels.

Create Miter Joint | 1133



4 Ensure Miter Cut at both sides is selected. Enter 2 mm in

the Miter Cut Extension field.

5 Click Apply.




6 You can repeat this process for the remaining seven junctions, but it is

not required for this tutorial.

7 Close the dialog box when finished.


Insert Profile - Place Other Members

Now, we use the sketches to place the other members of the frame.

1 On the ribbon, click Design tab ➤ Frame panel ➤ Insert Frame

.

2 Select DIN EN 10219-2 (Circular Hollow Section - Cold Formed)

from the Family menu.

3 Select 26.9x3 from the Size menu.

4 Enter -3 mm in the Vertical Offset field.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1135



5 Enter 0 in the Horizontal Offset field.


7 Set the orientation indicator, as shown in the following image.

8 Select the five sketch segments as shown.

NOTE Depending on where you select on the first element, you may need

to adjust the orientation and angle to match the preview in the image.




9 Click Apply.

Insert Profile - Place Other Members | 1137




Insert Profile - Add Support MembersNow we insert the support members.

1 Select the line as shown.





3 Click Apply.

4 Select the remaining line.

5 Set the orientation indicator as shown.

Insert Profile - Add Support Members | 1139



6 Click OK.





Cut Profile - Trim Tubing

Next, we trim the round tubing.


Frame panel ➤

Trim/Extend

.

2 Select the four tubes, as shown.

3 In the Trim - Extend To Face dialog box, click the Face command, and

then select the face as shown.

Cut Profile - Trim Tubing | 1141



4 Click OK. The tubes are trimmed to the selected face.


Lengthen Profile

First, we must lengthen the support tubes so we can notch them to meet the

other tubes.


Frame panel ➤

Lengthen/Shorten .

2 Select the tube as shown.





4 Click OK.








Notch Profile

Now that the support tubes extend past the other tubes, we can notch the

supports to fit the mating tubes.


➤

Frame panel ➤

Notch

.

2 Select the component to notch, which is the lower tube.

Notch Profile | 1145



3 Click the notching profile, which is the upper tube.

4 Click OK. The lower tube is notched to fit the upper tube.





Insert Profile - Point To Point

Next, we add angular braces.


Insert Profile - Point To Point | 1147




Frame panel ➤

Insert Frame

.

3 Select DIN 59 370 S Angle Steel from the Family menu.

4 Select S 35 x 5 from the Size menu.

5 Select the Insert Members Between Points option.

6 Select the start point. This point is the corner vertex on the skeletalmodel.




7 Select the end point.




8 Set the orientation indicator, as shown.

Enter -5 mm in the Vertical Offset field.




9 Enter 0.00 mm in the Horizontal Offset field.

10 Enter 0.00 deg in the Angle field.

11 Click Apply.

12 Use this procedure to add another brace on the other side. Change the

value for the angle to 180.00 deg , and click the Mirror Frame

Member command.






Cut Profile - Trim Supports

Finally, we trim the supports to meet the vertical frame members.

1 Turn off the Visibility of frame_generator_hybrid:1, and then

orient the model view as shown.


Frame panel ➤

Trim/Extend

.

3 Select the angular braces.

4 Click the Face command, and then select the cutting face.




5 Click Apply.

6 Select the angular braces again.

7 Click the Face command.

8 Select the cutting face.

Cut Profile - Trim Supports | 1153



9 Click Apply.




10 If you like, you can repeat this procedure for the other end of the braces.


Summary


■ Select and position frame components.

■ Trim excess material.

■ Create miter joints.

■ Create notched cuts.

Summary | 1155



■ Remove end treatments from a profile.

■ Replace components.

■ Work with both wire frame and hybrid skeletons.

Remember to check the Help files for further information.





Summary | 1157



1158



DWG Data 1

43

1159



About this tutorial

1160 | Chapter 43 DWG Data 1



Part 1 - Create parts from DWG files.

Data ExchangeCategory


eBox2.dwgTutorial File Used





Import two layers from a multiple layer DWG file to create a simple extruded

part.

Prerequisites


The imported layers contain the geometry and the dimensions that define

the sketch you use to create the extruded part.

Navigation Tips



Open a New Part FileNext, import the DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor part file. You need a

part file open in 2D Sketch mode. Open a new Part document:

1 Click the New icon , located at the top of the application window.


the icon.

2 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).ipt template .

Open a New Part File | 1161







The part opens in Sketch mode, where the 2D Sketch commands are available

and the sketch grid displays, if turned on.

Import DWG Data


Insert panel ➤

ACAD .

NOTE If a dialog box appears prompting you to choose a translator, select

Translator: DWG and click the OK button.

2 Select eBox2.dwg , and then click Open. The Layers and Objects Import

Options dialog box opens.

3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to each

layer, except the p and p dim layers.4 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field.

5 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog

box. Activate the Constrain End Points and Apply geometric

constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the dialog box.

6 Click Finish to close the dialog box. The program imports geometry

and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.

7 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2DSketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment.





Extrude Sketch Geometry

1 Press E on the keyboard, or right-click and select Extrude from the

marking menu, to invoke the Extrude command.

2 Click inside the 4.25" x 4.25" square to satisfy the profile selection. This

is the only portion of the sketch to be extruded.

Extrude Sketch Geometry | 1163



3 Drag the gold distance manipulator until the value 0.075 appears

in the value input box. Alternatively, you can enter .075 directly inthe box.




4 Click the green Ok button to create the extrusion and exit the command.


Orient the Part

1 On the navigation toolbar in the graphics window, click Zoom .

2 In the graphics window, click and drag the zoom indicator down thescreen to zoom in on the extrusion.

Orient the Part | 1165



NOTE If your system zooms out when you drag down, it is likely that this

option was selected during installation. You can easily change the zoom

direction of the drag and mouse wheel (at any time): on the Display tabof the Application Options dialog box select the Reverse direction option.

If you have been using AutoCAD for some time you may be more comfortable

using the AutoCAD zoom direction preferences.

3 Click the following image to play the animation.

4 On the navigation toolbar, click Free Orbit .

5 In the graphics window, click and drag inside the orbit indicator to orbit

the part.

6 Right-click, and then select Done [Esc]. The exact position of the part

is not important.

7 Press F6 to orient the part in the default home view.


Change the Part Appearance

To change the part color:

1 Select a new appearance from Appearance drop-down menu. The menu

is located on the Quick Access Toolbar at the top of the Autodesk Inventor

window.

2 Select Blue (Sky) from the list of available part appearances.

In the default Home (isometric) view, the part appearance looks dark.You can optionally orbit the part again using the technique just described

to see how model position in relation to the lighting affects the

appearance.





Save the Part

1 Click Save , located on the Quick Access Toolbar.

2 Name the file panel, and then click Save.

3 Click ➤

Close to close the file.


Save the Part | 1167



Summary


■ Use existing DWG geometry to define a sketch profile.

■ Use the sketch geometry to create an extruded part feature.

■ Orient the part using Zoom and Free Orbit.

■ Change part appearance.

■ Save the part.

■ Close the part file.

Use the skills you learned in this tutorial to create a more complex part in the

next tutorial, DWG Data 2.

Use the table of contents to the left to start the DWG Data 2 tutorial.


Click here to return to the tutorials home page




DWG Data 2

44

1169



About this tutorial







eBox2.dwgTutorial File Used





Import two different layers from the same DWG file. Create the cover for an

electrical panel from the DWG geometry.

This tutorial draws on skills you learned in part 1 of this tutorial set.

The cover consists of a base extrusion, a fillet, and a shell. You use the existing

geometry and dimensions from the DWG file to create the part features in

Autodesk Inventor.

Prerequisites

■ Complete Part 1 (DWG Data 1) of this tutorial set.


Navigation Tips



Next (page 1171)

Open Part and Access DWG

1 Open a new part file:

■ Click the New icon , located at the top of the application

window. Ensure that you click the icon itself, not the drop-down

menu next to the icon.

■ In the Create New File dialog box, click the English folder, and then

double-click the Standard (in).ipt template .


Insert panel ➤

ACAD .

Open Part and Access DWG | 1171










Import DWG



2 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the p

and p dim layers, and then check the c and c dim layers.

3 Ensure All is selected in the Selection field.

4 Click the Next button to display the Import Destination Options dialog

box. If not already enabled, activate the Constrain End Points and

Apply geometric constraints check boxes at the lower-left of the

dialog box.

5 Click the Finish button to close the dialog box. The program imports

the geometry and dimensions on the specified layers into the sketch.




6 Click Finish Sketch on the ribbon, or right-click and select Finish 2D

Sketch from the marking menu, to exit the sketch environment.

NOTE Finishing a sketch automatically switches the display to the Home

(isometric) view. Restore the front view of the sketch by clicking Front on

the View Cube at the upper-right of the display screen.


Extrude Sketch Geometry

1 Press E on the keyboard to invoke the Extrude command, or right-click

and select Extrude from the marking menu.

The "front" view of the inserted DWG file contains geometry which

represents the outside of the cover and the thickness of the material that

makes the cover sides. To create this part, you select both of the regions

displayed in the front view inside of the 6.30" x 6.30" rectangle.

Notice that you must click inside both sketch loops. Click to play the

animation which shows the selections needed.

2 In the value input box in the in-canvas display, or the Extents field of

the Extrude dialog box, highlight the 1 in value.

3 Select the .560 dimension value (the full depth of the cover) in the "top"

view of the inserted geometry.




4 The program replaces the default extrude distance of 1 inch by the

existing dimension, as represented by the parameter name d5.

5 Click the green Ok button to create the base feature that will become

the electrical panel cover and exit the command.

6 Press F6 to position the part in the Home view.








Create a Round

Next, you create the rounded edge on the outside of the cover. You reference

existing dimensions to determine the radius for the round, just as you did to

create the base extrusion.

1 In the Model browser, click the expand/collapse symbol next to

Extrusion1.

2 Right-click Sketch1 to display a menu of commands that apply to thecurrent selection, and then select Visibility.

3 Select Zoom All from the Navigation toolbar. Zoom All is also located

on the Navigate panel of the View tab. The imported sketch is visible

and ready for reference in the graphics window.





Modify panel ➤

Fillet

. You can also right-click and select Fillet from the marking

menu.

5 Select the edge loop on the front of the cover (the edge opposite the face

with the sketch).

Create a Round | 1177



The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the default Radius value in the value input box in the

in-canvas display, or in the Fillet dialog box. Select the .110 dimension

value found on the lower left corner of the front view of the sketch

geometry.




7 Click the green Ok button to create the round and exit the command.

Create a Round | 1179







Create a Shell


Modify panel ➤

Shell

.

2 Use Orbit to approximate the view shown in the following image. The

exact orientation is not important.

Create a Shell | 1181



3 Use the Shell command to hollow out the model while maintaining a

specified wall thickness. You can remove faces of the model that will be

open after completing the command.

4 Select the face with the sketch.




5 Using the dimension-referencing technique you learned previously,

highlight the default value in the Thickness field of the Shell dialog

box, and select the dimension value .060 located in the top view of the

sketch geometry to set the material thickness.




6 Click OK to create the shell and exit the command.




Notice that because you created the round before the shell, the program

creates the inner fillet automatically as part of the shell operation.




7 In the Model browser, right-click the Sketch1 browser node and remove

the check mark next to Visibility to turn off the display of the sketch.

8 Save the part, using cover_panel for the file name.

9 Close the part.


Summary


■ Import layer-specific DWG data into an Autodesk Inventor sketch. Then

create an Autodesk Inventor solid model of the ACAD drawing views using

the actual DWG geometry and dimensional values.

■ Add round and shell features to an extrusion.

■ Use and refer to the imported DWG data to determine feature dimensions.

■ Use the Autodesk InventorOrbit command to make the selection of

geometry easier during feature modeling.

■ Use Autodesk Inventor marking and context menus to access commands

that apply to the current selection.

■ Use the Visibility option on browser objects to ease your design process.





Summary | 1187



1188



DWG Data 3

About this tutorial

45

1189






Start a new assembly documentTutorial File Used

Create the box portion of the electrical panel within the context of the

assembly. Use specific layers of the supplied 2D DWG file to define the Inventor

solid part geometry.

At the assembly level, insert the panel and cover parts you created earlier. Use

assembly constraints to position the parts relative to one another.

This tutorial draws on the skills you learned in parts 1 and 2 of this tutorialset.

Objectives

■ Create part models in the context of an assembly.

■ Use layers of a DWG file to define your part geometry.

■ Insert parts into an assembly.

■ Position parts relative to one another with assembly constraints.

Prerequisites

■ Complete Parts 1 and 2 of this tutorial set.


various view tools.


Navigation Tips






Next (page 1191)

Create New Assembly File1 Ensure that your active project is tutorial_files.

2 Click the New icon located at the top of the application window.


the icon

3 In the New File dialog box, click the English tab, and then double-click

the Standard (in).iam template.

You now have a new, empty assembly.


Create New Assembly File | 1191



Create In-place Component

1 To begin creating the electrical box in the empty assembly, right-click

anywhere in the graphics window, and then select Create Component

from the marking menu. The Create In-Place Component dialog box

opens.

2 In the New Component Name field, type box.

3 Next to the Templates menu, click Browse Templates , then

select the English tab, and double-click the Standard (in).ipt template.

4 Click OK in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

NOTE Although this tutorial (and the previous two tutorials) required you

to select the English tab, you usually select a new template from the templatesdisplayed on the Default tab when creating new files.

5 Before Autodesk Inventor can create the empty part file where you create

your electrical box, you must select a plane in the assembly. The plane

is coincident to the sketch plane of the part. Often, a planar part face

exists in the assembly on which you want to create your part. However,

in this tutorial the assembly is empty, and you select an origin plane.

Notice that the cursor changes and the program prompts you to

Select sketch plane for base feature.

6 To select an origin plane (that is not currently visible), click the

expand/collapse symbol next to the assembly Origin folder to expand

the folder.

TIP The origin folder for the assembly is located at the top of the browser,

just under the Representations folder.

7 Select the XY Plane. This selection aligns the new part origin with the

assembly origin in your empty assembly file.

Once you select the origin plane, the program creates and names thepart document. The assembly browser updates to show the new part and




that you are working within the sketch of the newly created box part

file. The sketch commands are active and you can begin to define the

geometry for the first extrusion.

8 If necessary, click the Front face of the View Cube to set the sketch

plane parallel to the screen.


Insert DWG Data


Insert panel ➤

ACAD .

Insert DWG Data | 1193







3 In the Selective Import field, remove the check marks next to the c

and c dim layers, and then check the b and b dim layers.

4 Ensure that All is selected in the Selection field.

5 Click Finish. The program imports the geometry and dimensions on

the specified layers into the sketch.

NOTE The colors of your sketch lines could be different from the image.

Differences in color are not important for this tutorial.


Extrude Geometry

1 Press E on the keyboard to activate the Extrude dialog box.




Like the previous tutorial, you must select each of the regions inside the

6 x 6 rectangle. In this case, there are three.

2 To make the selection of the first region easier, click Zoom Window

located on the navigation bar in the graphics window. Then

drag a zoom window around the area to magnify. Click the following

image to play an animation that shows using Zoom Window and

making the proper selections.

3 After you make the selections, click Zoom All to fit all geometry

within the graphics window.

As with the previous tutorials, you use an existing sketch dimension as

the distance of the extrusion being created.

4 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, or from the value input

box in the in-canvas display, highlight the 1 in value, and then select

the 4.00 dimension from the top view displayed in the sketch window.

5 Click Ok to create a solid extrusion 4 inches deep.

6 If necessary, press F6 to position the part in the default home view as

shown.

Extrude Geometry | 1195




Create Rounds

Next, you create rounds on the two edge loops of the front and back faces. As

before, you refer to dimensions contained in the imported sketch to determine

the size of the rounds.

1 In the browser, expand the part feature named Extrusion1.

2 Right-click Sketch1, and then select Visibility.

3 Click the Zoom All .




4 Click the Fillet command on the ribbon , or right-click and

select Fillet from the marking menu.

5 Select the front edge loop of the cover (the edge opposite the face with

the sketch).

Create Rounds | 1197



The round previews in the graphics window.

6 Highlight the Radius value in the Fillet dialog box, or in the value input

box in the in-canvas display, and select the 0.110 radius value that was

defined by the designer who originally created the DWG drawing.




7 Click Ok to create the round.


Create Shell

Like the cover part, this part must be hollowed out, or shelled. However, unlike

the cover part, you do not remove any faces from the part during the shell

operation.

1 Click the Shell command.

2 Highlight the default value in the Thickness field.

3 Select the 0.060 wall thickness value in the right-side view of the sketch,

which is still displayed in the graphics window.

Create Shell | 1199



4 Click OK to create the shell. Because the shell removed only interiormaterial, there is no apparent change to the part.




5 Save the part.


Create Cut Extrusion

Next, you use the imported sketch to remove material from the part.

1 Use the View Cube to change your view so that the sketch is visible.

Create Cut Extrusion | 1201



2 Click the Extrude command , and then click inside the inner

loop of the sketch. The preview indicates the current extrude distance.




3 In the Extents field of the Extrude dialog box, select To Next from the

drop-down menu. If you are using the mini-toolbar, select To nextface/body from the drop-down menu.

4 In the Extrude dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar, click Cut.




Within the selected region of the box part, you should see a direction

indicator pointing to the inside of the box. The indicator shows the

direction of the cut extrusion. Though dim, the direction indicator isvisible in the highlighted portion of the image.

5 To see the indicator more clearly, click the Flip Direction button in

the dialog box, or from the mini-toolbar.




6 Click the other Flip Direction button. Ensure the indicator points to

the inside of the box.




7 Click OK to create the cut. Because you selected To Next from the

Extents menu, or To next face/body from the mini-toolbar, the cutterminates on the next face it encounters. In this case, it is the back face

of the box.




8 In the browser, right-click Sketch1 (nested under Extrusion1), and then

remove the check mark next to Visibility.




9 Save the part.


Assembly Environment

1 In the Return section of the tab, click Return . This action

returns you to the top-level assembly environment from the part

environment. Assembly commands replace the part commands.

It is within this assembly environment that you add and constrain the

panel and cover parts that you created earlier.




2 Before you continue, save the assembly. Use eBox for the file name, and

then click Save. If prompted to save eBox.iam and its dependents, click

OK.


Show Origin Planes

The panel and cover that you created in the first two tutorials will be placed

relative to faces on the box you created. They will also be place relative to the

assembly origin planes (which are not currently displayed).

1 Hold down the Ctrl key, and click the YZ and XZ origin plane browser

nodes so that they are both selected. The planes highlight in the graphics

window. Click the following image to play an animation that illustratehow the planes will highlight.

2 With both planes selected, right-click one of the planes in the browser,

and then select Visibility. The planes are now visible in the graphics

window.

Show Origin Planes | 1209



You use these planes to attach, or constrain, the panel and cover parts

to the box part.

NOTE Your origin planes could be a different color.


Add Parts

Next, you add the panel and cover parts you created in the first two tutorials

to the assembly.

1 In a blank area of the graphics window, right-click, and then select Place

Component from the marking menu.

NOTE Do not right-click over the box which would invoke the context menu

for a selected component.




The Place Component dialog box displays. You are viewing the contents

of the Tutorial Files folder.

2 Find and select the panel part you created in the first tutorial, and then

click Open.

3 The panel is attached to your cursor. Click anywhere in the blank space

around the existing box part to place one occurrence of the panel. Do

not attempt to place the panel within the box.

After you click, notice that another occurrence of the panel is attached

to the cursor and ready for placement.

4 Since you only need one occurrence of the panel, press Esc to end the

Place operation.

5 Use the previous steps to find and place one occurrence of the cover part

you created in the second tutorial.

Add Parts | 1211




Unconstrained PartsYou placed the panel and cover parts; however, they are not in their final

positions. You use assembly constraints to locate the parts with respect to one

another. Typically, you need three constraints to position a part.

Currently, the panel and cover parts are unconstrained and are free to move

in 3D space. Click and drag the cover part. Notice that the part moves with

your cursor, and the part remains at whatever location you release the mouse.

Click in the following image to play an animation that shows dragging the

cover part within the assembly.





Grounded Parts

Now, attempt to drag the box part. This part does not move, and your cursor

changes to the push-pin, grounded symbol.

Autodesk Inventor always grounds the first part placed into an assembly to

provide a fixed, foundational part to which you can constrain other parts.

You can specify that any part is grounded or not grounded. You can also

specify that the first part placed is not grounded. But the best practice is to

select a strategic, foundational part for the first part placed, and then leave it

grounded.


Constrain the Panel Part - Display PlanesAs you become proficient with solid modeling, you learn that having your

part geometry oriented relative to your file origin provides certain benefits

during assembly. The supplied 2D DWG drawing was created so that the

geometry is symmetrical about the sketch origin point when inserted into the

Autodesk Inventor sketch The origin point is the X-Y 0, 0 coordinate. You

take advantage of the origin planes of each part as you position the parts using

assembly constraints. Display these planes now.

1 In the browser, expand the Panel part, and then expand the Origin

folder nested under the Panel part.

2 Use the technique used earlier to Ctrl-click the YZ Plane and XZ

Plane. Right-click the browser node for one of the planes, and selectVisibility to display the planes in the graphics window.

Click in the following image to play an animation that shows the results

of displaying the panel origin planes.

TIP As you proceed, your view angle of the assembly should approximate

that of the previous image. Orbit the part as needed.

3 Right-click anywhere in the blank space of the graphics window. Ensure

that you do not click on one of the parts. Then, select Constraint from

the assembly marking menu.

The Place Constraint dialog box activates.


Grounded Parts | 1213



Constrain the Panel Part - First Constraint

The Place Constraint command provides several different constraint types.

The Mate constraint is selected by default when the command is activated

and is suitable for all the constraints needed in this tutorial.

Any constraint type requires that you select geometry on two parts. In the

next step, you place a mate constraint between the top face of the panel part

and the inside back face of the box part.

1 Click in the following image to watch the animation, and then select

the face of the panel, as shown.

The selected face highlights and the direction indicator shows the

constraint vector.

2 Click the following image to watch the next animation and then select

the inside back face of the box part as shown.

By default, Place Constraint previews the constraint automatically.

It is only a preview and the constraint is not yet complete.

3 In the Offset field of the Place Constraint dialog box, change the default

value to 1 in to move the panel 1 inch away from the inside back face.

4 To finalize the constraint, click Apply. The mate constraint is created

and the panel is offset one inch from the back of the box.

The Place Constraint command remains active and ready for the next

constraint set.


Constrain the Panel Part - Second Constraint

The Mate constraint type is also needed for the next selection set; however,

you use the Flush solution type to modify the constraint. The Flush solution

points the constraint vectors of each selection in the same direction, rather

than in opposition.

1 In the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box, click Flush.




2 In the graphics window, select the YZ plane of the panel (click the

following image to watch an animation of this selection).

3 Select the YZ plane of the assembly (click the following image to watch

an animation of this selection).

4 Click Apply to create the constraint.

NOTE In the constraint that you created, no physical geometry existed for

either selection. It is important to consider the part and assembly origin

geometry when creating your part models and when constraining them in

assemblies. Parts should be created symmetrical about the origin when it

makes sense. Otherwise a principal face should be coincident with one of the origin planes. Use care when selecting the first part placed into an

assembly and its position relative to the assembly origin.


Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint

The panel needs one more constraint to finalize its position. In this next

selection set, you select the XZ plane of the assembly and the XZ plane of the

panel.

1 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the assembly originfolder. The plane highlights in the graphics window (click the following

image to watch an animation of this selection).

2 In the browser, select the XZ Plane, nested under the origin folder for

the panel part (click the following image to watch an animation of this

selection).

NOTE Since work features, such as workplanes, are abstract geometry and

you are not selecting a specific face, you can select them in the browser.

Note the direction vectors on each plane. If the direction vectors are

pointing in the same direction, you can place a Flush constraint.

However, in this case, the direction vectors are pointing towards each

other so you must change the solution type to Mate before you apply

the constraint.

Constrain the Panel Part- Third Constraint | 1215



3 Select Mate in the Solution field of the Place Constraint dialog box.

Click the following illustration to see how the constraint previews.

4 Click OK to create the constraint and close the dialog box. The panel is

now fully positioned.


Constrain the Cover Part - Place Constraint

Finally, you constrain the cover part to the box. This process is nearly identical

to the steps you took to constrain the panel part.

1 In the browser, expand the origin folder nested under the cover part.

2 Ctrl-click YZ Plane and XZ Plane, right-click the text for one of the

planes, and then select Visibility.






5 Select the inside face of the cover. Click the following illustration to see

how the constraint previews.

6 Click Apply to create the constraint. The inside face of the cover is

mated to the outside face of the box.





Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement

Next, you finish placement of the cover.

1 In the browser, select the YZ plane nested under the origin folder for

the assembly. The plane highlights in the graphics window.

Constrain the Cover Part - Finish Placement | 1219



2 In the browser, select the YZ plane for the cover.

3 Click Apply.





Final Constraint - Mate or Flush?Sometimes, when using origin planes to position a part, you know that your

final constraint will need to be either a mate or a flush. It is important to

observe the selection vector previews to determine if you want your arrows

pointing towards each other (mate) or pointing in the same direction (flush).

1 In the browser, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the assembly.

Then, select the XZ plane in the origin folder for the cover.

TIP When the expected preview of the constraint does not happen try

reversing the constraint solution.

Final Constraint - Mate or Flush? | 1221





3 Click the View Face command , located on the navigation

toolbar, and then select the front face of the cover. It makes that face

parallel with the screen.

4 Click View tab ➤

Appearance panel ➤

Visual Style, and select

Wireframe from the drop-down menu .

NOTE Autodesk Inventor defaults to the Shaded display visual style.

Wireframe, Wireframe with Hidden Edges and others are optional

visual styles.

5 If you like, you can now compare this front view of the Autodesk Inventor

assembly to the front view in the 2D drawing in the original DWG file.The geometry in the two files should be identical.

View the Assembly | 1223




Summary


■ Build upon the skills you learned in the previous tutorials in this set by

importing, using, and referring to DWG geometry in part sketches and

part features.

■ Create a part within the context of an assembly.

■ Insert parts into an assembly.

■ Position parts in the assembly using assembly constraints.

■ Use origin geometry to constrain parts in an assembly.

■ Display and undisplay origin geometry to aid in the clarity of your

assembly.

■ Change the display of your assembly from shaded to wireframe display

for optional visual inspection of part positions.

The next logical step in the workflow suggested by this set of tutorials would

be to document your design with an Autodesk Inventor drawing. You can use

the table of contents to the left to start the Drawings tutorial and learn how

to prepare final drawings.

These tutorials focused on using existing DWG geometry to build a set of three

simple parts and to put them together in an assembly. To increase your general

familiarity and comfort with Autodesk Inventor, you may find it useful to

work through some, or all, of the other tutorials. To access the tutorials from

the ribbon, select Get Started > Learn about Inventor > Tutorials.





Summary | 1225





Alias to Inventor

About this tutorial

Translate an Alias file to an Inventor part file and explore the association.



Keyboard.wire (original)

Keyboard.ipt

Tutorial File Used

Keyboard.wire (revised)

46

1227







In this tutorial, you open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it as an

Inventor part (.ipt ) file in Autodesk Inventor. You also reassociate an edited

Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part file.

Envision an engineering environment in which a standard keyboard design

was created as a surface model by an industrial designer using Alias. The Alias

geometry is translated into Autodesk Inventor and becomes an Inventor part

file (.ipt ). Additional design enhancements are made to the keyboard part file

using Autodesk Inventor modeling commands.

Meanwhile, the industrial designer continues to modify the Alias design into

a more organic, ergonomic shape. Because there is direct associativity betweenAlias and Autodesk Inventor, the part file is easily updated to reflect the new

ergonomic design when the modifications to the Alias surface model are

complete.

Objectives

■ Derive and exclude surfaces.

■ Import individual surfaces.

■ Update surface associations.

■ Open an Autodesk Alias wire file and translate it directly in Autodesk

Inventor as an Inventor part (.ipt) file.

■ Re-associate an edited Alias wire file to create an updated Inventor part

file.

Prerequisites

■ Have a basic understanding of the Derived Part functionality.


various viewing tools.

NOTE You do not need Alias to complete this tutorial.

Navigation Tips



Next (page 1229)

1228 | Chapter 46 Alias to Inventor







Translate the Alias Wire File


2 Use the Open command to select Alias Files (*.wire) from the Files

of type drop-down list.

3 Navigate to C:\Program Files\Audodesk\Inventor 2011\Tutorial

Files\Keyboard\Original, and select Keyboard.wire from the file list.

4 Click Options to display the Alias Import Options dialog box. Make

sure that the Associative Import radio button is active.

5 Click OK.

6 Next, click Open to open the Alias wire file.

You may experience a slight delay as the wire file is translated directly

into Autodesk Inventor and the Derived Alias dialog box displays.

Translate the Alias Wire File | 1229



Observe that four node names appear in the dialog box: Body, Keys,

Logo, and Tools. The layer icon appears just to the left of the four node

names because they represent the layer names of the surfaces which were

in Alias.




The top three commands in the Status area at the top of the dialog box

remain inactive until you select one of the nodes from the list. Use these

commands to select the layer as a composite surface or all surfacesindividually. You can also exclude some (or all) surfaces.

Use the + command at the far left to derive all the surfaces as a composite

surface. It is the default condition. A composite surface appears in yellow

and can be stitched into a solid. Most of the Autodesk Inventor modeling

commands, like Shell or Split, can then be performed on the stitched

solid.

Use the middle command \ to exclude selected surfaces from the yellow

composite surface. Excluded surfaces appear translucent.

Use the command at the far right to import objects as individual surfaces.

Individual surfaces appear in blue.

7 Expand the Logo node to display the eight surfaces that comprise the

letters of the Autodesk logo. Click the + command to the left of the logoname. Observe that the icon changes to \ indicating that all eight surfaces

are excluded from the composite surface. The logo does not appear in

the keyboard model.




8 Click OK to close the dialog box. The translated Alias file now appears

in the graphics window as an Autodesk Inventor part file comprised

entirely of surface features.




Take a moment now to examine the Model browser. The Keyboard.wire

node represents the associative import of the Alias wire file. Expanding

the Keyboard.wire node reveals the three composite surface features

(Keys, Tools, and Body) that were translated into Autodesk Inventor.

The composite names match the native Alias layer names.




NOTE Observe that the Logo surfaces do not appear under the

Keyboard.wire node because they were excluded previously in this

procedure.

9 Close the file without saving it.


Update the Inventor Part

1 Use the Open command to select Autodesk Inventor Files (*.iam,

*.idw, *.dwg, *.ipt, *.ipn) from the Files of type drop-down list.

2 Go up one folder level to C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Inventor 2011\Tutorial

Files\Keyboard , and select Keyboard.ipt from the file list. Click Open

to open the part file.

3 The completed keyboard part file appears in the graphics window. Rotate

the part to view the features.




The Model browser lists the operations that were performed on the part

file after it was translated into Autodesk Inventor. Observe that the

out-of-date icon appears in front of the Keyboard.wire node in the

browser.

Update the Inventor Part | 1235



This icon indicates that the original Alias wire file was edited since it

was initially translated into Autodesk Inventor. Now the Autodesk

Inventor part file is no longer in sync.

4 Click Update on the Quick Access toolbar to load the newer

version of the Alias file. After a short delay as the wire file loads, the

Update Part Document dialog box displays several error messages. Several

features that existed in the original Alias wire file are now missing from

the revised Alias wire file.

5 Click Accept to close the Update Part Document dialog box.




The Keyboard.wire node appears in a red font in the Model browser

indicating that the Alias wire file and the Autodesk Inventor part file are

no longer associated correctly.

6 Right-click the Keyboard.wire node in the Model browser, and select

Update Associations from the pop-up context menu. There is a delay

while the data is translated. When complete, the Update Associations

dialog box appears.

NOTE Two translucent views now appear in the graphics window. The view

on the left contains the information that is in the wire file. The view on the

right shows the updated information in Autodesk Inventor.




The Tools layer name appears in the drop-down list at the top of the

Update Associations dialog box.

The dialog box has two lists and a color legend that appears below the

two lists. Do not be alarmed if the colors in the color legend differ slightly

from the colors that appear on your screen. It is because the color legend

is based on the Autodesk Inventor color scheme in use.




The list at the left displays the surface names from Alias. The

corresponding Autodesk Inventor surface names appear on the right.

From left to right, the four status buttons at the bottom are labeled Matched, Orphaned, Updated, and Deleted. Observe from the

Keyboard Part File list on the right that surfaces Cavity_3_Bottom

and Cavity_3_Sides are orphaned. The two surfaces no longer exist in

the Autodesk Inventor part file after the original Alias wire file was edited.

Orphaned surface names always appear at the top of the list on the right.

These surfaces must be deleted.

NOTE There are several ways that you can delete these two surfaces. You

can select them individually, or you can hold the Ctrl key and pick them

both. Once the surfaces are selected, click the X at the top right of the dialog

box to delete. Alternatively, you can right-click and select Delete from the

context menu when the surface names are highlighted.

7 Delete Cavity_3_Bottom and Cavity_3_Sides from the Part File list

on the right. The deleted surface names now appear in a different color

in the list. You can observe the identical color change in the graphics

window.

8 Next, select the Body layer from the layer name drop-down list at the

top of the dialog box.




Observe that four surfaces from the Alias Body layer are orphaned. In

this instance, the surfaces still exist in the two models but they have

changed significantly and must be matched.

9 To match the orphaned surfaces, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body

Import File list on the left. Then, select Body_Fillet_A from the Body

Part File list on the right. Now click the Match command = located

just to the right of the layer drop-down list.

NOTE You can also match the two surfaces by right-clicking and selecting

Match from the context menu when the surface names are highlighted.

The two surface names in the file lists change color and also appear in

this same color in the graphics window.

10 Repeat the matching process with Body_Fillet_B and the other two

surfaces. Make sure to select = (the Match command) after each pair of

surface names are selected from the lists.11 After all four surfaces are matched, click OK to exit the Update

Associations dialog box.

There is a slight delay as the associations between the surfaces are

updated. When complete, the Autodesk Inventor part file appears in the

graphics window reflecting the changes that were made in the edited

Alias wire file.




The Update Associations dialog box also appears stating that StitchSurface4 cannot be built. This error message appears because the two

surfaces that were used to create Stitch Surface4 (Cavity_3_Bottom and

Cavity_3_Sides) were deleted.

12 Click Accept to close the Update Associations dialog box.

13 Expand the Sculpt1 node in the Model browser and observe the icon

next to Stitch Surface4.




14 Although not necessary, you can right-click over this node and select

Delete from the pop-up context menu if you want to remove it from

the Model browser. To remove the icon next to the Sculpt1 node,right-click over Sculpt1 and select Edit Feature from the pop-up

context menu. When the Sculpt dialog box appears, click OK to close

the dialog box and rebuild the Sculpt feature.

15 As an optional step, move the End of Part marker above Move Body3

in the Model browser to view the revised keyboard in an unexploded

representation.

16 Do not save Keyboard.ipt.


Summary

In this tutorial, you learned how to open and translate an Alias wire file directly

into Autodesk Inventor. Procedures to update the part file after changes are

made to the Alias file were also provided to illustrate the associativity between

Alias wire files and Autodesk Inventor part files. Some key points of this

exercise include:

■ Deriving and excluding surfaces

■ Deleting orphaned surfaces

■ Matching one surface to another


